Statistics

i

IBM SPSS Data Collection Author 6.0.1 User’s Guide

Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information under Notices on p. 376. This edition applies to IBM SPSS Data Collection Author 6.0.1 and to all subsequent releases and modiﬁcations until otherwise indicated in new editions. Adobe product screenshot(s) reprinted with permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated. Microsoft product screenshot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011

U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

Preface
Welcome to the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author 6.0.1 User’s Guide. This guide provides information on using the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author application. For information about installing the product, see the IBM SPSS Data Collection Desktop 6.0.1 Installation Guide. Adobe Portable Document Format (.pdf) versions of the guides are available on the IBM SPSS Data Collection Desktop 6.0.1 CD-ROM. Viewing and printing the documents requires Adobe Reader. If necessary, you can download it at no cost from www.adobe.com. Use the Adobe Reader online Help for answers to your questions regarding viewing and navigating the documents. Notice: IBM® SPSS® Data Collection offers many powerful functions and features for use in the business of our customers. IBM is not responsible for determining the requirements of laws applicable to any licensee’s business, including those relating to Data Collection Program, nor that IBM’s provision of (or any licensee’s receipt of) the Program meets the requirements of such laws. All licensees shall comply with all laws applicable to use and access of the Program, whether such use or access is standalone or in conjunction with any third party product or service.

About IBM Business Analytics
IBM Business Analytics software delivers complete, consistent and accurate information that decision-makers trust to improve business performance. A comprehensive portfolio of business intelligence, predictive analytics, ﬁnancial performance and strategy management, and analytic applications provides clear, immediate and actionable insights into current performance and the ability to predict future outcomes. Combined with rich industry solutions, proven practices and professional services, organizations of every size can drive the highest productivity, conﬁdently automate decisions and deliver better results. As part of this portfolio, IBM SPSS Predictive Analytics software helps organizations predict future events and proactively act upon that insight to drive better business outcomes. Commercial, government and academic customers worldwide rely on IBM SPSS technology as a competitive advantage in attracting, retaining and growing customers, while reducing fraud and mitigating risk. By incorporating IBM SPSS software into their daily operations, organizations become predictive enterprises – able to direct and automate decisions to meet business goals and achieve measurable competitive advantage. For further information or to reach a representative visit http://www.ibm.com/spss.

Technical support
Technical support is available to maintenance customers. Customers may contact Technical Support for assistance in using IBM Corp. products or for installation help for one of the supported hardware environments. To reach Technical Support, see the IBM Corp. web site at http://www.ibm.com/support. Be prepared to identify yourself, your organization, and your support agreement when requesting assistance.

Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011

iii

Contents
1 Author 1
Welcome to IBM SPSS Data Collection Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 3

What’s new in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author 6.0.1 Getting started

3 6

Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and creating a questionnaire file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Adding questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Adding a list of responses to multiple questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Inserting questions from the library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Creating a new routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Grouping multiple questions in a single page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Changing the question order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Testing the questionnaire and editing questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Formatting the questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Checking spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Activating the questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

4

The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

29
30 31 32 39 42 44 45 48 50 53 54 55 56

Starting and exiting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Creating and saving questionnaire files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening questionnaire files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with questionnaire files that are saved in a IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the layout of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window . . . Finding and replacing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undoing and redoing actions in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author. . . . . . Printing questionnaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation and additional resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

iv

5

Question Repository

58

IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Tools and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository configuration and customization . Checklist for Setting Up a IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository . . . The IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository Configuration File. . . . . . IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services authorization. . . . . . . . . . Configure repository connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring multiple question repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 59 60 66 71 71 72 75 75 78 79

Managing security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Documentation for IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

6

Creating questions and responses
Creating single response questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating multiple response questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating grid questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating True/False questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating numeric questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating text questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Date/Time questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating display text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating compound questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating loops to ask the same questions for different subjects . . Creating blocks of questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating database questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying question and response text from other applications . . . . Editing responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying additional response details in the design pane . . . . . . Creating shared lists of responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching a shared list to a question . . . . . . . . . . Attaching multiple shared lists to a question . . . . Editing a shared list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting existing responses to a shared list . . . Deleting a shared list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

83
. . . 87 . . . 90 . . . 92 . . 102 . . 103 . . 105 . . 107 . . 109 . . 111 . . 113 . . 120 . . 122 . . 143 . . 146 . . 149 . . 151 .. .. .. .. .. 152 153 155 157 158

Question type overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

v

Adding notes to a questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Creating a “Total Awareness” question. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Adding factors to responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Adding analysis values to responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Setting responses as missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Protecting questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Inserting questions from the library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Insert Library Item dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Saving questions or questionnaires to the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Using a question template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

7

Changing the Questionnaire Order

171

The Routings Pane and the Questions Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Adding Routings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Copying Routings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Deleting Routings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Renaming Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Copying and Pasting Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Moving Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Deleting Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Grouping Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Grouping Questions in Sections . . Grouping Questions in Pages . . . . Ungrouping Questions . . . . . . . . . Adding a Jump to Another Question . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. 180 181 182 183

Go To Routing Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 If Go To Routing Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Skip and Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Adding General Conditional Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Creating a Condition Block. . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ungrouping Condition Blocks. . . . . . . . . . Adding an Exit Instruction to a Questionnaire . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. 188 191 197 198

Adding Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Adding Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Adding Script Items from the Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Adding a Set Response to a Questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Code Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

vi

8

Adding Languages and Contexts

205

Adding and Removing Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Adding and Removing Contexts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Entering Text for Additional Languages and Contexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Defining Alternative Texts for Languages or Contexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Changing the Default Language or Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Changing the Current Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Setting the Read/Write Status for a Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Manage Languages and Contexts Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

9

Formatting questionnaires

216

Changing the presentation of a question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Substituting text in a question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Changing the formatting of question and response text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Adding formatting to question and response text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Advanced Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Advanced Category Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Advanced Response Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Attaching images to responses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Using style templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Applying a style template to a questionnaire . . . . . . . Applying a style template to an individual question . . Creating a custom template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the default template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using question templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. 230 231 232 232 232

10 Testing questionnaires

234

Previewing questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Previewing questionnaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Previewing IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper questionnaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Validating questionnaire files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Viewing the questionnaire script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Validating style templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Generating test answers for an interview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

vii

Setting up hints for auto answer tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Auto Answer dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Saving auto answer data to a data source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

11 Activating questionnaires
Activate Current Project - Project settings . . . . . . Activate Current Project - Disconnected settings. Activate Current Project - Participants settings . . Activate Current Project - Telephone settings . . . Activate Current Project - Quota settings . . . . . . . Activate Current Project - Advanced settings. . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

258
.. .. .. .. .. .. 266 271 276 297 331 332

Activation templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

12 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console

341

Activation History tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Filters tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

13 Local Deployment Wizard
Usage options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Validation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing options - data entry . . . . . . . . Routing options - live interviewing . . . Display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deployment options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expiry date and time options . . . . . . . Summary options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

345
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 345 346 346 346 347 347 348 348 348

Local Deployment Wizard overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

14 Managing project files

351

Manage Project Files dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

viii

15 Customizing IBM SPSS Data Collection Author
Options dialog box - General tab . . . . . . . Options dialog box - View tab. . . . . . . . . . Options dialog box - Library tab . . . . . . . . Options dialog box - Preview tab . . . . . . . Options dialog box - Project Template tab File Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

354
.. .. .. .. .. .. 354 356 356 357 357 358

Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

File Properties dialog box - Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 File Properties dialog box - Versions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Keycodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Keycodes – Auto-Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 IBM SPSS Data Collection Publish Assets Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

16 Transferring Files Between IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and Other Applications 365
Opening Files from Other Products in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Opening IBM SPSS Data Collection Author Files in Other Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Opening Questionnaires in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

17 Troubleshooting, tips and hints

370

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 IBM SPSS Data Collection Author in other languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

18 Accessibility Guide

374

Keyboard Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Accessibility for the Visually Impaired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Accessibility for Blind Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Special Considerations: Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Special Considerations: Interference with Other Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

ix

Appendix A Notices Glossary Index 376 379 381

x

Chapter

Author
Welcome to IBM SPSS Data Collection Author

1

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author is a desktop authoring tool for creating and previewing surveys for use in a variety of output formats. When you have created your survey, you can activate it to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server or open it in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper to format it and add scanning control information. This User’s Guide shows you how to use IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author 6.0.1. The following table provides a summary of the main sections of this guide.
What’s New Getting started The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository A summary of the new features available in each release. A step-by-step guide to help you ﬁnd your way around Author and learn how to create, format, test, and activate your questionnaire. Details of how to navigate around the Author window and work with some of the main features of the user interface. The IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository is a set of tools and components for the development, operation, and management of a working Question Repository. A Question Repository is used to store standard survey assets that can be used to create new questionnaires. Details of how to create questions and responses. Details of how to organize your questions into a ﬁnished questionnaire. Details of how to set up your questionnaire ﬁle for use in different languages or contexts. Details of how to change the appearance of your questionnaire. Details of how to test your questionnaire and preview the output. Details of how to activate the questionnaire in Interviewer Server, either in a test or live version. Details of how to deploy a survey to one or more IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer installations without requiring an Interviewer Server. The wizard provides a simpler alternative to the Activate dialog that is commonly used to deploy surveys to Interviewer. Details of how to customize Author and tailor it to your requirements.

Creating questions and responses Changing the Questionnaire Order Adding Languages and Contexts Formatting questionnaires Testing questionnaires Activating Questionnaires Local Deployment Wizard

Customizing IBM SPSS Data Collection Author

Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011

1

2 Chapter 1

Transferring Files Between IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and Other Applications Troubleshooting, tips and hints Accessibility Guide

Information on how you can use Author with ﬁles from other IBM® SPSS® Data Collection applications, and use ﬁles that you create in Author with other Data Collection applications. Information to help you overcome problems and recover from errors, as well as tips and tricks to increase performance. Information about accessibility in the Author user interface.

Chapter

What’s new in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author 6.0.1
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author 6.0.1 contains the following new features:

2

Virtual directory, session engine, and Web service registration. During the product installation, you

are presented the option for conﬁguring multiple virtual directories, session engines, and Web services. Conﬁguring multiple virtual directories, that run simultaneously, provides for optimum load balancing within a cluster. When any of the following features are selected during installation, you are presented with the Interviewer Server Administration Virtual Directory Conﬁguration dialog during installation: Accessories Service Phone Interviews Remote Administration Survey Tabulation Survey Reporter Server Edition Author Server Edition Conﬁguring multiple session engines allows you to better utilize the memory on each IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server machine. When you select to install the Interview Service feature, the Interview Session Engine Conﬁguration dialog displays during installation. Conﬁguring multiple Web services to run on a single machine allows you to better utilize the memory on each Web server machine. When you select to install the Web Service feature, the Interview Web Service Conﬁguration dialog displays during installation. Refer to the Virtual directory, session engine, and Web service registration section in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Server 6.0.1 Installation Guide for more information.
Exit routing items and project reporting accuracy. In previous versions, when an Exit routing

item was inserted into a questionnaire, you were typically required to create an info item that required the ﬁnal Next button to be clicked in order to successfully complete the survey. When the ﬁnal Next button was not clicked, the survey was not marked as complete, resulting in project reporting discrepancies. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author now provides the option to manually set the End of Interview / Stopped text, without the need for an info item, via the Exit routing item’s new Exit text setting. This enhancement allows surveys to successfully complete without the need to click the ﬁnal Next button. For more information, see the topic Adding an Exit Instruction to a Questionnaire in Chapter 7 on p. 198.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 3

4 Chapter 2

Auto Answer feature enhancements. The Auto Answer feature has been updated to support more robust auto answer playback capabilities including adding, editing, changing, and removing data sources connections, deﬁning the number of cases, and so on. Note that working with data sources is not supported in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition. For more information, see the topic Auto Answer dialog box in Chapter 10 on p. 245. Support for reserved names and keywords in metadata. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection now

provides full support for SQL and mrScript reserved names and keywords in metadata variables. In previous releases, the use of reserved SQL keywords could cause issues when using the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model to query data for processes such as DMOM; the use of reserved mrScript keywords could cause syntax errors when referenced within a routing script. Refer to the Reserved Keywords and Keyword Summary topics in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for more information.
Support for creating text response grids. You can now create text response grids (in addition

to existing support for categorical response and numeric response grids. Text response grid appearance and behavior is similar to that of numeric response grids. For more information, see the topic Creating grid questions in Chapter 6 on p. 92.
Interview preview enhancements. When previewing interviews, via the Preview Interview feature,

you can now: Click New Case to restart the interview preview (return the questionnaire to the beginning). For more information, see the topic Previewing questionnaires in Chapter 10 on p. 235. Record case data when previewing a questionnaire. This recorded case data can be used during auto answer playback. For more information, see the topic Auto Answer dialog box in Chapter 10 on p. 245.
Script filters. You can now create script ﬁlters that allow you to deﬁne expressions that cannot be

directly parsed for IfBlock, If Go To, and Skip-and-Fill items. For more information, see the topic Adding Script Filters in Chapter 7 on p. 196.
Project expiry setting in Local Deployment Wizard. The Local Deployment Wizard now provides an

expiry date and time step that allows you deﬁne the project’s expiration date and time (UTC time). Deﬁning a project expiration date and time allows interviewers to easily identify expired projects. Refer to Local Deployment Wizard overview for more information.
Client Sniffer custom control. The Client Sniffer custom control launches a wizard that asks what explanatory text should be displayed to a survey respondent while browser data is collected in the background. The information is stored in text variables that can be used to create branching logic in the survey. Display descriptions for unsupported script. When you open a ﬁle (created in another application)

in Author that includes script that the application is unable to parse, a new script routing item is created that includes a sampling of the unsupported script. You can provide this new routing item a name and, if necessary, rewrite the script in the Design pane’s Script tab.

5 What’s new in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author 6.0.1

x64 64-bit support. x64 64-bit editions are now provided for the Data Collection applications (note that Author Server Edition and IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Reporter Server Edition are only provided as x86 32-bit). Refer to the appropriate Data Collection installation guide for more information. Fix pack and hotfix information. You can now view information regarding which ﬁx packs and hotﬁxes are installed via the application’s Help menu.
Help > About Author... > Details...

What’s New Information for Previous Releases

What’s New information for previous Data Collection\Dimensions releases can be found in the Data Collection\Dimensions What’s New document. The document is in Adobe Portable Document Format (.pdf) Viewing and printing the document requires Adobe Reader. If necessary, you can download it at no cost from www.adobe.com. Use the Adobe Reader online Help for answers to your questions regarding viewing and navigating the document.

Chapter

Getting started

3

The topics in this section walk you through the process of using IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author to create a questionnaire. Each topic contains links to other topics in the online help with further information on the subjects discussed. It is recommended that you read these topics in order.
Topics in this section

1. Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and creating a questionnaire ﬁle 2. Adding questions 3. Adding a list of responses to multiple questions 4. Inserting questions from the library 5. Creating a new routing 6. Grouping multiple questions in a single page 7. Changing the question order 8. Testing the questionnaire and editing questions 9. Formatting the questionnaire 10. Activating the questionnaire

Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and creating a questionnaire file
Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author

Once you have installed IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author, you can open it from the Windows Start menu:
All Programs > IBM Corp. > IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 > Author > Author

The Welcome dialog displays, providing options for:
Create a new document. Launches Author with a new, empty questionnaire. Create a new document from project template. Allows you to create a new document, based on

a previously created template that has been saved as a .ptz ﬁle. A project template contains all of the artifacts for starting a new project (settings, resources, images, and so on) and an activation template to assist with project activation.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 6

7 Getting started

Open an existing document. Allows you to select and open an existing document. The list

is comprised of recently opened documents that include both questionnaire .mdd ﬁles and IBM® SPSS® Statistics .sav ﬁles.
Open a Statistics file. Allows you to select, open, and import the data contained within

SPSS Statistics ﬁles. SPSS Statistics ﬁles are imported into new, untitled .mdd documents with a .sav routing.
Open from Interviewer Server Administration. Allows you to select and open an existing

document from IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration. This option requires valid login credentials to Interviewer Server Administration. For more information, see the topic Working with questionnaire ﬁles that are saved in a IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project in Chapter 4 on p. 32.
Figure 3-1 Welcome dialog

Click Do not show this dialog in the future to prevent Author from displaying the Welcome dialog every time the application is launched. After selecting an option from the Welcome dialog, the Author window appears. Depending on what you chose on the Welcome dialog, the Author window displays an empty questionnaire, a questionnaire based on the chosen template, an existing questionnaire, or an existing SPSS Statistics .sav ﬁle.
Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author Server Edition

To launch the Author application:
E Log into an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server. E Select the appropriate project from the My Projects tree.

8 Chapter 3 E Click Author (located under the Design section). The selected project’s .mdd ﬁle will load in

Author. Note: If this is the ﬁrst time using the application, Author will ﬁrst download to your local ﬁle system before launching the .mdd ﬁle.
Creating a questionnaire file For Author

If you did not select an existing document or template from the Welcome dialog, Author automatically creates and opens a new, blank questionnaire ﬁle, allowing you to start creating the questionnaire immediately. All the questions will be placed in a default routing, which determines the order of the questions (routings are discussed in a later topic).
For IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition

By default, Author displays the selected project’s .mdd ﬁle. Creating a new ﬁle effectively overwrites the existing project ﬁle.
E From the menu, choose File > New

or click the New Document button.
Tip: An alternative method of adding display text is to press the key combination Alt+F, N.

A message displays, indicating that the new metadata document will overwrite the existing project .mdd ﬁle.
E If you want to overwrite the existing .mdd ﬁle click Yes, otherwise click No to continue working

with the current ﬁle. The example questionnaire that you are going to create consists of a small number of questions that require different types of responses. The next topic shows how to add these, but for now, simply add a title to the ﬁle.
Adding a title

The title provides the interviewer or respondent with information about the questionnaire, and does not require a response. The most suitable question type to use for this is Display Text.
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Display Text

Tip: An alternative method of adding display text is to press the key combination Ctrl+F10.

A new Display Text item is created. The item has a default name, which is used as a unique identiﬁer for the item. You can leave this as it is, or change it to a more meaningful name (this is useful if you add more than one).

9 Getting started E Click on the default name Display and change it to Title. E Now enter the text that will appear in the ﬁnished survey. Click in the description ﬁeld and type:

Survey of Coffee-Drinking Habits 2009.
Figure 3-2 Adding a title

Specifying the interviewing mode

When creating a new questionnaire, you can specify the interviewing mode to control the supported question types. Some question types are not supported in paper mode. The available interviewing modes are:
Paper - Scanning – The selected routing is designed for use with the IBM® SPSS® Data

Collection Paper and IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper - Scan Add-on applications. The questionnaires are generated via the Paper application and survey results are recorded via the Paper - Scan Add-on application.
Phone – The selected routing is designed for use with the Interviewer Server’s Phone

Participants activity. Interviewers call respondents and gather questionnaire responses over the phone.
Local – The selected routing is designed for use with the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection

Interviewer application. Survey information is collected locally (face-to-face) and the results are entered and veriﬁed via the Interviewer application.
Web – The selected routing is designed for Web interviewing. Respondents are provided a

survey URL and conduct the interview online.
Paper - Manual Entry – The selected routing is designed to allow all question types, some of

which may not be supported in Paper. It is recommended that when this mode is selected the resulting survey is not used in Paper, but is instead printed or previewed in Author\IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Professional.
E Click New Routing in the Routing pane on the left of the screen. Notice that the Properties pane, on

the right of the screen, now displays available routings.
E In the Properties pane on the right of the screen, select one or more interviewing modes. For this example, select Paper - Manual Entry and Web.

10 Chapter 3 Figure 3-3 Adding a title

Saving the file
E From the menu, choose File > Save

(or press Ctrl+S).
For Author
E In the Save dialog box, browse to a folder where you want to save the questionnaire ﬁle. E In the File Name ﬁeld, enter a name for the ﬁle, for example, Coffee_Survey, and choose Save.

The ﬁle is saved with the ﬁle extension .mdd.
For Author Server Edition

The ﬁle is saved to the Interviewer Server, effectively overwriting the previous ﬁle version.

Adding questions
So far, the questionnaire contains only a title. This topic shows how to add questions of different types. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author provides a number of different question types that correspond to the different kinds of information you want to collect. First you need to decide on the type of question that you want to add, then insert it into the questionnaire.

Add the first question

The ﬁrst question will be: “Do you usually drink instant or ground coffee?”

11 Getting started Figure 3-4 A single response question

In this case, you want respondents to select one from a predeﬁned set of responses. This is called a single response (sometimes called single choice) question.
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Single Response

or press Ctrl+F1.
E A new single response question is added. Click on SingleResponseQuestion and change the name

to InstantOrGround, and enter Do you usually drink instant or ground coffee? in the question text ﬁeld.
Tip: To reduce the amount of typing, you can copy the text from this help ﬁle by selecting it and pressing Ctrl+C, then place the cursor in the question text ﬁeld in and use Ctrl+V to paste the text.

You can copy text from other Windows applications and paste it into Author in the same way.
E Click in the Responses table and enter the following responses, pressing Enter after the ﬁrst

response to create a new line: Instant Ground
E Press Ctrl+S to save the question in the questionnaire ﬁle (do this whenever you want to save

your work).
Add a numeric question

The next question will be: “How many cups of coffee do you drink in an average day?”
Figure 3-5 A numeric question

12 Chapter 3

To create a question that requires the respondent to enter a whole number, use the numeric question type.
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Numeric

or press Ctrl+F7.
E Change the name to HowMany, and enter How many cups of coffee do you drink in an average

day? in the question text ﬁeld.
E As the answer needs to be in whole cups of coffee, ensure that Whole Number is selected in the

Numeric Type ﬁeld on the Properties pane on the right of the window.
E You can also limit the values that respondents can enter. In the Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds on

the Properties pane on the right of the window, enter 0 and 50.
Add a multiple choice question

The next question will be: “Please say which of these coffees you have ever tried.” followed by a list of coffees.
Figure 3-6 A multiple response question

In this question, respondents can select one or more from a predeﬁned set of responses. This is a multiple response question.
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Multiple Response

or press Ctrl+F2.
E Change the name to DrinkCoffees, and enter Please say which of these coffees you have ever

tried. in the question text ﬁeld.

This question and the next will share the same response list, so for the moment, don’t enter any responses.

13 Getting started

Add a single choice question

The next question will be: “Which of these coffees is your favorite?” followed by the same list of coffees as the previous question.
Figure 3-7 A single response question with a shared list

In this case, you want respondents to select one from a predeﬁned set of responses. This is another single response question.
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Single Response

or press Ctrl+F1.
E Change the name to FavoriteCoffee, and enter Which of these types of coffee is your favorite? in

the question text ﬁeld. As with the previous question, there is no need to enter any responses yet.
Add a question about time

The next question is: “At what time do you have your ﬁrst cup of coffee of the day?” A separate question type is available for recording date and time responses.
Figure 3-8 A date/time question

14 Chapter 3 E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Date/Time

or press Ctrl+F9.
E Change the name to CoffeeTime, and enter At what time do you have your ﬁrst cup of coffee of

the day? in the question text ﬁeld.

Add a text question

The next question will be: “Please enter your email address.” with a text box to record the email information.
Figure 3-9 A text question

The type of question to use when you want respondents to answer in their own words is a text question (sometimes called a verbatim or open end). To create a text question:
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Text

or press Ctrl+F8.
E Change the name to Email, and enter Please enter your email address. in the question text ﬁeld. E Press Ctrl+S to save the questions that you have created in the questionnaire ﬁle.

Adding a list of responses to multiple questions
Two of the questions, DrinkCoffees and FavoriteCoffee, still need a response list. As both of these questions will use the same list of responses, you can create a shared list to attach to both questions. To do this, you ﬁrst add the shared list of responses, then insert the list into the questions.
Add a shared list
E From the menu, choose Insert > Shared List > Add New

or press Ctrl+F11.

15 Getting started

The list is added to the Shared Lists pane. The Design pane displays the new list with the default name of List.
E In the Design pane, change the default name to CoffeeList. E Place the cursor in the ﬁrst row of the Response ﬁeld and enter the following responses on

separate lines, pressing Enter after each: Costa Rican Colombian Java Italian Blend Brazilian When you add the response descriptions, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author automatically generates a default response name for each response in the Name ﬁeld (this is used as a unique identiﬁer for the response when it is used in other applications). By default, Response is the only visible ﬁeld. To view the Name ﬁeld, click the Field Chooser icon and select the Name ﬁeld. The Design pane refreshes to display the Name ﬁeld.
Figure 3-10 Responses in a shared list

Add the shared list to the questions
E In the Routings pane, select the DrinkCoffees question. E Place the cursor on the Responses heading in the Design pane. E From the menu, choose Insert > Shared List > Use Existing > CoffeeList

16 Chapter 3

The list is added to the question. Another way to insert a shared list is to use the context menu.
E In the Routings pane, select the FavoriteCoffee question. E Place the cursor on the Responses heading in the Design pane. E Right-click, and from the context menu, choose Insert Shared List > CoffeeList Figure 3-11 Shared responses in a question

E Press Ctrl+S to save the changes.

Inserting questions from the library
The remaining questions are about age and gender. You could add these in the same way as the other questions, but as there are some suitable questions already available in one of the example ﬁles supplied with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author, you can copy them instead.
Copying questions from the library
E Select the ﬁnal question in the Routing list (the Email question). E Click on the word Properties in the Explorer view on the right of the Author window, and select

Library from the drop-down list that appears.

17 Getting started Figure 3-12 Selecting the Library pane

E In the Library pane, expand the Questions folder, then the Demographics folder. E The Demographics folder contains two age questions, one numeric and one categorical. Select the

categorical question.
Figure 3-13 Inserting a question from the Library

E Choose the Insert button at the bottom of the pane.

The language used in the age question is English (United States). If the default language that you are using is different from this, the Insert Library Item dialog box appears, explaining that the question will be inserted into the default language context. Choose OK.
E The question is added at the end of the list of questions.

You can also insert questions using the main menu. Try this with the gender question.
E Select the age question in the Routing list. E In the Library pane, select Gender Question in the Demographics folder. E From the menu, choose: Insert > From Library

The gender question is added after the age question. Adding questions from the Library makes a copy of the question in your questionnaire ﬁle, which you can then edit as required. The original question in the library is unchanged.
Edit a question

Looking at the age question, you can see that there are six age categories and a Refuse option for those who do not want to answer the question. For the purposes of this questionnaire, you may decide to use slightly different categories.
E If it is not already selected, select the age question.

18 Chapter 3 E In the Design pane, click on the row that contains the 55 to 64 response. Change the description

to read 55 to 60.
E In the same way, select the text in the Name ﬁeld for this response, and change it to _55_to_60, so

that the unique identiﬁer for the response matches the text seen by the respondent (the response names have a preﬁx of _ because names are not allowed to begin with a number).
E Now change the 65 and over response to say 61 and over in the Response ﬁeld and _61_and_over

in the Name ﬁeld.
Figure 3-14 Editing a response name

E Press Ctrl+S to save the changes.

Creating a new routing
All the questions added so far have been placed in a default routing, which is called NewRouting. The routing contains not just the questions that you create, but information about the order in which they appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire, as well as any information that is required to direct the sequence of questions, such as a jump to another question or to the end of the interview. You can have more than one routing in a single questionnaire ﬁle, so that you can create a set of common questions and then direct them to different output formats. In this example, the questionnaire will be released in two formats, online and paper, using most of the same questions. You can use the same questionnaire ﬁle for both formats by creating a separate routing for each. To do this, you need to create a new routing, give each of the routings a suitable name, and copy the questions from the existing routing to the new one.

19 Getting started

Creating a new routing
E From the menu, choose Insert > New Routing

or press Alt+I, O. A new routing is added with the default name NewRouting1.
Renaming the routings
E In the Routings pane, right-click on NewRouting. E From the context menu, choose Rename. Figure 3-15 Editing the routing name

E Change the text NewRouting to Web_Survey, and press Enter to insert the change. E Right-click on NewRouting1. E From the context menu, choose Rename. E Change the text NewRouting1 to Paper_Survey, and press Enter to insert the change.

Copy questions to the new routing
E Select all the questions in the Web_Survey routing (use Shift+click) and use Ctrl+C or the Copy

option on the menu to copy them.
E Place the cursor on the Paper_Survey routing and use Ctrl+V or the Paste option on the menu to

paste the questions to the new routing.

20 Chapter 3 Figure 3-16 Routings

E Press Ctrl+S to save the changes.

Grouping multiple questions in a single page
To display the two demographics questions, age and gender, on the same screen of the online interview, you can group them in a page. To do this:
E In the Routings pane, use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select both age and gender in the Web_Survey

routing: From the menu, choose
Group > Group In > Page

A Page icon appears in the Routings pane, and the two questions are placed inside it.
Figure 3-17 Grouping questions in a page

E In the Design pane, select the default name Page and change it to Demographics.

21 Getting started E In the description ﬁeld, enter the following text to display at the top of the page: It would be

helpful if you could also answer the following (optional) questions:
E Press Ctrl+S to save the change.

Changing the question order
So far, the questions are in the order that you added them in, and are the same for both routings. Sometimes you may want to change the order of questions, or decide to use different questions in each routing.
Moving a question

Suppose you decide that you want to ask the Email question at the end of the web questionnaire.
E In the Routings pane, select the Email question in the Web_Survey routing. E Drag the question and drop it below the Demographics page. Figure 3-18 Moving a question in the Routings pane

Deleting a question

Suppose you also decide that you do not want to ask the Email question at all in the paper version of the questionnaire.
E In the Routings pane, select the Email question in the Paper_Survey routing. E Press the Delete key, or choose the Delete button on the toolbar: Figure 3-19 Delete button

The question is deleted from the Paper_Survey routing but remains in the Web_Survey routing.
E Press Ctrl+S to save the changes.

22 Chapter 3

Testing the questionnaire and editing questions
To see if the questionnaire appears as you want it to, you can preview it as you create it. This gives you the opportunity to make further edits, including adding and deleting questions, before you upload the question to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server and activate it. Note: Before activating, there is only one version of the ﬁle, containing the latest edits. However, once you activate the ﬁle, all the information in the ﬁle is retained as an earlier version when any changes are made. Because of this, it’s a good idea to test your questionnaire thoroughly using the Preview options before activating either a test or live version.
Previewing the questionnaire
E Choose the routing you want to preview. In this case, choose the Web_Survey routing. E From the menu, choose View > Interview Preview

or press Ctrl+Shift+I. The Interview Preview dialog box appears, showing the ﬁrst question. Notice that you can view the question in Web, Phone, or Data Entry format.
Figure 3-20 Previewing an interview

E Choose the Next button to move to the next question, and then continue through the questionnaire

checking each question. By default, questions that you create in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author require a response, so you cannot move forward until you enter a valid answer (this doesn’t apply to the two questions inserted from the Library). As you move through the questionnaire, note that the questions appear in the order in which you placed them in the Web_Survey routing, and that the two demographics questions appear on the same page.

23 Getting started E Choose the Close button at the bottom of the Interview Preview window when you have ﬁnished.

Editing questions
E In the InstantOrGround question, it may be a good idea to add another option for those who

do not drink coffee: Select the InstantOrGround question in the Web_Survey routing. In the Design pane, add a third response Don’t drink coffeeto the end of the Response list.
E In the Email text question, the input box is quite large. Change it to a more suitable size:

Select the Email question in the Web_Survey routing. Display the Properties pane.
Figure 3-21 Selecting the Properties pane

In the Width ﬁeld, type 50. In the Height ﬁeld, type 1.
E The preview shows that the Email question cannot be left blank. Change this so that respondents

can leave this question blank if they want to: In the Routings pane, select the Email question. In the Properties pane, deselect the Response box.
E Try making your own changes to some of the questions.

Previewing the updated questions
E Select one of the questions that you have updated in the Routings pane, and choose View > Question Preview

or press Ctrl+Q. The question is displayed in the Preview Question tab (located next the Design tab in Design pane). Check the effects of the changes that you made to the question.

24 Chapter 3 Figure 3-22 Previewing a question

E To check another question, select the question in the Routings pane. E Press Ctrl+S to save the changes you have made.

Formatting the questionnaire
The appearance of the web questionnaire in the Preview Question tab is based on the default style template, which controls how the questions and responses appear on screen. You can change the format of your web questionnaires by attaching a different style template. A number of templates are supplied with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author.
Attaching a template to the questionnaire
E In the Routings pane, select the Web_Survey routing. E If the Properties pane is not showing, display it. Figure 3-23 Selecting the Properties pane

E Choose the ... button beside the Layout Template ﬁeld. E The templates folder is displayed. Select the People_Working_Red_Layout.htm template ﬁle, and choose Open. E Now preview the questionnaire again (press Ctrl+Shift+I).

25 Getting started Figure 3-24 Changing the style sheet

The web version of the questionnaire now looks completely different, as it uses the formatting from the template ﬁle. Instead of Next and Back buttons, click on the < > arrows to move backwards and forwards through the questionnaire.
E Choose the Close button at the bottom of the Interview Preview window when you have ﬁnished. E Choose Ctrl+S to save the change to the ﬁle.

Checking spelling
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author automatically checks the spelling of words as you type question text. Before activating your ﬁnished questionnaire, you can check the spelling of the entire questionnaire.
Checking spelling
E From the Tools menu, choose Spelling, or E Press F7, or E Click the Spelling... icon on the Standard toolbar.

26 Chapter 3 E A spelling dialog displays. The dialog identiﬁes any misspelled words and suggests alternate

spellings. When ﬁnished, close the dialog. Note: You can also use the General tab of the Options dialog to check spelling of words as you type text in Author. You can specify a different language dictionary location, or click Associate Languages to deﬁne languages to be used with your dictionary. Additional dictionaries could be purchased from the Keyoti website (http://keyoti.com/products/rapidspell/dotNet/dictionaries.html). You can drop additional dictionaries into the [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\\Author\6.0.1\SpellChecking\Dictionaries folder and Author will automatically recognize the languages.
Special Notes

Question and response labels, routing descriptions, and Note routing items are spell checked. Names and routing items (other than Note) are not spell checked. Spell checking is enabled only if a dictionary is installed for the questionnaire’s current language. Spell checking is disabled if there is no dictionary for the current language.

Activating the questionnaire
Now that the questionnaire is ﬁnished, you can release it to respondents. The way in which you do this depends on the output format. To release the questionnaire online, you need to activate it to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration. To release a paper questionnaire you need to open the questionnaire ﬁle in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, where you can ﬁne-tune the formatting while retaining all the information saved in the questionnaire ﬁle. Note: To activate a questionnaire, you need to have access to an Interviewer Server Administration server with access permissions to create a new IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server project. To create a paper questionnaire, you need to have Paper installed.
Activating the online questionnaire
E In the Routings pane, select the Web_Survey routing. E From the menu, choose Tools > Activate... E In the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Login dialog box, enter the name of your Interviewer

Server Administration server or URL.
E Enter your Interviewer Server Administration user name, password, and authentication method and click Login.

The Activate - Current Project dialog displays. For more information, see the topic Activating questionnaires in Chapter 11 on p. 258.

27 Getting started E After setting the appropriate activation settings, click Activate. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection

Author creates a new project for the questionnaire, uploads the questionnaire ﬁles into the project folders, and updates the interviewing servers. When the process is complete, a conﬁrmation message appears. You can now log into Interviewer Server Administration and use the new project. For further information, see the Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide and the Interviewer Server User’s Guide. Note: Any changes that you make to the questionnaire ﬁle from now on will be saved as a new version of the questionnaire ﬁle when you activate the ﬁle.
Opening the questionnaire in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper
E Either close Author, or press Ctrl+N to close Coffee_Survey.mdd ﬁle by opening a new blank ﬁle,

so that you can edit the ﬁle in Paper (you can still open the ﬁle in Paper if it is open in Author, but you cannot edit it).
E Open Paper from the Windows Start menu: Programs > IBM Corp. > IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 > Paper > Paper E From the Paper menu, choose Load Questionnaire. E In the Load dialog box, use the Look in: ﬁeld to browse to the location where you saved the

Coffee_Survey.mdd ﬁle, and select the ﬁle.
E In the Look Group ﬁeld, select any of the Look Groups. E In the Routing ﬁeld, select Paper_Survey. E Leave the other options as they are, and click Open.

Paper loads the questionnaire ﬁle and displays it using the formatting in the selected Look Group. You can then use the features of Paper to apply Looks, set page breaks, and add any other formatting you require, before printing the questionnaire.

28 Chapter 3 Figure 3-25 Opening the questionnaire in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper

For further information, see the Paper User’s Guide.

Chapter

The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

4

This section explains how to start up IBM® SPSS® Data Collection AuthorIBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition and open and save ﬁles, and provides an introduction to the main features of the AuthorAuthor Server Edition window and how to use them.

Starting and exiting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author
You can start one or more instances of IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author from the desktop (having two instances open at the same time is useful if you want to copy questions from one questionnaire to another).
Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author from the desktop
E From the Windows Start menu, choose: Programs > IBM Corp. > IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 > Author > Author

You can start IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition from IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server.
Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author Server Edition from IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server
E Login to an Interviewer Server where Author Server Edition is installed. E Under the Design section, select the Author option.

Note: If this is your ﬁrst time using Author Server Edition, the application will ﬁrst download to your local workstation before it can start.
Exiting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author Exiting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author Server Edition
E From the AuthorAuthor Server Edition menu, choose: File > Exit

If you have any unsaved results, you are prompted to save them in a questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁleback to the server.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 29

30 Chapter 4

Creating and saving questionnaire files
A blank questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle is automatically created for you when you open IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author (unless you chose to open an existing ﬁle, open a ﬁle from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, or base your questionnaire on a previously created template - a .ptz ﬁle). You can save the ﬁle on your hard drive or on an accessible network drive at any stage of creating your questionnaire. You can also save a ﬁle with a different name, for example, if you want to edit a ﬁle and save your changes without overwriting the original ﬁle. You can create a new ﬁle at any time. The ﬁrst time you save a questionnaire ﬁle, Author creates a subfolder with the name FileName_ﬁles beneath the folder where you save the (.mdd) ﬁle, where FileName is the name that you give to the .mdd ﬁle. This folder contains a copy of the default template attached to the questionnaire. Author automatically adds copies of template and image ﬁles to this folder as you attach them to the questionnaire. For more information, see the topic Using style templates in Chapter 9 on p. 229. When you activate a ﬁle to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration, Author also copies the .mdd ﬁle into this folder. For more information, see the topic Activating questionnaires in Chapter 11 on p. 258.
Creating a new questionnaire file
E From the menu, choose: File > New

or press Ctrl+N. You are prompted to save the changes, if any, that you have made in the current ﬁle. After you have saved or discarded the changes, either a new blank ﬁle is displayed in the window or you are prompted to choose a template on which to base your questionnaire.
Saving a questionnaire file
E From the menu, choose: File > Save

or press Ctrl+S.
E Use the Save As dialog box to browse to the folder where you want to save the questionnaire. E Enter a name for the ﬁle and choose Save.

The ﬁle is saved with the extension .mdd.
Saving a questionnaire file with a different name
E From the menu, choose: File > Save As

or press Alt+F, A.
E Use the Save As dialog box to browse to the folder where you want to save the questionnaire.

31 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface E Enter a name for the ﬁle and choose Save.

The ﬁle is saved with the extension .mdd.
Saving a questionnaire as a project template
E From the menu, choose: File > Save As

or press Alt+F, A.
E Use the Save As dialog box to browse to the folder where you want to save the questionnaire as a

template.
E Select the ﬁle extension .ptz. E Enter a name for the ﬁle and choose Save.

Note: Remember that depending on the folder location to which you saved the template, you may need to copy or move the saved ﬁle to another location to be able to select it in Author.

Opening questionnaire files
You can open questionnaire ﬁles that are saved on your hard drive or on a network drive. You can also open questionnaires that are saved in a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project. See Working with questionnaire ﬁles that are saved in a IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project for more information. opening a questionnaire file
E Use one of the following methods:

From the menu, choose:
File > Open

Press Ctrl+O. Use the Open dialog box to browse to a questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle, and choose Open. Drag and drop a questionnaire ﬁle directly onto the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author executable ﬁle in Windows Explorer to open Author and the questionnaire at the same time. Double-click on a questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle in Windows Explorer, or right click and choose Open With Author from the menu.

32 Chapter 4

Reopening a file
E If you have recently opened a ﬁle, you can reopen it directly from the menu. Choose File > Recent Files

and select the ﬁle from the list.
E When you start Author, the Welcome to Author dialog provides options for opening existing ﬁles.

For more information, see the topic Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and creating a questionnaire ﬁle in Chapter 3 on p. 6.

Working with questionnaire files that are saved in a IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project
You can work with questionnaire ﬁles that are saved in a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project. You can also open ﬁles from a hard drive or network drive; for further information, see Opening questionnaire ﬁles. Note: Refer to Default IBM SPSS Data Collection Author roles and activities for a list of the default IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author roles and activities.
Opening a questionnaire file saved to a IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project
E From the menu, choose: File > Open from Interviewer Server Administration

If you are not currently logged into an Interviewer Server Administration server, the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection - Login dialog displays, allowing you to select an existing (or enter a new) Interviewer Server Administration URL and provide valid login credentials for the selected Interviewer Server Administration.
E In the Data Collection Login dialog box, enter (or select from the drop-down list) the following:

Destination Server or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server URL: Enter the name

or URL of the server where Interviewer Server Administration is located (for example, http://server_name/SPSSMR/DimensionNet/default.aspx). Use this to connect to a server using an internet or intranet link.
User name: Enter a valid Windows or Interviewer Server user name. Password: Enter a valid password for the deﬁned user name. Authentication: Select Interviewer Server Authentication or Windows Authentication (if

Interviewer Server Administration is conﬁgured for Active Directory).
Login using my Windows Account: When selected, the User name, Password, and Authentication

ﬁelds are disabled and your current Windows login credentials are used.
E Click Login. If the login credentials are valid, you are presented with the Open from Interviewer Server Administration dialog.

33 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

By default, you are presented with project ﬁles that you have activated. They are located under:
Root > My Folder > Projects

Other project ﬁles that you are authorized to view are located under:
Root > Shared Folder > Projects Figure 4-1 Open from IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration dialog

Toolbar options
Button Description Refreshes the connection to the server and updates the ﬁle status if any changes were made since you last refreshed. Moves focus up the directory tree. Checks out the selected project .mdd ﬁle and locks the associated project in Interviewer Server Administration. Other users cannot modify the ﬁle while it is checked out. Checks in the selected project .mdd ﬁle and unlocks the associated project in Interviewer Server Administration. Negates the selected ﬁle’s checked out status. The ﬁle is not saved and is returned to its state prior to being checked out.

E Select the appropriate .mdd ﬁle. File information, such as the ﬁle name, status, and check out

status, is provided.
E Click Open. You a presented with a dialog that asks how you would like to open the ﬁle.

34 Chapter 4

Select Read Only to open the ﬁle in read-only mode. You cannot modify read-only .mdd ﬁles. Select Check Out and Edit to check out the ﬁle, lock the associated project in Interviewer Server Administration, and open the ﬁle for editing in Author. Other users cannot modify the ﬁle while it is checked out.
Checking out a project file
E From the File menu, select Check Out... (or press Alt+F, C). A dialog displays, asking if you

want to check out the ﬁle.
E Click Yes to check out the ﬁle or No to return to Author. Checking out a ﬁle locks the associated

project in Interviewer Server Administration, and opens the ﬁle for editing in Author.
Checking in a project file
E After applying the appropriate changes to the .mdd ﬁle click the Save button or press CTRL+S. E From the File menu, select Check In... (or press Alt+F, I). A dialog displays, asking if you want

to check in the ﬁle. You are also presented the option of keeping the document checked out after checking in the current version (this allows you to check in changes and continue working on the ﬁle).
E Click Yes to check in the ﬁle or No to return to Author.

Note: You can also check in ﬁles by via the Open from Interviewer Server Administration dialog. Refer to the To open a questionnaire ﬁle in a Interviewer Server Administration Project section above.
Undoing a project file check out
E From the File menu, select Undo Check Out... (or press Alt+F, U). A dialog displays, asking if

you want to undo the ﬁle check out.
E Click Yes to undo the ﬁle check out or No to return to Author. Undoing a ﬁle check out negates the

selected ﬁle’s checked out status. The ﬁle is not saved and is returned to a read-only state.
Notes

If you want Author to check in\out additional ﬁles (except the project’s questionnaire ﬁle), add the appropriate ﬁle extension names to the list deﬁned in the CheckoutExtensionList key in the web application’s web.conﬁg ﬁle (located at C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\SPSSMR\AuthoringWebService). Extensions should be separated by semicolons. The following statement shows the default setting for this key:

35 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Default IBM SPSS Data Collection Author roles and activities
The following table provides the default IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author roles and the activities to which the roles are assigned. Note: Refer to the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for additional information regarding roles and activities.
Activity/Feature
Activation

Roles assigned to this activity or feature by default1 ProjectManager SampleManager SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyLauncher SampleManager SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyLauncher SampleManager SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyLauncher ProjectManager SampleManager SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyLauncher Analyst ProjectManager SampleManager SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyLauncher Translator SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced Analyst SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced Translator Analyst SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced Translator Analyst SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced Analyst SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced

— Can activate in test mode 3

— Can activate in go-live mode 3 (dependent on permission to Can activate in test mode) — Can activate restricted script 3 — Can edit advanced activation settings 3 (dependent on permission to Can view advanced activation settings) — Can view advanced activation settings 3

Author

Create/Open/Save Questionnaire — Can save questionnaire ﬁle to local directory — Can save edited questionnaire ﬁle to server

Manage Languages and Contexts — Can edit labels

— Can edit base language (dependent on permission to Can edit labels) — Can manage context 3 — Can manage language 3

36 Chapter 4

Activity/Feature — Can edit Question context 3 — Can edit Analysis context 3 Work with Questionnaire Routing — Can view routing 3

Roles assigned to this activity or feature by default1 SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced Translator Analyst SurveyCreatorAdvanced Translator Analyst ProjectManager SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyReviewer SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreatorAdvanced

— Can edit routing structure 3 (dependent on permission to Can view routing) — Can edit routing item 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit routing structure) — Can insert routing item 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit routing item) — Can delete routing item 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit routing item) — Can edit script items 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit routing item) — Can insert script items 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit script item) — Can delete script items 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit script item) –– Can edit restricted script (dependent on permission to Can edit script item) — Can insert a new routing (dependent on permission to Can edit routing structure) — Can delete a routing (dependent on permission to Can edit routing structure) Work with Standard Question Constructs — Can edit a question structure (for protected questions, is dependent on the permission to edit a protected question) — Can insert a question 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit question structure) — Can delete a question 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit question structure) — Can edit a shared list 3 — Can insert a shared list 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit shared list) — Can delete a shared list 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit shared list)

SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced

SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced

37 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Activity/Feature

Roles assigned to this activity or feature by default1

Database Questions SurveyCreatorAdvanced — Can edit database question settings 3 (dependent on permission to Can edit question structure; for protected questions, is dependent on the permission to edit a protected question) Deﬁne Advanced Question Properties — Can view question properties Analyst ProjectManager SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyReviewer SurveyCreator — Can edit question properties SurveyCreatorAdvanced (dependent on permission to Can view question properties) — Can view advanced properties Analyst ProjectManager SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyReviewer SurveyCreator — Can edit advanced properties (dependent on SurveyCreatorAdvanced permission to Can view advanced properties) — Can view custom properties Analyst ProjectManager SurveyCreatorAdvanced SurveyReviewer — Can edit custom properties SurveyCreatorAdvanced (dependent on permission to Can view custom properties) — Can edit translator notes 3 Analyst SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced Translator Work with Repository/C&DS SurveyCreator — Can set up connection to repository SurveyCreatorAdvanced Work with Library SurveyCreator — Can insert from library 3 SurveyCreatorAdvanced Tools SurveyCreatorAdvanced — Can deploy a project locally 2 — Can run Auto Answer 3 Analyst ProjectManager SurveyCreator SurveyCreatorAdvanced Work with Templates SurveyCreator — Can apply project templates 3 SurveyCreatorAdvanced Protected Questions — Can edit protected questions SurveyCreatorAdvanced

38 Chapter 4 1 By default, the DPMAdmins and CustomerAccountAdmins roles are assigned to all activities

and features.
2 Users who are assigned to this activity can create local deployment packages even when they

have read-only access to the source ﬁles (do not have authority to save the source ﬁles). In these cases, the source ﬁles will not be affected, but a local deployment package will be created.
3 These features are new as of IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6 Patch 1.

New Activity/Feature migration behavior

New roles were added in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 Patch 1. As a result, the roles have been grouped in Interviewer Server Administration based on their function. The migration behavior of these new roles is as follows:
E For split features, the deprecated feature is replaced with the new corresponding features. The

following features have been split: Can activate project is replaced with the Can activate in test mode, Can activate in go-live mode, Can view advanced activation settings, and Can edit advanced activation settings features. Can manage context and language is replaced with the Can manage context and Can manage language features. Can insert/edit script items is replaced with the Can edit script item, Can insert script item, and Can delete script item features.
E For new features, a Interviewer Server Administration administrator will need to manually add

the features to the appropriate roles.
E Users or roles who have access to Author will be automatically granted the newly added features;

users or roles who have access to the Can Manage Context And Language or Can Activate Project features will be automatically granted the associated split features.
E Some of the new features are not intended for every user or role. You can manually remove

any unneeded permissions by utilizing the provided InitializeRoleBase.mrs script. The script allows you to batch add or remove the feature permissions for existing users and roles. The script is located at: [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Interviewer Server Administration\RoleBasedAccess. There are two ﬁles in the RoleBasedAccess directory:
InitializeRoleBase.mrs - Run this script to add or remove feature permissions for users and

roles deﬁned in the InitializeRoleBase.xls ﬁle. Before you run the script, you will will need to specify the ExcelFilePath parameter in the script.
InitializeRoleBase.xls - Identiﬁes the feature permissions to add or remove for existing users or

roles. For example:
Activity Author Author Author Feature CanManageContext CanManageLanguage Roles SampleManager;SurveyLauncher SurveyCreator;Translator;ProjectManager Translator;Analyst;ProjectManager Action Remove Remove Remove

39 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Activity - Identiﬁes the activity. Feature - Identiﬁes the corresponding activity feature. Roles - Speciﬁes users or roles for the activity feature. Users and roles are separated via

semicolons.
Action - Speciﬁes whether to Add or Remove the deﬁned activity features for the speciﬁed

users and roles. Conﬁgure the spreadsheet to deﬁne the custom access levels for any user-created users or roles. Note: Running InitializeRoleBase.mrs with the predeﬁned InitializeRoleBase.xls spreadsheet will restore the default activity feature permissions for the existing Data Collection roles. Refer to the Assigning users or roles to activity features section in the IBM® SPSS® Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for more information.
Activation user role implications

You cannot activate questionnaires (the Activate option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can activate in test mode activity role feature. You cannot activate questionnaires in Go live mode (the Go live option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can activate in active mode activity role feature. You cannot access advanced activation features (the More option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can view advanced activation settings activity role feature. You cannot modify advanced activation settings (the More option is enabled, but each setting is read-only and the Load local ﬁle... option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can edit advanced activation settings activity role feature. Refer to the Assigning users or roles to activity features topic in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for more information on user roles.

Project Templates
You can create a project template to preserve all of the ﬁles and settings for a speciﬁc IBM® SPSS® Data Collection project that can be used again in the future. Project templates can include survey ﬁles (.mdd), quota, sample, and layout templates. A project template can also include the activation ﬁle, which stores all of the project activation settings, conﬁgured for deployment to an interviewing player. Project templates help you work more efﬁciently by minimizing repetition while leveraging projects that have already been optimized and proven. You may currently have a project that is utilized numerous times (for example, as a tracker), and have taken the time to tune the document and modify the numerous activation settings that will be applied when the project is deployed to a server (and/or locally). The project may also have consistent quota totals. A project template would enable you to perform basic construction and conﬁguration of a project once; the project template would then be available for redeployment as needed.

40 Chapter 4

When a project template is conﬁgured, and selected to be used for a new project in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional, the .mdd ﬁle that is stored within the template populates the authoring tool you are working in. Once the Activation dialog is opened, the template’s activation settings are displayed, and Quota and Participants information (within the Activation interface) are updated based on the template’s stored quota and sample ﬁles. When activated, all of the ﬁles and settings are carried over to the server or cluster to which the project is deployed. Project templates can also be updated. A survey may require additional questions or categories, different call times may be required to satisfy ﬁeld constraints, an so on. You can save these changes back to the original template, or create a new template if you have typical variations.

Creating and Saving Project Templates
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author comes with a number of templates that you can base new questionnaires on. The templates (stored as .ptz ﬁles) are organized into a number of folders. It is easy to amend the templates and add new templates and template folders.
Creating a new questionnaire from a template
E From the menu, choose: File > New

or press Ctrl+N. This opens the Select Project Template dialog box. The left side of the dialog box lists the available template folders.
E On the left side of the dialog box, select the required folder. The right side of the dialog box now

displays the templates that are contained in the selected folder.
E Select the template you want to use. E Click Select.

Saving a questionnaire as a project template
E From the menu, choose: File > Save As

or press Alt+F, A.
E Use the Save As dialog box to browse to the folder where you want to save the questionnaire as a

template.
E Select the ﬁle extension .ptz. E Enter a name for the ﬁle and choose Save.

Note: Remember that depending on the folder location to which you saved the template, you may need to copy or move the saved ﬁle to another location to be able to select it in Author.

41 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Editing an existing project template
E From the menu, choose: File > Open

or press Ctrl+O.
E In the Open dialog box select the ﬁle extension .ptz and browse to the folder where your templates

are held.
E Select the template you want to edit and then click Open. E Edit and save the ﬁle in the normal way.

Working with unzipped project templates
To simplify the testing of project templates during development, unzipped templates will also be supported. To deploy an unzipped template, you can simply copy or save the project ﬁles to the correct project template location (local or server). In order to correctly recognize an unzipped template, and to correctly distinguish it from a template folder and non-template ﬁles, the template ﬁles must be correctly structured. More speciﬁcally, the following ﬁle structures for unzipped templates will be supported:
MyProject [MyProject.mdd] MyProject_files People_Working_Red_Layout.htm People_Working_Red_Layout.htm_files People_Working_Red.css People_Working_Red.Banner.jpg People_Working_Red_Grid.xml People_Working_Red_Question.htm Red_Back.gif Red_Next.gif SameLine_Banner.htm Spacer.gif MyProject.mqd MyProjectSample.csv MySMScript.mrs OtherFileCopiedByUser.xyz

The unzipped project ﬁles must reside in a folder that matches the project name. This ensures that project folder can be distinguished from a normal template folder. Any folder that contains ﬁles, but does not contain template archives (.zip ﬁles) or Project_files, will be considered an unzipped template. In this case, all ﬁles in the project folder are considered part of the template.

42 Chapter 4

The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window
Figure 4-2 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window

The IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author window is divided into several areas. On the left of the window are:
Routings pane. This pane displays a list of questions and routing items. You can add, delete,

and change the order of questions in this pane, as well as adding routing information to determine the order in which questions are displayed in the ﬁnished questionnaire. You can add different question lists (routings) in this pane, and include your questions in one or more of the routings. Each routing represents a different output format for the questionnaire. For more information, see the topic Changing the Questionnaire Order in Chapter 7 on p. 171.
Questions pane. This pane displays a list of all the questions in the questionnaire ﬁle, whether

or not they appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire. You can add, delete, and rearrange the order of questions in this pane. Questions that you add in this pane are not included in the questionnaire until you add them to the Routings pane. The questions pane is not displayed by default. To display it, press Alt+V, Q.
Shortcuts pane. This pane contains a collection of shortcuts to commonly used actions. Each

shortcut icon mirrors an action available from the application menus.
Shared Lists pane. This pane displays any lists of responses that you create for use in more than one question. The shared lists pane is not displayed by default. To display it, press Alt+V, S.For more information, see the topic Creating shared lists of responses in Chapter 6 on p. 151.

43 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

In the center of the window are:
Design pane. This pane provides a graphical representation of all the questions in the Routings

pane or the Questions pane (whichever is selected) You can use this pane to enter the text of questions and responses and ﬁne-tune your questions by specifying additional options for the responses or by deﬁning custom properties for the responses. For more information, see the topic Design pane on p. 44.
Question Preview pane. This pane allows you to preview individual questions to check that

they appear as you expect them to, without activating the questionnaire. You can preview a question as you are creating it, alternating between making changes to the question settings, via the Design pane, and running a preview to see how the latest changes appear. The question preview pane is not displayed by default. To display it, press CTRL+Q. On the right is the Explorer view, containing:
Properties pane. This pane displays basic details for the question selected in the Design

pane. Use this pane to specify additional options for question and response text. You can also use the Routings section of the Properties pane to specify the interviewing mode. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types.
Advanced Properties pane. This pane shows advanced properties for the selected question.

This is designed for advanced users who are familiar with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Scripting. You can change advanced properties of a question without having to use IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional. Use caution when modifying advanced properties, as there is limited error validation. For complete details about advanced properties, see the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library (DDL).
Library pane. This pane provides access to ﬁles of commonly used questionnaires and

individual questions, as well as predeﬁned scripts and style templates. You can select ﬁles in this pane and insert the contents into your questionnaire. The ﬁles provided with Author contain standard questions and questionnaires that you may ﬁnd useful when getting started. As you build up your own questionnaires in Author, you can add your own ﬁles to the library folders, to supplement or replace the supplied ﬁles. Note: When a questionnaire ﬁle is opened from IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration, the ﬁles listed in the Library pane are located on the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server.
Repository pane. This pane provides access to Question Repositories for any deﬁned IBM®

SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. A IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository consists of commonly used survey assets. The primary advantage of utilizing a Question Repository over a standard library is that it provides a central location for all survey assets and features enhanced security and version control mechanisms. You can select survey assets in this pane and insert the contents into your questionnaire. As you build up your own questionnaires in Author, you can submit survey assets to the repository, to supplement or replace existing survey assets. For more information, see the topic IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository in Chapter 5 on p. 58. You can rearrange the window by resizing different areas to suit the way you work, and you can move some of the panes and toolbars around the window or switch them off if you do not use them.

44 Chapter 4

Design pane
The Design pane provides a graphical representation of all the questions in the Routings pane or the Questions pane (whichever is selected). You can use this pane to view all questions and routing items for a speciﬁc routing, enter the text for questions and responses, ﬁne-tune your questions by specifying additional options for the responses, and deﬁne custom properties for the responses.
Figure 4-3 Design Pane

Design pane tabs

Note: Different tabs are available for speciﬁc question types. You can view which tabs are available for a speciﬁc question by right-clicking the area where the tabs display, and selecting the appropriate tabs from the context menu.
Codes. Is available when working with numeric, text, and database question types and provides

options for including special responses (Don’t Know, Refused, No Answer).
Custom Properties. Provides options for deﬁning custom properties for the questions. For more

information, see the topic Advanced Category Editor in Chapter 9 on p. 226.
DB Settings. Provides options for manually editing the database connection string and deﬁning the

column mappings. See Creating single response database questions, Creating multiple response database questions, or Creating database question loops for more information.

45 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Iterator. Available when working with Loops. The tab provides options for setting the number of times to ask questions in the loop. Refer to Creating loops to ask the same questions for different subjects or Creating database question loops for more information. Logic. Displays when working with Go To items, If Go To items and Condition blocks. See Go

To Routing Item, If Go To Routing Item, or Creating a Condition Block for more information.
Members. Displays all questions and routing items for the selected routing. Click the Field

Chooser icon to select which ﬁelds display for each question/routing item. You can select a question/routing item to automatically open the item in the Design pane. Note: The Members tab displays for complex grids, loops, compounds, blocks, sections, pages, condition blocks, and when a routing is selected in the Routings pane.
Respondent Instructions. Allows you to supplement instructional text that is automatically added

to a questionnaire in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper application. When viewed in Paper, the respondent instructions precede the generated Paper instruction text. You can edit your Paper settings to eliminate all instructional text, in which case the respondent instructions added in this tab will replace, rather than supplement, the Paper instructional text. Refer to the Paper User’s Guide for more information.
Responses. Provides options for entering a question name, short name, description, and responses.

Information displays in read-only mode when working with database questions. For more information, see the topic Creating questions and responses in Chapter 6 on p. 83. Note: The Short Name ﬁeld is only used by the Paper application and is typically a shorter version of the question name. It is often the question number, such as Q14.
Script. Displays the question as it appears in script language. Refer to the “mrScriptBasic

Reference” topic in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for more detailed scripting information.
Set. Displays when working with Set Response routing items. For more information, see the topic

Adding a Set Response to a Questionnaire in Chapter 7 on p. 202.
Translation Notes. Allows you to create translation speciﬁc notes for each question. This is

useful when a questionnaire is translated into multiple languages, as questions may require language-speciﬁc instructions.

The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author menu
The IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author menu contains the following options:
Menu File Submenu New Open Open a Statistics File... Open Submenu Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl+N Ctrl+O Ctrl+Shift+O Ctrl+O

46 Chapter 4

Menu

Edit

View

Submenu Open from IBM® SPSS® Statistics Open from Interviewer Server Administration Check Out... Check In... Undo Check Out... Save Save As Print Preview Print Properties Recent Files Exit to Paper Exit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Paste as Text Delete Select All Edit Shared List Auto-ﬁll Convert to Grid Convert to Loop Find Replace Restore Default Layout Set Language Set Context Routings Questions Shared Lists Explorer Shortcuts Question Preview Interview Preview Toolbars

Submenu

Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl+Shift+O Ctrl+Shift+S Alt+F, C Alt+F, I Alt+F, U Ctrl+S Alt+F, A Alt+F, V Ctrl+P Alt+F, I Alt+F, R Alt+F, M Alt+F, X Ctrl+Z Ctrl+Y Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V Alt+E, S Delete Ctrl+A Alt+E, E Alt+E, F Alt+E, G Alt+E, L Ctrl+F Ctrl+H Alt+V, R Alt+V, L Alt+V, C Alt+V, O Alt+V, Q Alt+V, S Alt+V, E Alt+V, U Ctrl+Q Ctrl+Shift+I Alt+V, T, S Alt+V, T, I Alt+V, T, L Alt+V, T, F Ctrl+F1

Insert

Question

Standard Insert Set Language and Context Formatting Single Response

47 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Menu

Submenu

Submenu Multiple Response Single Response Grid Multiple Response Grid Numeric Response Grid True or False Numeric Text Date/Time Display Text Compound Loop Block Database Question Single Response Multiple Response Loop Go To If ... Go To Exit Bookmark Script Item Set Response Note Condition

From Library Routing Item

Section Page New Routing Response/Subject Shared List Group Group In

Add New Use Existing Compound Loop Block Section Page Condition

Ungroup Group into Sublist Ungroup Sublist Convert All to Shared List

Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl+F2 Ctrl+F3 Ctrl+F4 Ctrl+F5 Ctrl+F6 Ctrl+F7 Ctrl+F8 Ctrl+F9 Ctrl+F10 Alt+I, Q, C Alt+I, Q, L Alt+I, Q, B Alt+I, Q, D, D Alt+I, Q, D, D, G Alt+I, Q, D, D, P Alt+I, Q, D, D, L Alt+I, L Alt+I, R, G Alt+I, R, I Alt+I, R, E Alt+I, R, B Alt+I, R, S Alt_I, R, R Alt+I, R, N Alt+I, R, C IfBlock Alt+I, R, C, I ElseIf Alt+I, R, C, E Else Alt+I, R, C, L Alt+I, R, C, C Alt+I, R, P Alt+I, O Alt+I, E Ctrl+F11 Alt+I, S, E Alt+G, G, C Alt+G, G, L Alt+G, G, B Alt+G, G, S Alt+G, G, P Alt+G, G, C, C Alt+G, U Alt+G, S Alt+G, N Alt+G, A

48 Chapter 4

Menu

Tools

Submenu Convert Selected to Shared List Spelling Manage Languages and Contexts Validate Document Enable/Disable Double Click Navigation Fill Wizard Create Skip and Fill Deploy Locally Activate Activation Console Manage Project Files Auto Answer

Submenu

Keyboard Shortcut Alt+G, C Alt+T, P or F7 Alt+T, M Alt+T, V Ctrl+L or Alt+T, N Alt+T, I Alt+T, C Alt+T, Y Alt+T, A Alt+T, C, C Alt+T, F Alt+T, U Alt+T, W Alt+T, F Alt+T, T Alt+T, S Alt+T, R Alt+T, O F1 Alt+H, G Alt+H, O Alt+H, A

Start Auto Answer Write Data to Data Source Conﬁgure Data Source

Help

Validate Template View Script Store in Question Repository Options Topics Getting Started Question Type Overview About Author

Note: Shortcut key combinations can vary depending on the Author display language. For example, the keyboard shortcut for viewing questions is Alt+V, Q when Author displays in English, but it is Alt+V, P when Author displays in Spanish.

The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author toolbar buttons
The following toolbar buttons are available in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author to provide a quick method of accessing frequently used menu options.
The Standard toolbar
Button Action Create a new questionnaire ﬁle. Open a questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle. Open a questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle from Interviewer Server Administration. Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl+N Ctrl+O Ctrl+Shift+S

49 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Button

Action Save a questionnaire ﬁle Print Print Preview Check spelling Cut Copy Paste Delete Undo Redo Help

Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl+S Ctrl+P Alt+F, V F7 Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V Delete Ctrl+Z Ctrl+Y F1

The Insert toolbar
Button Action Insert a question Insert a routing item

The Set Language and Context toolbar
Button Action Set Context Set Language Manage Languages and Contexts Alt+T, M Keyboard Shortcut

The Formatting toolbar

Note: The formatting toolbar icons, and their associated keyboard shortcuts, are not available when Paper - Scanning is selected in the Routings section of the Properties pane.
Button Action Change font face of selected question text Change font size of selected question text Change font style of selected question text to bold

50 Chapter 4

Button

Action Italicize selected question text Underline selected question text Decrease the indentation of the question text Increase the indentation of the question text Change font color Show design/HTML view

Changing the layout of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window
You can rearrange the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author window in a number of ways to suit the way you work. For example, you can resize individual window panes to make the best use of space, and you can move or hide some of the panes or toolbars if you ﬁnd you rarely use them. By default, the window layout is locked to prevent accidental changes, so before making any changes such as moving panes or toolbars, you need to unlock it. You can resize panes and hide them without unlocking the window layout.
Resizing panes
E Place the mouse pointer on the dividing line between panes, and click and drag the edge. Figure 4-4 Resizing panes

51 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Hiding a pane or toolbar
E From the menu, choose View

or
View > Toolbars E Deselect the pane or toolbar you want to hide. E Alternatively, with the pane at the front of the window, or with the toolbar in a ﬂoating location,

choose the Close button on the pane.
Displaying a hidden pane or toolbar
E From the menu, choose View

or
View > Toolbars

You will see a list of the panes or toolbars available. Those that are displayed have a check mark beside them. Select those you want to display.
Unlocking the layout
E From the menu, choose Tools > Options E On the General tab, check Allow docking and undocking of window panes, and choose OK.

You may want to lock the layout again after you have ﬁnished changing it.
Moving a pane
E Place the mouse pointer on the title bar of the pane, and click and drag the pane.

You will see that an outline appears around the pane to indicate where it will be placed when you release the mouse. As you drag the pane around the screen, this outline jumps to the nearest available location to place it.
E Release the mouse button when the pane is where you want it to appear.

52 Chapter 4 Figure 4-5 Moving a pane

Moving a toolbar
E Place the mouse pointer at the left of the toolbar. The cursor changes to a four-pointed arrow: Figure 4-6 Selecting the toolbar

E Click and drag the toolbar and drop it where you want to place it. You can leave the toolbar

ﬂoating on top of the window, or drag it to the top, side or bottom of the window, and drop it to dock it in position.
Figure 4-7 Moving the toolbar

Reverting to the default layout
E From the menu, choose View > Restore Default Layout E At the prompt, choose Yes.

The default layout is restored.

53 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Finding and replacing text
You can move directly to a question or routing item in the Routings or Questions panes by typing the start of the item name. You can also search for text that is part of the name or description using the Find dialog box, or you can search for and replace text using the Replace dialog box. For more information, see the topic The Find and Replace dialog boxes on p. 53.
Finding a question or routing item using the name
E Click anywhere in the list of questions in the Routings or Questions pane. E Type the ﬁrst character of the name of the question or routing item you want to ﬁnd. E The cursor moves to the next item in the list that begins with the character you typed. If it is not

the one that you were searching for, type the same character again to move to the next item in the list that begins with the character. For example, typing e in the Questions pane with the Museum sample survey would ﬁnd entrance, then education, then expect, etc. The quick search searches from the current position to the end and then cycles round continuously.
E Alternatively, type the ﬁrst two or more characters of the question’s name to move to the ﬁrst

question that begins with all the characters typed, for example, typing ex would ﬁnd expect. If you type more than one letter of the question’s name, you must type the letters quickly or the display will move to a question whose name begins with the second letter.

The Find and Replace dialog boxes
You can search for text that is part of the name or description using the Find dialog box, or you can search for and replace text using the Replace dialog box. You can also move directly to a question or routing item in the Routings or Questions panes by typing the start of the item name. For more information, see the topic Finding and replacing text on p. 53.
Finding a question using the Find dialog box

From the menu, choose
Edit > Find

or press Ctrl+F.
Fields on the Find dialog box Find what. Enter a string of characters. You can search for:

A partial match. Type (or paste in) any words that you want to ﬁnd. The search ﬁnds items that contain any or all of the words. Minor words such as the, a, and and are ignored. For example, a search for quick brown fox would ﬁnd items such as brown fox, quick cat, and foxtrot. An exact match. Type (or paste in) the exact text string surrounded by double quotation marks. The search ﬁnds items that contain the exact text typed in (including minor words such as the, a, and and). The text can be part of a longer string. For example, a search for

54 Chapter 4

"The quick brown fox" would ﬁnd The quick brown fox escaped from the cat's grasp, but not A quick brown fox.

Match case. By default, the search is not case sensitive. For example, searching for "quick brown fox", "Quick brown fox", or "Quick Brown Fox" all give the same results. To restrict the search to

match the case of the search text exactly, check this box.
Within. Choose whether to search just the question text or both question and response text. Look in. You can broaden or narrow your search by choosing from the following options: Name. Search for the string in the question name. Description. Search for the string in the question name and description. Find Next. Choose this button to move to the next instance of the search string. The Find dialog

box searches from the current position to the end and then cycles round until the starting point of the search is reached.
Replacing question or response text
E From the menu, choose Edit > Replace

from the menu, or press Ctrl+H. All ﬁelds are as for the Find dialog box, with the addition of:
Replace with. Enter a string of characters to replace the text in the Find ﬁeld.
E Choose Replace Next to move to the next question or response containing the characters in the Find ﬁeld and replace them with the characters in the Replace with ﬁeld.

Undoing and redoing actions in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author
You can undo up to 50 actions in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. This includes changes you make in the Routings, Questions, and Shared Lists panes, the Design pane, and the Properties pane. You can also redo actions that you have previously undone.
Undoing an action
E From the menu, choose Edit > Undo

or press Ctrl+Z, or choose the Undo button on the toolbar:
Figure 4-8 Undo button

55 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface E To undo multiple actions, where available, select the drop-down button to the right of the undo

button or menu option. A list of previous actions is displayed. Select the earliest action you want to undo. All later actions are also undone.
Redoing an action
E From the menu, choose Edit > Redo

or press Ctrl+Y, or choose the Redo button on the toolbar:
Figure 4-9 Redo button

E To redo multiple actions, where available, select the drop-down button to the right of the undo

button or menu option. A list of previous actions is displayed. Select the ﬁnal action you want to redo. All earlier actions are also redone. Note: The undo/redo of text changes within a single editor is not allowed. Once the change is committed to the underlying Data Model, those changes can be undone/redone.

Printing questionnaires
You can print a draft of the questionnaire to your default printer. The printout shows all the questions in the selected routing in the order in which they appear. You can also preview the questionnaire before you print it. To create a questionnaire for distribution in printed format, it is recommended that you use IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper to complete the formatting and to print the questionnaire. Paper provides a comprehensive solution for formatting paper questionnaires for scanning and keyboard data entry. For more information, see the topic Opening Questionnaires in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper in Chapter 16 on p. 368. Note: IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition does not support Paper. If you have Paper installed, Print and Print Preview in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author will prompt you to select a Look Group and will automatically launch Paper. For details about Look Groups, see the Paper User’s Guide.
Previewing the printout
E Select the routing you want to print. E From the menu, choose File > Print Preview

56 Chapter 4

or press Alt+F, V, or choose the Print Preview button on the toolbar:
Figure 4-10 Print Preview button

If you do not have Paper installed, the Print Preview dialog box appears. You can use the dialog to page through the printout and see how many pages it contains.
E Choose the Print button to display the Print dialog box.

If you have Paper installed, you will be prompted to select an Paper Look Group. Paper will automatically open and display a read-only preview of your questionnaire. For details about Look Groups, see the Paper User’s Guide.
Printing a questionnaire
E Select the routing you want to print. E From the menu, choose File > Print

or press Ctrl+P, or choose the Print button on the toolbar:
Figure 4-11 Print button

If you do not have Paper installed, the Print dialog box appears. If you do have Paper installed, you are prompted to select an Paper Look Group. Paper will open automatically and display the Print dialog box. For more information about Look Groups, see the Paper User’s Guide.
E In the Print dialog box, select the printer that you want to use. E If required, select the pages to print using the Page Range options. E Set any printer-speciﬁc options as required. E Click Print.

Note: When using Microsoft Ofﬁce 2007, the Paper automation APIs will not return a valid list of look groups until you manually enable the Paper and Paper - Scan Add-on menus via the Microsoft Word Add-ons menu.

Documentation and additional resources
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author is supplied with the following documentation:
Readme file. Supplied on the CD-ROM and available from the Autoplay menu. Installation Instructions. Supplied on the CD-ROM and available from the Autoplay menu.

57 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author user interface

Online User’s Guide (this help ﬁle). Installed with Author. Contains full documentation for

Author.
Data Collection Developer Library. In addition to the Author documentation, advanced

users may wish to install the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library. This free resource includes detailed technical documentation on IBM® SPSS® Data Collection products, the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model, and information about creating questionnaires using scripts. The Data Collection Developer Library (sometimes called the DDL) includes sample data and numerous sample scripts. It is available on the Author CD-ROM and as a free download from the Data Collection Developer Library Web site (http://www.ibm.com/software/analytics/spss/products/data-collection/).

Chapter

Question Repository
IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository

5

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository is a set of tools and components for the development, operation, and management of a working Question Repository. A Question Repository is used to store standard survey assets that can be used to create new questionnaires. The questionnaires can then be used by other Data Collection products, such as IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, to collect survey data. The Question Repository is built on the technology of IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services, which is a set of components for storing and managing analytical assets. You can use Question Repository features and IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services to add survey assets to a IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository, search for survey assets stored in the repository, select survey assets, and quickly generate a new questionnaire from the selected survey assets. You can also create additional attributes used for searching the repository, and manage repository security. The following table provides a summary of the sections in the Question Repository documentation.
IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository architecture IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository conﬁguration and customization Administration and maintenance Documentation for IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Describes the components, functions, and organization of a Data Collection Question Repository. Explains how to carry out tasks such as modifying the repository conﬁguration ﬁle. Explains how to carry out system administration and maintenance tasks such as managing security. Where to ﬁnd more information on installing and using the components of IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services.

IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository architecture
This section is intended for use by those who need to understand the workings of a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository.

Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011

58

59 Question Repository

Tools and components
The following diagram shows the main tools and components of a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository:
Figure 5-1 Components of a IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository

Question Repository Application. A desktop application (IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author or

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional) that you use to carry out the functions of the repository, which include: Storing survey assets to the repository. Each survey asset contains one or more survey questions. Browsing the repository for survey assets. Inserting survey assets into the working .mdd ﬁle. Generating a new questionnaire from retrieved survey assets. The Data Collection applications Author and Base Professional both support the Question Repository.
MDM Object Model. A component of the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model that

simpliﬁes access to the contents of a Data Collection metadata document ﬁle by representing the metadata as a set of objects.
IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services. A set of components for the storage and

management of analytical assets, as described below.
IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. A centralized repository for the

storage of assets (ﬁles) in a relational database. The features of the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository include version control, security, searching, and auditing.

60 Chapter 5

Deployment Manager. A Windows desktop program that you use to manage security and perform

other administrative tasks in the repository. You can also use IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager to run jobs, which are designed to perform repetitive tasks such scheduling reports.
Browser-based IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager. A

browser-based interface that you use to perform some administrative tasks.

IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository workflow
The main functions of a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository are as follows: Storing survey assets. This is the ﬁrst step in adding ﬁles to the repository. Generating questionnaires. You search the ﬁles in the repository for survey assets and insert the required survey assets to the active work area. You then generate questionnaires from retrieved survey assets.

Storing survey assets
You add questions to a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository by storing survey assets, that contain one or more standard survey questions, to the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. The ﬁle type used by IBM® SPSS® Data Collection to store questions is the .mdd ﬁle. When you use the Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard to store survey assets to the repository, the .mdd ﬁle is packaged into an .mzd ﬁle together with any associated ﬁles that you provide. For more information, see the topic Survey assets on p. 67. You can store new survey assets to the repository, or you can update existing survey assets. The Question Repository does not recognize the difference between new and existing assets; the repository is always searched to determine if a survey asset with the same name exists. When an asset with the same name is found, you are prompted to conﬁrm that the survey asset is intended as a new version of an existing asset.
Notes

You cannot store ﬁles that are designated as “read-only”. For example, if you open an .mdd ﬁle whose properties indicate the “read-only” setting, you will need to clear the setting before storing the ﬁle to the repository. Objects that contain umlaut characters in their name cannot be stored to the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. The Store into Repository... feature is disabled when a document is opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server in read-only mode.

Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard
The Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard steps you through the process of storing survey assets, and any associated ﬁles, into a IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. When a survey asset is stored, its contents are indexed to identify the questions it

61 Question Repository

contains and the modes and languages it supports. You can associate other ﬁles with the survey asset (images, Word documents, .mrs and .dms ﬁles, and so on). You can also associate survey assets with deﬁned topics, and allocate custom attributes that extend the asset’s search capabilities. To open the Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard, choose:
Tools > Store into Repository...

Select Repository and Asset
The Select Repository and Asset step provides options for selecting a IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository, storing a new survey asset, or a new version of an existing survey asset, and deﬁning the survey asset name.
Repository: The drop-down list provides all currently conﬁgured IBM SPSS Collaboration and

Deployment Services Repository connections. For more information, see the topic Conﬁgure repository connections on p. 75.
Connect: If you are not already connected to the selected repository, clicking the button

displays the Connect to Repository dialog, allowing you to connect to the selected repository. If you are already connected to a repository, clicking Connect results in a conﬁrmation message that allows you to connect to the selected repository as a different user.
Store as: Select New Repository Survey Asset to store the .mzd ﬁle as a new survey asset; select
New Version of Existing Repository Survey Asset to create a new version of an existing survey asset.

Survey asset name: Enter an appropriate survey asset name. If New Repository Survey Asset

is selected, the asset name must be unique (the name cannot already exist in the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository). Click Validate to determine if the asset name is unique. If New Version of Existing Library Item is selected, the asset name must match an existing asset name in the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services library. Click ... to locate an existing survey asset.
Validate: Click to determine if the survey asset name is unique to the IBM SPSS Collaboration

and Deployment Services Repository. If the survey asset name is not unique, and you selected
New Repository Survey Asset, you will have to enter a different name. E Click Next to continue to the Add Description and Custom Attributes step.

Find Existing Survey Asset
The Find Existing Survey Asset dialog allows you to search the selected IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository for existing survey assets.
E Select the appropriate survey asset and click OK.

You are returned to Select Repository and Asset step, and the selected survey asset name displays in the Survey asset name ﬁeld.

62 Chapter 5

Add Description and Custom Attributes
The Add Description and Custom Attributes step provides options for entering a survey asset description and deﬁning the survey asset’s custom attributes.
Survey asset name: This non-modiﬁable ﬁeld displays the survey asset name. Repository: This non-modiﬁable ﬁeld displays the current IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and

Deployment Services Repository connection.
Description: Enter a brief survey asset description. The ﬁeld is limited to 256 characters. Custom Attribute: The table displays the user-deﬁned index attributes. You can modify entries in

the Value column for each custom attribute.
E Click Next to continue to the Assign Topics step.

Assign Topics
The Assign Topics step displays topics that are currently assigned to the survey asset, allows you to assign additional topics, and allows you to delete topic assignments. Topics are predeﬁned in the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository and are speciﬁc to the selected repository. Note: When the topic path exceeds the screen limit, the path displays as truncated with ellipsis.
Assign: Opens the Assign Topics dialog, allowing you to assign additional topics to the survey

asset.
Remove: Removes the selected topic from the list.
E Click Next to continue to the Attach Files step.

Assign Topics
The Assign Topics dialog allows you to search the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository for existing topics.
Search: Enter an appropriate topic name and click Next. The tree-list will navigate to matching topic names, if they exist. Next and Previous step through the tree-list to topics that match the search criteria. For example entering In and repeatedly clicking Next would step through all topics that begin with In (Income, Individual, Industry, and so on).

Note: You can also manually navigate the tree-list to search for topics to add.
E Click Ok after you have selected the appropriate topic.

63 Question Repository

Attach Files
The Attach Files step lists any ﬁles that are currently associated with a survey asset and provides options for creating new ﬁle associations and deleting existing ﬁle associations.
Add File: Opens the ﬁle browser dialog, allowing you to select ﬁles to associate with the survey

asset. You can associate any ﬁle type.
Add Folder: Opens the folder browser dialog, allowing you to select the contents of a folder

to associate with the survey asset.
Delete: Removes the selected ﬁles from the Associated Files list.

Note: Deleting ﬁles only affects the current survey asset version. Existing versions remain unchanged.
E Click Next to continue to the Summary step.

Summary
The Summary step allows you to review the various survey asset details before ofﬁcially storing the survey asset to the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. The summary provides the following survey asset information:
Library Item name Description Custom Indices Topics Attached files Automatically close wizard if store is successful: Select this option to automatically close the Store
Survey Asset into Repository Wizard if the survey asset store is successful. E Verify the information is correct before clicking Finish.

If the survey asset store is unsuccessful, an icon in the Steps panel indicates on which page(s) the errors are located. Resolve all errors and resubmit the survey asset to the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. If you did not select the Automatically close wizard if store is successful option, and the survey asset store is successful, click Done to close the wizard.
Common error conditions
Step Location Error Message

Select Repository and Asset

Repository Repository

Could not connect to library. Try connecting again or contact your system administrator. Could not store survey asset in repository. Try connecting again or contact your system administrator.

64 Chapter 5 Step Location Error Message

Survey asset name Survey asset name Add Description and Custom Indices Attributes Attributes

Survey asset name not unique. Please re-specify. Survey asset name: no earlier version found. Please re-specify Value missing or invalid for attribute: AttributeName Attribute: AttributeName no longer valid

Generating questionnaires
The procedure for generating a questionnaire consists of the following steps: Browsing the IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository to select survey assets to be included in the questionnaire. Inserting survey assets into the working questionnaire. Generating questionnaires from retrieved survey assets.

Browsing the IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository
The Repository Pane provides basic access to topics and survey assets stored in all conﬁgured repositories. You can navigate through existing topics and identify survey assets to insert into your questionnaire. Refer to Advanced Browse for more robust browse and search features.

Advanced Browse
The Advanced Browse dialog is accessed from the Repository Pane via the Advanced... button and allows you to browse for survey assets by topic, or perform advanced searches.
Browse Tab

The Browse tab allows you to browse, by topic, for survey assets in all conﬁgured repositories. The tab also provides detailed information for each topic and survey asset. Clicking a topic populates the Search Results Summary pane with a list of survey assets assigned to the topic. The Search Results Summary pane provides the following information for each survey asset:
Name and Description: Provides the survey asset name, description, and links for the following

options:
Questions: Opens the Details pane with focus on the Questions tab. Files: Opens the Details pane with focus on the Files tab. Download: Opens the Browse for Folder dialog, allowing you to download ﬁles associated

with the selected survey asset to a folder to your local computer or network Associated ﬁles are stored within .mzd ﬁles.
Routings: Lists the routings assigned to the survey asset. Contexts: Lists the contexts assigned to the survey asset.

65 Question Repository

Topics: Lists the topics assigned to the survey asset. Last Modified: Identiﬁes the date the survey asset was last updated.
E Click Insert Survey to insert the selected survey asset into the working questionnaire.

Search Tab

The Search tab allows you to locate survey assets based on various search criteria.
Repository: Lists all conﬁgured repositories. Select the appropriate IBM® SPSS® Collaboration

and Deployment Services Repository and click Connect....
Connect: If you are not already connected to the selected repository, clicking the button

displays the Connect to Repository dialog, allowing you to connect to the selected repository. If you are already connected to a repository, clicking Connect results in a conﬁrmation message that allows you to connect to the selected repository as a different user.
Search: Click to initiate the search based on the deﬁned search criteria. Searching occurs in

the background, and could take an extended amount of time to complete.
Stop: Click to stop the active search. Search all fields: When selected, the search looks for any survey asset ﬁeld that matches the deﬁned search criteria. Enter to appropriate search criteria in the ﬁeld provided. Search specific fields: When selected, the search runs in advanced mode, allowing you to

speciﬁcally deﬁne which survey asset ﬁelds are searched. You can select multiple ﬁelds.
Custom Attributes: When selected, you can select a custom attribute from the table provided. Description: When selected, you can search for speciﬁc text in the question description. Enter

the appropriate description text.
Modify Date: When selected, you can specify a modiﬁed date range for the selected survey

asset ﬁelds.
Question Name: When selected, you can search for a speciﬁc question name. Enter an

appropriate question name.
Question Text: When selected, you can search for speciﬁc question text. Enter the appropriate

question text.
Questionnaire Language: When selected, you can select a speciﬁc language. The search will

return all survey assets that belong to the speciﬁed language.
Context: When selected, you can select a speciﬁc context. The search will return all survey

assets that belong to the speciﬁed context.
Routing Context: When selected, you can select a speciﬁc routing context. The search will

return all survey assets that belong to the speciﬁed routing context.
Topic: When selected, you can select a speciﬁc topic. The search will return all survey assets

that are associated with the speciﬁed topic.

66 Chapter 5

Details pane
The Details pane provides options for viewing detailed information for each survey asset question.
Questions tab

The Question tab provides options for viewing the selected survey asset questions.
Back to Summary: Click to return to the Search Results Summary pane. Context: Lists all available contexts for the selected survey asset. Select the appropriate context. Language: Lists all available languages for the selected survey asset. Select an appropriate

language.
View: Provides options for toggling the question and response views. Questions Only: When checked, the view only displays questions. Questions and Responses: When checked, the view displays both questions and responses. Retrieve All Questions...: Click to insert all survey asset questions into the active working

questionnaire. The control is the same as clicking Insert Survey from the Search Results Summary pane.
File Tab

The Files tab lists all ﬁles associated with the selected survey asset.

Inserting survey assets
After locating the appropriate survey assets click Insert to retrieve the selected asset and insert it into the working questionnaire.

Generating questionnaires from retrieved survey assets
After retrieving survey assets, you can generate an .mdd ﬁle and store the ﬁle, together with any associated ﬁles, to a IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. You can also save the resulting questionnaire to a local computer or network location.

IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository organization
The following section explains the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository structure within a IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. This section is intended for experienced IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository administrators. The Question Repository consists of the following elements: Survey assets. Consist of .mzd ﬁles, in which .mdd ﬁles and related ﬁles are stored.

67 Question Repository

The IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository Conﬁguration File. Contains the conﬁguration settings for a IBM® SPSS® Data CollectionQuestion Repository. Folders. Files are stored in folders. The repository can be conﬁgured for the storage of conﬁguration ﬁles, repository project ﬁles, and survey assets. Topics. You classify survey assets by associating them with one or more topics. Attributes. These are used to store additional survey asset information. Attribute values are indexed and can be searched. Search ﬁelds. When you add a survey asset to the repository, the content of the asset is indexed, enabling you to later search for asset attributes.

Survey assets
The ﬁle types typically stored in a IBM® SPSS® Data CollectionIBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository are:
.mzd files. These are compressed archive ﬁles that are created to store an .mdd ﬁle and any

number of associated ﬁles, such as IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server template (.html and .xml) ﬁles, cascading style sheet (.css) ﬁles, and word processing documents. The .mzd ﬁle is created when an .mdd ﬁle is submitted to the repository. A supplemental .mdd ﬁle is added to the .mzd ﬁle, and is used to store attributes. .mdd ﬁles are Data Collection Metadata Document ﬁles, but they are also known as Questionnaire Deﬁnition ﬁles or Interview Script ﬁles. The metadata consists of information about a survey, and includes question names and texts, category names and texts, translations of texts, and routing information that deﬁnes the order in which questions are asked. An .mdd ﬁle can contain one or more questions.
.dql files. These are the repository conﬁguration ﬁles. The repository.dql ﬁle describes

the repository behavior for Question Repository on the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services server. Before using Question Repository, the ﬁle needs to be placed into a IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository directory via IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager. The repository.dql ﬁle is referenced via the DQL Path ﬁeld in the New Repository Connection dialog.
Storing survey assets

You store survey assets to the repository using the Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard, which stores the submitted .mdd ﬁle in a .mzd ﬁle together with any associated ﬁles that you provide, and then adds the .mzd ﬁle to the relevant folder in the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. When a survey asset is stored to the repository, the ﬁle content is indexed so that it can be searched. For more information, see the topic Search ﬁelds on p. 70. You can also use Deployment Manager to add new ﬁles directly to the repository. For more information, see Chapter 6 of the Deployment Manager User’s Guide. However, do not use Deployment Manager to move, copy, update, delete, or rename existing .mzd ﬁles, because this method does not update the indexes used to search for these ﬁles.

68 Chapter 5

You can add other ﬁle types to the repository, but these will not be indexed by the adapter. However, IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services will index basic information about the ﬁle, such as its name, location, creation date, and so on.
Updating survey assets

When you use either the Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard or Deployment Manager to add a ﬁle that has the same name as an existing ﬁle, a new version of the ﬁle is created in the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. You can then access the current survey asset version. Version control is a standard feature of IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services. For more information, see “Viewing Object Properties” in Chapter 6 of the Deployment Manager User’s Guide.
Controlling access to survey assets

If your repository is being shared by different teams of users and you need to control access to individual ﬁles, you can do so by usingDeployment Manager to change ﬁle permissions. For more information, see the topic Object-level security on p. 81.

Folders
The internal organization of the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository is presented to the user as folders, which look similar to folders in a traditional ﬁle system and can be used in much the same way. However, the physical storage for IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository is a relational database rather than a ﬁle system. IBM® SPSS® Data CollectionIBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository expects several root folders and ﬁles to exist in the repository, which are described in the following table:
Folder Name \RepositoryName \RepositoryName\Submitted \RepositoryName\repository.dql Description The root folder for the Question Repository. RepositoryName is used as an example. You can provide a unique repository name. Folder where submitted survey assets are stored. A conﬁguration ﬁle must exist for every Question Repository. For more information, see the topic The IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository Conﬁguration File on p. 72.

You can use IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager to create folders However, do not use Deployment Manager to rename, delete, or import folders that contain .mzd ﬁles, because this method does not update the indexes used to search for these ﬁles. For more information, see the topic Search ﬁelds on p. 70.

69 Question Repository

Topics
Topics are a feature of IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services that provide you with a method for classifying the survey assets in the repository. For example, you might want to classify survey assets by their type, such as Demographics, or by the mode in which the generated questionnaire will be used, such as Paper. You can deﬁne a topic structure that looks much like a folder structure, that is, topics can contain other topics, or subtopics. However, topics differ from folders in that you can list a survey asset under more than one topic. You can browse the topic hierarchy that you have created. A survey asset should be listed under all the topics that have been assigned to a particular survey asset. Before you create and assign topics, there are some limitations of IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services of which you should be aware: Security on topics is not supported. Therefore, a user who has been assigned the Deﬁne Topics action in IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services can administer all topics in the repository. In addition, your topic names will be visible to all users of the repository, which might include users of non-repository applications. For these reasons, do not include sensitive information in topic names, and consider whether you should setup a dedicated repository for your IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository.
Defining topics

You should add, update, and delete topics using IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager. For more information, see “Working with Topics” in Chapter 5 of the Deployment Manager User’s Guide.
Assigning topics

You typically assign topics to survey assets, or unassign topics from survey assets, using the Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard. However, you can also use Deployment Manager to carry out these tasks. For more information, see “Working with Topics” in Chapter 5 of the Deployment Manager User’s Guide.

Attributes
Attributes are used to store additional information about a survey asset. For example, you might want to store the names of the countries in which the survey asset questions should be used. Attributes can be used in a similar way to topics, but attributes differ from topics in that the attribute names and values are stored within the ﬁle as custom properties in the metadata. Unlike topic names, attribute names and values are included in the search when searching for ﬁles. Attributes are not a standard feature of IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services, and should not be confused with the custom properties feature of IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services.

70 Chapter 5

Defining attributes

You deﬁne attributes by adding attribute deﬁnitions to the The IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository Conﬁguration File. Attributes can be deﬁned as either required or optional for new ﬁles. The sample conﬁguration ﬁle installed with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository contains deﬁnitions for several required attributes. Note: If you deﬁne a new, required attribute, you may be required to add that attribute to all existing ﬁles in the repository.
Specifying attribute values

You specify attribute values when you use the Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard to store a survey asset to the repository. When you specify attributes, the custom properties are not added to the survey asset that you are storing. Instead, a separate .mdd ﬁle is created to store the custom properties. This additional ﬁle is added to the .mzd ﬁle together with the .mdd ﬁle that you are submitting. The .mdd ﬁle used to store custom properties is always called supplemental.mdd, and is added to the Indexing folder in the .mzd ﬁle.

Search fields
When an .mzd ﬁle is stored to the repository, IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services indexes the content of all .mdd ﬁles inside the .mzd ﬁle (including the supplemental .mdd ﬁle that’s used to store attributes) but ignores any other ﬁle types. All created index entries refer to the .mzd ﬁle. When IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services moves a ﬁle between folders, the existing index entries for that ﬁle are deleted and the ﬁle is indexed again so that the index entries reﬂect the new location.
Important: Do not use IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment

Manager to move, copy, update, delete, or rename existing .mzd ﬁles, or to delete, rename, or import folders that contain .mzd ﬁles. This method does not update the indexes used to search for these ﬁles. However, you can use Deployment Manager to add new ﬁles and folders.
What is indexed

If the metadata document in the .mzd ﬁle is versioned, only the latest version is indexed. Index entries are created for the following metadata items: The names and label texts for all questions, categories, and shared lists. When label texts have been speciﬁed for more than one combination of context and language, an index entry is created for each alternative label text. The names of all contexts, languages, and routing contexts. The names and values of the document’s custom properties. In addition, index entries are created to record the following: The name of the repository folder in which the asset is currently stored.

71 Question Repository

Whether the ﬁle contains any questions. Whether the ﬁle contains any shared lists. The value for the last two index entries is set to either True or False.
What is not indexed

The following items are not indexed: System variable names and label texts. The names and label texts of loop, grid, compound, block, and page questions. However, simple questions inside loops, grids, compounds, and blocks are indexed, as are the names and label texts of the controlling categories in a categorical loop or grid. Label texts that are inherited from context or language alternatives. Custom properties for any object other than the document object.

IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository configuration and customization
This section is intended for use by experienced system administrators and developers and explains how to set up and customize a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository.

Checklist for Setting Up a IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository
You can use this checklist to guide you through the steps needed to setup a IBM® SPSS® Data CollectionIBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository.
Step 1. 2. Task Decide whether survey assets should be shared, and should therefore be stored in the repository. Install the Data Collection Adapter Plugin for IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services in your IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. Use IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager to create the required folders in the repository. Create a Question Repository conﬁguration ﬁle and add checklist items. Determine which attributes (that is, additional search ﬁelds) your repository requires and add these to the Question Repository conﬁguration ﬁle. Determine which properties your repository requires and add these to the Question Repository conﬁguration ﬁle. Conﬁgure and enable the security provider. Further Information Generating questionnaires Refer to the “Data Collection Adapter Plugin for IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services” section in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Desktop 6.0.1 Installation Guide. Folders The IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository Conﬁguration File Attributes

3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

Properties Security provider

72 Chapter 5

Step 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13.

Task Depending on your security provider, deﬁne the repository users. Using Deployment Manager, create roles for your repository and assign those roles to the users of your repository. Using Deployment Manager, give your users the access level they need to the relevant folders for their assigned roles. Using Deployment Manager, deﬁne the topics you need to classify ﬁles. Using your Question Repository application or Deployment Manager, add ﬁles to the repository, ensuring that you assign each ﬁle the appropriate topic names and attribute values. If necessary for the security of your survey asset, deﬁne the users’ access to individual assets.

Further Information Users and groups Roles and actions Object-level security Topics Survey assets

Object-level security

The IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository Configuration File
This section is intended for use by experienced system administrators and developers and explains how to set up and customize an IBM® SPSS® Data CollectionIBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository. The conﬁguration settings for a Data CollectionQuestion Repository are contained in the XML ﬁle repository.dql. The repository.dql ﬁle deﬁnes the Question Repository behavior on the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services server. Before using Question Repository, the ﬁle needs to be placed into a IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository folder via IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager. The repository.dql ﬁle is referenced via the DQL Path ﬁeld in the New Repository Connection dialog. Note: A sample repository.dql ﬁle is included on the IBM SPSS Data Collection Desktop 6.0.1 installation CD in the QRPES_Server directory. You can use the ﬁle as a starting point for your own settings.
Defining the Configuration Settings

You should use an XML editor program to edit repository.dql. You can deﬁne settings for the following items: Properties Attributes

73 Question Repository

Applying the Configuration Settings

To apply your settings, use Deployment Manager to create a root folder (Questionnaire Repository for example) in your repository. Insert the repository.dql ﬁle into the new folder. When the Question Repository application connects to the repository, it expects to ﬁnd the conﬁguration ﬁle in the speciﬁed folder. For example:
/Questionnaire Repository/repository.dql

For more information about creating folders and adding ﬁles, see Chapter 6 of the Deployment Manager User’s Guide.
Changing the Configuration Settings

To change the settings, use Deployment Manager to download the repository.dql ﬁle, then open the downloaded ﬁle in an XML editor. When you have made your changes, use Deployment Manager to add the updated version back to the repository.dql folder.

Properties
Properties control the overall IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository behavior. Properties do not automatically enforce behavior—you must enforce the desired behavior in your Question Repository. You can deﬁne as many properties as you need. Deﬁne properties in the Question Repository conﬁguration ﬁle using the following syntax: property value ...

Syntax property name property value

Description A unique property name. The property value.

In addition to your own library properties, there are two required properties that are described in the following table. Your conﬁguration ﬁle must include the DefaultTopic and LibraryTopicRoot properties.

74 Chapter 5

For example:
/Unclassified /Questionnaire Repository

Property Name DefaultTopic LibraryTopicRoot

Description Deﬁnes the default topic to be assigned to a submitted question when the submitter has not provided a topic name. Your conﬁguration ﬁle must include this property. The root topic for all Question Repository topics deﬁned in IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager.

Attributes
The repository.dql ﬁle contains deﬁnitions for custom attributes. The custom attributes are presented via the Store Survey Asset into Repository Wizard. The attributes added to survey assets can help describe and categorize the assets and can be used later when searching for survey assets. For example, you might want to store the names of the countries in which the question should be used. You can create any type and any number of custom attributes in the repository.dql ﬁle, using the following example syntax: Important: Custom attribute names cannot contain spaces. Difficulty of question Easy Moderate Hard

Syntax mustusevalues required name

Description Determines whether or not a value can be entered in addition to being selected from the drop-down menu. Determines whether or not the attribute is required. The attribute name.

75 Question Repository

Syntax caption language allowedvalues

Description The text (and language of the text) that will appear in the user interface for the attribute. Contains the names and caption text of the items appearing in the user interface as selection choices.

IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services authorization
The following IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services settings are required for all IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository users:
E All Question Repository users must be assigned to a role that includes the Access Contents

and Folders action. This can be accomplished through the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager Server Administration tab.
E All Question Repository users with Question Repository browse and search authority must have

Read access to the appropriate IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository folders. You can modify folder permissions through Deployment Manager by right-clicking the appropriate folder and selecting:
Properties > Persmissions tab E All Question Repository users who have authority to submit new survey assets to the repository

must have Write access to the appropriate IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository folders. You can modify folder permissions through Deployment Manager by right-clicking the appropriate folder and selecting:
Properties > Persmissions tab

Refer to the Deployment Manager User’s Guide for more information on conﬁguring the required settings.

Configure repository connections
The Conﬁgure Repository Connections dialog displays deﬁned IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository connections, and provides options for creating new connections, editing existing connections, and deleting existing connections. To access the dialog, go to:
Tools > Options > Library > Conﬁgure Repository Connections...

The table identiﬁes all deﬁned IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository connections. Each table row identiﬁes the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository location, the repository name, and the user ID.
E Click New... to open the New Repository Connection dialog. The dialog provides options for

deﬁning a new IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository connection.
E Click Edit... to open the Edit Repository dialog. The dialog provides options for editing an existing

IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository connection.
E Click Delete... to remove the selected IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services

Repository connection from the table.

76 Chapter 5

New Repository Connection
The New Repository Connection dialog provides options for deﬁning a new IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository connection.
Name: The IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository name. This ﬁeld is

required.
Repository: The server name for the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository (server name or IP address). This ﬁeld is required. Port: The port number on which the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository is listening (1 through 65535). This ﬁeld is required. DQL Path: The path to the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository library conﬁguration ﬁle repository.dql in the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. This ﬁeld is required. Use SSL: Check this option enable the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol for securing the transmission between the client application and the repository. The SSL protocol must be set up in advance by a system administrator before it can be applied to a repository connection. Enable SSO: Check this option enable Single Sign On (SSO). When selected, the User ID, Password,
Domain, and Provider ﬁelds a removed from view and the current Windows user credentials are

used for logging into the repository.
User ID: The default user ID for the speciﬁed IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services

Repository. This ﬁeld is required.
Password: Password for the deﬁned User ID. This ﬁeld is optional and only used to test the connection (the password is not persisted or saved with the connection). Domain: The domain for the default user ID. This ﬁeld is optional. Provider: The default IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Security Provider to

use for this connection. This ﬁeld is optional. Click ... to retrieve conﬁgured IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Security Providers.
Test Connection

Click Test to test the speciﬁed IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository conﬁguration information. An error message displays when the connection fails.

Edit Repository
The Edit Repository dialog provides options for editing an existing IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository connection. The ﬁelds are automatically populated with the information currently deﬁned for the selected repository connection.

77 Question Repository

Name: The IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository name. This ﬁeld is

required.
Repository: The server name for the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services

Repository (server name or IP address). This ﬁeld is required.
Port: The port number on which the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository is listening (1 through 65535). This ﬁeld is required. DQL Path: The path to the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository library conﬁguration ﬁle repository.dql in the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. This ﬁeld is required. Use SSL: Check this option enable the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol for securing the

transmission between the client application and the repository. The SSL protocol must be set up in advance by a system administrator before it can be applied to a repository connection.
Enable SSO: Check this option enable Single Sign On (SSO). When selected, the User ID, Password,
Domain, and Provider ﬁelds a removed from view and the current Windows user credentials are

used for logging into the repository.
User ID: The default user ID for the speciﬁed IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services

Repository. This ﬁeld is required.
Password: Password for the deﬁned User ID. This ﬁeld is optional and only used to test the connection (the password is not persisted or saved with the connection). Domain: The domain for the default user ID. This ﬁeld is optional. Provider: The default IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Security Provider to

use for this connection. This ﬁeld is optional. Click ... to retrieve conﬁgured IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Security Providers.
Test Connection

Click Test to test the speciﬁed IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository conﬁguration information. An error message displays when the connection fails.

Connect to Repository
The Connect to Repository dialog provides options for connecting to the default IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository.
User ID: The user ID used to connect to the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services

Repository. The ﬁeld is pre-populated if the library conﬁguration contains a default user ID. For more information, see the topic Edit Repository on p. 76. This ﬁeld is required.
Password: Password for the deﬁned User ID.

78 Chapter 5

Provider: The default IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Security Provider to use for this connection. The ﬁeld is only available when two or more security providers are conﬁgured. For more information, see the topic Edit Repository on p. 76. This ﬁeld is required (when available).

Configuring multiple question repositories
The following steps detail the process of conﬁguring multiple Question Repositories on the same IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services server.
E Create additional IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository root folders in IBM®

SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager. Refer to Folders for information on Question RepositoryDeployment Manager folder requirements.
E Create additional repository.dql ﬁles and place them at the root level of any additional repository

folders. Edit the additional repository.dql ﬁles to ensure the DefaultTopic and LibraryTopicRoot properties are properly deﬁned for the additional repositories:
/Unclassified 2 /Questionnaire Repository 2

In the above examples, /Unclassified 2 and /Questionnaire Repository 2 can be replaced with more appropriate topic names. The deﬁned topic names can be unique or identical between the different repositories. Your Deployment Manager folder structure should resemble the following when multiple repositories exist:
Figure 5-2 IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager Folder Structure

79 Question Repository E The root topics you create in Deployment Manager should match the LibraryTopicRoot entries in

each survey asset’s repository.dql ﬁle. For example:
Figure 5-3 IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager Topic Definitions

Refer to Topics for information on working with topics.
E Deﬁne new repository connections in the Conﬁgure repository connections dialog for each

additional repository. The new repository connections should point to the same IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services server, but each connection will have a different DQL path that points to the new repository.dql ﬁles.

Administration and maintenance
This section is intended for use by those responsible for the day-to-day running of a IBM® SPSS® Data CollectionIBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository.

Managing security
You can enforce IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository security by setting up and maintaining the following: Security provider. The security provider hosts the directory that will be used to authenticate the Question Repository users. Users and groups. Control access to the repository by creating users and groups.

80 Chapter 5

Roles and actions. Control access to Question Repository features by assigning actions to roles, and roles to users and groups. Object-level security. Control access to folders and ﬁles in the repository by using object-level security.

Security provider
The security provider hosts the directory that will be used to authenticate IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository users. IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services supports both a native security provider and external security providers such as Microsoft Active Directory and OpenLDAP. For more information about using these security providers, see Chapter 6 of the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Administrator’s Guide.

Users and groups
Control access to a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository by creating users and groups in IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services. The way in which you create users and groups depends on whether you are using the native security provider for IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services, or whether you are using an external security provider. For more information about managing users and groups, refer to the following table:
Security Provider The native security provider for IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Other external security providers Documentation Chapter 4 of the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Administrator’s Guide Refer to the documentation for the security provider.

Roles and actions
Use roles to control the access of users and groups to the features of IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services. A role consists of one or more actions, which are predeﬁned and cannot be changed. Some examples of the standard actions in IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services are Access Contents and Folders and Deﬁne Topics. A user or group can have more than one role assigned to them. For example a user/group can be authorized to submit ﬁles and generate questionnaires. For more information about assigning roles to users and groups, see Chapter 5 of the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Administrator’s Guide.
Important: After assigning roles to users and groups, you must also give those users and groups

the appropriate level of access to the relevant folders in the repository. For more information, see the topic Object-level security on p. 81.

81 Question Repository

Object-level security
Object-level security is a standard feature of IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services that is used to control access to folders and ﬁles in the repository. For each folder or ﬁle, you can provide users and groups one of the following levels of access: None; Read; Write; Delete; Modify Permissions. Note that each level of access includes the previous level (Write includes Read, for example). By default, all users and groups have read access to all objects. When deploying a IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Question Repository, there are typically two tasks you must perform that involve modifying object-level security: For those users and groups that have been assigned repository-speciﬁc roles, give those users and groups permission to update the relevant folders. If your repository is being shared by different teams of users and you need to control access to individual ﬁles, modify the ﬁle permissions as required. For more information about setting object-level security, see “Editing Object Properties” in Chapter 6 of the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager User’s Guide
Granting access to folders

After you have assigned your repository-speciﬁc roles to users and groups, you must give those users and groups access to the relevant folders. The following table describes the level of access you should provide for each of the roles suggested in Roles and actions:
Give This Level of Access to These Folders Read Write The designated folder for approved ﬁles. None required. None required. The designated folder for submitted ﬁles.

For Users and Groups that have This Role Search the Library Submit a Question

Delete None required. The designated folder for rejected ﬁles.

Documentation for IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services
For help with installing and using the components of IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services, refer to the following documents:
Document Description How to Access the Document

IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services Administrator’s Guide

Explains how to install, conﬁgure, and operate the IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Deployment Services Repository. Chapter 3 of this document explains how to use the browser-based IBM® SPSS®

Included on the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services installation CD as ﬁle \Documentation\EnterpriseAdministrator.pdf. After installation, you can access the Guide by clicking Adminstrator

82 Chapter 5 Document Description How to Access the Document
Guide in the navigation pane

Collaboration and Deployment Services Deployment Manager. IBM® SPSS® Collaboration and Explains how to install and use Deployment Services Deployment the Deployment Manager. Manager User’s Guide

on the left of the browser-based Deployment Manager main page.

Included on the IBM SPSS Collaboration and Deployment Services installation CD as ﬁle \Documentation\EnterpriseManager.pdf. After installation, you can access the Guide from the Help menu option in Deployment Manager.

Chapter

Creating questions and responses

6

You create a questionnaire by adding questions of different types to the questionnaire ﬁle, and then adding routing information to specify the order in which you want the questions to appear. The topics in this section deal with creating questions and responses. For details about adding routing information and changing the order of questions, see Changing the Questionnaire Order. Note: When you add questions to a questionnaire, it is recommended that you work in the Routings pane, so that all the questions you create are automatically added to a routing. Adding questions in the Questions pane adds them to the questionnaire ﬁle but does not include them in a routing, so you need to do this in a separate step.
Question types

You can choose from a number of different question types, depending on the information that you want to record. For example, you can create a question that requires the respondent to choose from a list of categories, or you can provide a text box so that respondents can answer in their own words. The type of information that you want to record, and the format in which you want to record it, determine the question type to use. To help you decide on the most appropriate question type to use when you create a question, see Question type overview for a summary of the available options. Note: The Routings section of the Properties pane allows you to select an interviewing mode for the questionnaire. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types. So if you select Paper - Scanning for the interviewing mode, selection of these question types will be automatically disabled.
Predefined questions

You can also add predeﬁned questions to a questionnaire by: copying the questions from a questionnaire ﬁle open in another instance of IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. For more information, see the topic Copying and Pasting Questions in Chapter 7 on p. 175. inserting the contents of a questionnaire ﬁle from the Library. For more information, see the topic Inserting questions from the library on p. 165. using the Questionnaire Wizard to create questions on commonly used themes. Note: You must ﬁrst save the open document before working with the questionnaire wizard. Saving the document ensures that the working folder is properly deﬁned. inserting a special question template. For more information, see the topic Using a question template on p. 168. Once you insert the questions, you can edit them to meet your requirements.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 83

84 Chapter 6

Question type overview
When you create a new question, the type of information that the question is designed to capture, and the format in which the question is displayed to the respondent, determine the question type to use. The following table lists the different question types and the icons that represent them in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. Note: The Routings section of the Properties pane allows you to select an interviewing mode for the questionnaire. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types. So if you select Paper - Scanning for the interviewing mode, selection of these question types will be automatically disabled.
Icon Type from a predeﬁned list. An example is “Which is your favorite type of coffee?” followed by a list of coffees. For more information, see the topic Creating single response questions on p. 87. Multiple response question. A question to which the respondent can choose several answers from a predeﬁned set of answers. An example is the question “Which of these types of coffee have you ever purchased?” in response to which the respondent can select any number of brands from a list. For more information, see the topic Creating multiple response questions on p. 90. Single response grid question. A question that requires respondents to choose one from a predeﬁned set of answers for a number of subjects. A grid question might ask respondents to choose a rating on a predeﬁned scale for a number of products in a list. An example is “For each of these types of coffee, please indicate how likely you are to buy it.” with ﬁve possible responses from “Never buy” to “Very often”. For more information, see the topic Creating grid questions on p. 92. Multiple response grid question. A question that allows respondents to choose several answers from a predeﬁned set of answers for a number of subjects. An example question is: “For each of these types of coffee, which of the following reasons persuaded you to buy it?” followed by a list of possible reasons, from which the respondent can choose more than one. For more information, see the topic Creating grid questions on p. 92. Numeric response grid question. A question that requires a numeric response for a number of subjects. For example, “How many times a week do you buy each of the following types of coffee?” For more information, see the topic Creating grid questions on p. 92. True/False question. This is a question to which there can be one of two answers, such as yes/no, true/false. An example is: “Would you say that there is any beneﬁt in drinking decaffeinated coffee?” Also known as a boolean question. This question type is disabled for Paper - Scanning interviewing mode. For more information, see the topic Creating True/False questions on p. 102. Numeric question. A question that requires a numeric response, for example: “How many times a week do you buy a newspaper?” For more information, see the topic Creating numeric questions on p. 103. Text question. A question that allows the respondent to answer in their own words. Sometimes known as “open-ended” or “verbatim” questions. An example is: “Please say what it is that you don’t like about coffee”. For more information, see the topic Creating text questions on p. 105. Date/Time question. A question that requires a response in the form of a date or a time, for example: “At what time do you have your ﬁrst cup of coffee of the day?” This question type is disabled for Paper - Scanning interviewing mode. For more information, see the topic Creating Date/Time questions on p. 107.
Single response question. A question that requires the respondent to choose one answer

85 Creating questions and responses

Icon

Type
Display text. This is not, strictly speaking, a question, as it does not require a response. Use

display text to add introductory text for which you do not want to record a response, such as “I’m conducting an interview on people’s coffee-drinking habits; do you have time to answer a few questions?” or other information for interviewers, such as “Questions for respondents who do not drink coffee”. For more information, see the topic Creating display text on p. 109.

Grouped questions: Compound. Compounds are typically used for presentation purposes in paper questionnaires,

to present a number of separate questions that use the same response list side-by-side on the page. For more information, see the topic Creating compound questions on p. 111. Loop. Loops are groups of questions that are asked multiple times with a different subject each time. For example, you could ask the question “How many times today have you bought a cup of coffee?” and ask the following questions once for each time the respondent bought a coffee: “Where did you buy it?” “How much did you pay?” “At what time did you buy it?” This question type is disabled for the Paper - Scanning interviewing mode. For more information, see the topic Creating loops to ask the same questions for different subjects on p. 113. Block. Blocks are groups of questions that you want to keep together for presentational or organizational purposes. For example, if you have a group of demographics questions, you may want to group them in a block so that you can easily locate them in the questionnaire ﬁle. This question type is disabled for the Paper - Scanning interviewing mode. For more information, see the topic Creating blocks of questions on p. 120.
Database questions: Single response database question. A question that requires the respondent to choose one

answer from a predeﬁned list and whose category lists are generated by connecting to an external database. An example is “Which is your favorite type of coffee?” followed by a list of coffees. For more information, see the topic Creating single response database questions on p. 123. Multiple response database question. A question to which the respondent can choose several answers from a predeﬁned set of answers and whose category lists are generated by connecting to an external database. An example is the question “Which of these types of coffee have you ever purchased?” in response to which the respondent can select any number of brands from a list. For more information, see the topic Creating multiple response database questions on p. 128. Loop database question. Loops database questions are groups of questions that are asked multiple times with a different subject each time and whose category lists are generated by connecting to an external database. For example, you could ask the question “How many times today have you bought a cup of coffee?” and ask the following questions once for each time the respondent bought a coffee: “Where did you buy it?” “How much did you pay?” “At what time did you buy it?” This question type is disabled for the Paper - Scanning interviewing mode. For more information, see the topic Creating database question loops on p. 134.

86 Chapter 6

Routing items and other icons

A number of other icons can appear in the Author window. Some of these are for routing items such as bookmarks. Others are group types or shared list icons:
Icon Type For more information, see the topic Creating shared lists of responses on p. 151.
Routing icons: Go To. Use Go To routing items if you want the questionnaire to jump to a question other Shared List. A list of responses for use in a number of different questions.

than the next in the routing. For more information, see the topic Adding a Jump to Another Question in Chapter 7 on p. 183. If .. Go To. Use If .. Go To routing items to add a conditional jump to a question other than the next in the routing (for example, based on the response to a previous question). For more information, see the topic Adding a Jump to Another Question in Chapter 7 on p. 183. Exit. Use an exit instruction to terminate the interview before the end and record a reason for the termination. For more information, see the topic Adding an Exit Instruction to a Questionnaire in Chapter 7 on p. 198. Bookmark. Add a bookmark to use with Go To statements if you want to jump to a speciﬁc location in the questionnaire, rather than a speciﬁc question. For more information, see the topic Adding Bookmarks in Chapter 7 on p. 199. Script item. Use a script item to insert complex instructions using the Interview Scripting Language. For more information, see the topic Adding Scripts in Chapter 7 on p. 200. Set Response item. Use a set response item to set the response to a speciﬁc question using the question’s default answers as set in metadata, responses to other questions, or manually entered expressions. For more information, see the topic Adding a Set Response to a Questionnaire in Chapter 7 on p. 202. Note. Use notes if you want to record information about a question in the ﬁle for ofﬁce purposes. Notes do not appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire. For more information, see the topic Adding notes to a questionnaire on p. 159.
Condition icons: IfBlock item.The If item of a Condition block consists of one or more conditions and one or

more actions to take if the conditions are met. If the conditions are not met, control passes to the ﬁrst ElseIf item, if any in the Condition block. If there are no ElseIf items, control passes to the Else item if present; otherwise control passes to the next item following the Condition block in the current routing. Each Condition block has exactly one If item.For more information, see the topic If Item in Chapter 7 on p. 189. ElseIf item.An ElseIf item of a Condition block consists of one or more conditions and one or more actions to take if the conditions are met. If the conditions are not met, control passes to the next ElseIf item, if any in the Condition block. If there are no additional ElseIf items, control passes to the Else item if present; otherwise control passes to the next item following the Condition block in the current routing. A Condition block can have one or more ElseIf items.For more information, see the topic ElseIf Item in Chapter 7 on p. 190. Else item.An Else item of a Condition block consists of one or more actions that are taken when the conditions for the If and ElseIf items (in the block) are not satisﬁed. A Condition block can only have one Else item and it follows any ElseIf items in the block.For more information, see the topic Else Item in Chapter 7 on p. 191.
Group icons:

87 Creating questions and responses

Icon

Type purposes. For example, if you have a group of demographics questions, you may want to group them in a section so that you can easily locate them in the questionnaire ﬁle. For more information, see the topic Grouping Questions in Sections in Chapter 7 on p. 180. Page. Pages group questions together for presentational purposes in online questionnaires. Use pages to display a number of questions on the same web page. For more information, see the topic Grouping Questions in Pages in Chapter 7 on p. 181.
Section. Sections are groups of questions that you want to keep together for organizational

Creating single response questions
If you want to create a question with a list of responses from which the respondent must choose one, use a single response question type. For example: “Which is your favorite type of coffee?” See also Creating grid questions.
Creating a single response question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Single Response

or press Ctrl+F1. The new question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.
Figure 6-1 Inserting a single response question

E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, What is the main purpose of your current journey?

88 Chapter 6 E In the ﬁrst row of the Responses table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst response.

This is the text of the response as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the response and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next response.
Tip: To correct the text of a response, use the up arrow key to move back through the list.

Once you have added all the responses, the question is ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the question. You specify additional details about the responses using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-2 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Type ﬁeld indicates whether the question is a single or multiple response question. This

corresponds to the question type you chose to create. If you want to change the question type from single to multiple after creating the question, select the option from the drop-down list.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types).

89 Creating questions and responses

Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
Specifying response options
E The Response Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which responses are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list, Random to present responses in a random order, Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last response in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present

the responses in alphabetical order.
E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the responses in the current question based on each

respondent’s answer to a previous question. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box. In the At box, choose a single or multiple response question whose answer controls the responses to be displayed for the current question. When Expert Expression is selected in the ﬁrst box, this ﬁeld allows you to manually enter an expression ﬁlter that enables the responses of a categorical question to be ﬁltered based upon the responses of one or more previous questions. Refer to the topic Filtering Categorical Response Lists in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for more information. When prompted, conﬁrm that the responses deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the response list for the current question.
Specifying presentation options

You can control how the question will appear in the output format using the presentation options.
E The Number of Rows/Columns ﬁeld controls how responses are arranged for the selected question. If you select rows in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered in rows, split into as many columns as necessary. If you select columns in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered

in columns, split into as many rows as necessary.
E The Presentation ﬁeld allows you to select how the responses are presented for the selected

question. Options include: Check Box, List Box, and Dropdown box.
E The Orientation ﬁeld provides options for displaying responses in rows or columns. Option

include: Default (rows), Columns, and Rows. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.

90 Chapter 6

Specifying additional response details in the Design pane

For more information, see the topic Specifying additional response details in the design pane on p. 149.

Creating multiple response questions
If you want to create a question with a list of responses from which the respondent can choose several, use a multiple response question type. For example: “Which of these types of coffee have you ever purchased?” in response to which the respondent can select any number of brands from a list. See also Creating grid questions.
Creating a multiple response question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Multiple Response

or press Ctrl+F2.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, What types of transport does your current journey involve? E In the ﬁrst row of the Responses table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst response.

This is the text of the response as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the response and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next response.
Tip: To correct the text of a response, use the up arrow key to move back through the list.

Once you have added all the responses, the question is ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the question. You specify additional details about the responses using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.

91 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-3 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Type ﬁeld indicates whether the question is a single or multiple response question. This

corresponds to the question type you chose to create. If you want to change the question type from single to multiple after creating the question, select the option from the drop-down list.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
Specifying number of responses options
E The Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds indicate the number of responses that can be entered for the

question. For questions where a response is required, the minimum is 1.
Specifying response options
E The Response Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which responses are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list, Random to

92 Chapter 6

present responses in a random order, Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last response in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present the responses in alphabetical order.
E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the responses in the current question based on each

respondent’s answer to a previous question. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box. In the At box, choose a single or multiple response question whose answer controls the responses to be displayed for the current question. When Expert Expression is selected in the ﬁrst box, this ﬁeld allows you to manually enter an expression ﬁlter that enables the responses of a categorical question to be ﬁltered based upon the responses of one or more previous questions. Refer to the topic Filtering Categorical Response Lists in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for more information. When prompted, conﬁrm that the responses deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the response list for the current question.
Specifying presentation options

You can control how the question will appear in the output format using the presentation options.
E The Number of Rows/Columns ﬁeld controls how responses are arranged for the selected question. If you select rows in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered in rows, split into as many columns as necessary. If you select columns in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered

in columns, split into as many rows as necessary.
E The Presentation ﬁeld allows you to select how the responses are presented for the selected

question. Options include: Check Box, List Box, and Dropdown box.
E The Orientation ﬁeld provides options for displaying responses in rows or columns. Option

include: Default (rows), Columns, and Rows. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane

For more information, see the topic Specifying additional response details in the design pane on p. 149.

Creating grid questions
You can create the following type of grid questions:
Single response. Use for questions that require respondents to choose one from a predeﬁned

set of answers for a number of subjects.
Multiple response. Use for questions that allow respondents to choose several answers from a

predeﬁned set of answers for a number of subjects.

93 Creating questions and responses

Numeric response. Use for questions that require a numeric response for a number of subjects. Text response. Use for questions that require text responses. Creating a single response grid
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Single Response Grid

or press Ctrl+F3.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, What is the best feature of each of these products? E In the ﬁrst Responses column/row, of the table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst

response. This is the text of the response as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the response and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next response.
E In the ﬁrst Subjects column/row, of the table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst subject.

This is the text of the subject of the question as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the subject and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next subject.
Tip: To correct the text, use the up arrow key to move back through the list.

Alternatively, you can use the Advanced Category Editor. Click the Advanced Responses Editor icon or the Advanced Subjects Editor icon to access the Advanced Category Editor.
Advanced Responses Editor icon Advanced Subjects Editor icon

For more information, see the topic Advanced Category Editor in Chapter 9 on p. 226. Once you have added all the subjects and responses, the question is ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question. You specify additional details about the responses using the Design pane.
Specifying presentation options

You can change the grid orientation by displaying Responses as rows and Subjects as columns.

94 Chapter 6 E Create a new grid or select an existing grid from the Routings pane. By default the grid displays

with Responses on the top (columns) and Subjects on the side (rows).
E In the Properties pane, change the Display Subjects in option to Columns.

OR
E Click the Transpose button. Figure 6-4

E Subjects are now displayed as columns, and Responses are displayed as rows. E Click the Transpose button again to return the grid to its default orientation.

Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-5 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Type ﬁeld indicates whether the question is a single or multiple response question. This

corresponds to the question type you chose to create. If you want to change the question type from single to multiple after creating the question, select the option from the drop-down list.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types).

95 Creating questions and responses

Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
E The Grid Variable Name ﬁeld allows you to set a grid variable name for use during analysis,

if desired.
Specifying subject options
E The Subject Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which subjects are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present subjects in the order they appear in the response list, Random to present subjects in a random order, Rotated to present subjects in rotation so that each subject takes a turn at being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present subjects in reverse order so that the last subject in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present the subjects

in alphabetical order.
E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the subjects in the current question based on each respondent’s

answer to a previous question. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box. In the At box, choose a single or multiple response question whose answer controls the subjects to be displayed for the current question. When Expert Expression is selected in the ﬁrst box, this ﬁeld allows you to manually enter an expression ﬁlter that enables a grid’s subjects to be ﬁltered based upon the responses of one or more previous questions. Refer to the topic Filtering Categorical Response Lists in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for more information. When prompted, conﬁrm that the subjects deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the subjects for the current question.
Specifying presentation options
E The Display Subjects in ﬁeld controls how subjects are arranged for the selected question. If you

select rows, the subjects will be ordered in rows, split into as many columns as necessary. If you select columns, the subjects will be ordered in columns, split into as many rows as necessary. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane

For more information, see the topic Specifying additional response details in the design pane on p. 149.

96 Chapter 6

Creating a multiple response grid
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Multiple Response Grid

or press Ctrl+F4.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it

identiﬁes the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, Which features do you like about each of these products? E In the ﬁrst Responses column/row, of the table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst

response. This is the text of the response as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the response and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next response.
E In the ﬁrst Subjects column/row, of the table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst subject.

This is the text of the subject of the question as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the subject and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next subject.
Tip: To correct the text, use the up arrow key to move back through the list.

Alternatively, you can use the Advanced Category Editor. Click the Advanced Responses Editor icon or the Advanced Subjects Editor icon to access the Advanced Category Editor.
Advanced Responses Editor icon Advanced Subjects Editor icon

For more information, see the topic Advanced Category Editor in Chapter 9 on p. 226. Once you have added all the subjects and responses, the question is ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question. You specify additional details about the responses using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.

97 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-6 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Type ﬁeld indicates whether the question is a single or multiple response question. This

corresponds to the question type you chose to create. If you want to change the question type from single to multiple after creating the question, select the option from the drop-down list.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
E The Grid Variable Name ﬁeld allows you to set a grid variable name for use during analysis,

if desired.
Specifying subjects Specifying subject options
E The Subject Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which subjects are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present subjects in the order they appear in the response list, Random to present subjects in a random order, Rotated to present subjects in rotation so that each subject takes a turn at

98 Chapter 6

being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present subjects in reverse order so that the last subject in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present the subjects in alphabetical order.
E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the subjects in the current question based on each respondent’s

answer to a previous question. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box. In the At box, choose a single or multiple response question whose answer controls the subjects to be displayed for the current question. When Expert Expression is selected in the ﬁrst box, this ﬁeld allows you to manually enter an expression ﬁlter that enables a grid’s subjects to be ﬁltered based upon the responses of one or more previous questions. Refer to the topic Filtering Categorical Response Lists in the Data Collection Developer Library for more information. When prompted, conﬁrm that the subjects deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the subjects for the current question.
Specifying presentation options
E The Display Subjects in ﬁeld controls how subjects are arranged for the selected question. If you

select rows, the subjects will be ordered in rows, split into as many columns as necessary. If you select columns, the subjects will be ordered in columns, split into as many rows as necessary. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane

For more information, see the topic Specifying additional response details in the design pane on p. 149.
Creating a numeric response grid
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Numeric Response Grid

or press Ctrl+F5.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it

identiﬁes the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, How many times have you bought each of these products? E In the ﬁrst Responses column/row, of the table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst

response. This is the text of the response as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the

99 Creating questions and responses

response and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next response.
E In the ﬁrst Subjects column/row, of the table below the question, type the text of the ﬁrst subject.

This is the text of the subject of the question as it will be displayed to respondents. To save the subject and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new line is displayed where you can type the next subject.
Tip: To correct the text, use the up arrow key to move back through the list.

Alternatively, you can use the Advanced Category Editor. Click the Advanced Responses Editor icon or the Advanced Subjects Editor icon to access the Advanced Category Editor.
Advanced Responses Editor icon Advanced Subjects Editor icon

For more information, see the topic Advanced Category Editor in Chapter 9 on p. 226. Once you have added all the subjects and responses, the question is ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question. You specify additional details about the responses using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-7 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.

100 Chapter 6 E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
E The Grid Variable Name ﬁeld allows you to set a grid variable name for use during analysis,

if desired.
Specifying the range
E The Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds indicate the range of values that a respondent can enter. For

example, you may want to restrict the respondent to entering a value from 1 to 10.
Specifying subject options
E The Subject Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which subjects are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present subjects in the order they appear in the response list, Random to present subjects in a random order, Rotated to present subjects in rotation so that each subject takes a turn at being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present subjects in reverse order so that the last subject in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present the subjects

in alphabetical order.
E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the subjects in the current question based on each respondent’s

answer to a previous question. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box. In the At box, choose a single or multiple response question whose answer controls the subjects to be displayed for the current question. When Expert Expression is selected in the ﬁrst box, this ﬁeld allows you to manually enter an expression ﬁlter that enables a grid’s subjects to be ﬁltered based upon the responses of one or more previous questions. Refer to the topic Filtering Categorical Response Lists in the Data Collection Developer Library for more information. When prompted, conﬁrm that the subjects deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the subjects for the current question.
Specifying presentation options

101 Creating questions and responses E The Display Subjects in ﬁeld controls how subjects are arranged for the selected question. If you

select rows, the subjects will be ordered in rows, split into as many columns as necessary. If you select columns, the subjects will be ordered in columns, split into as many rows as necessary. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.
Specifying numeric type options
E The Numeric Type ﬁeld indicates whether the respondent must enter a whole number or a decimal.

Select the required option from the drop-down list.
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane

For more information, see the topic Specifying additional response details in the design pane on p. 149.
Creating a text response grid
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Text Response Grid

or press Ctrl+F12.
E Text grid appearance and behavior is similar to that of numeric grids. Refer to the Creating a

numeric response grid section above for more information.
Changing the grid type after creation

After creating a single, multiple, numeric, or text grid, you can change the grid type.
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-8 Selecting the Properties pane

A table of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E To change the question type, select the appropriate type from the Type or Numeric Type drop-down menu. For example, to change to a single response grid, select One Choice Only.

Converting a loop to a grid

You can to easily convert a loop of questions into a grid:
E Select a loop from the Routings pane and select the Convert to Grid option from the Edit menu (or

use the Alt+E, G keyboard shortcut). If the conversion is successful, the Routing pane refreshes to display the selected loop as a grid.

102 Chapter 6

Note: Only loops that contain categorical iterators can be converted to grids. Refer to Creating loops to ask the same questions for different subjects for more information on loop iterators.

Creating True/False questions
In some cases, there can be only two possible answers (Yes or No, True or False) to a question. For questions like this, use a True/False question. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author presents True or False questions as a single check box. A checked box indicates a True answer; a blank box indicates a False answer. If it is possible that other answers may be given, for example, “Don’t know”, it may be preferable to use a single response question instead. For more information, see the topic Creating single response questions on p. 87. Note: The Routings section of the Properties pane allows you to select an interviewing mode for the questionnaire. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types. So if you select Paper - Scanning for the interviewing mode, selection of these question types will be automatically disabled.
Creating a True/False question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > True or False

or press Ctrl+F6. The new question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, "Click the check box if you think there are beneﬁts in drinking

decaffeinated coffee."

The question is now ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question. You can also add special responses to the question using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.

103 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-9 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.

Creating numeric questions
Use a numeric question when you want the respondent to be able to give only a numeric answer. Refer to the To create a numeric grid section in topic Creating grid questions for information on creating numeric grids.
Creating a numeric question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Numeric

or press Ctrl+F7.

104 Chapter 6

The new question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, "How many times a week do you buy a newspaper?"

The question is now ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question. You can also add special responses to the question using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-10 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types).

105 Creating questions and responses

Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
Specifying the range
E The Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds indicate the range of values that a respondent can enter. For

example, you may want to restrict the respondent to entering a value from 1 to 10.
Specifying numeric type options
E The Numeric Type ﬁeld indicates whether the respondent must enter a whole number or a decimal.

Select the required option from the drop-down list.
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane
E Choose the Design pane. E Check the Include box for the Don’t Know, Refuse, or No Answer responses to add these to the

question.
E If you want to use different text for the response, for example, “Can’t decide” instead of “Don’t know,” type the text in the appropriate Description ﬁeld. E The Go To ﬁeld shows that when the question has been asked, the questionnaire moves to the next

question in the routing list. You can change this so that if the respondent chooses one of the special responses, the questionnaire jumps to a different question. Type in the question name or select it from the drop-down list. Note: When additional response details are deﬁned for the questionnaire, and the questionnaire is then previewed on the Phone tab or activated, the keyboard shortcuts for the additional responses are presented as Ctrl+1, Ctrl+2 or Ctrl+3.

Creating text questions
Use a text question when you want to give the respondent the chance to answer in their own words. Text questions display a text box, which you can resize to limit the length of the response. Text questions are also known as open-ended questions.
Creating a text question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Text

106 Chapter 6

or press Ctrl+F8. The new question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, "Please say what it is that you don't like about coffee".

The question is now ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question. You can also add special responses to the question using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-11 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types).

107 Creating questions and responses

Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
Specifying the length of the response
E The Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds indicate the range of characters a respondent can enter. For

example, you may want to restrict the respondent to entering a value from 10 to 100 characters. Note: Setting the length for the question to a maximum value of 40, or less, results in the text question being rendered with a single line edit box. Setting the maximum value to 41, or higher, results in the text question being rendered with a multiple line edit box.
Specifying presentation options
E The Width and Height ﬁelds allow you to control how large the response text box will. These

values allow you to tailor the size of the response text box based on the length of the anticipated responses. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane
E Choose the Design pane. E Check the Include box for the Don’t Know, Refuse, or No Answer responses to add these to the

question.
E If you want to use different text for the response, for example, “Can’t decide” instead of “Don’t know,” type the text in the appropriate Description ﬁeld. E The Go To ﬁeld shows that when the question has been asked, the questionnaire moves to the next

question in the routing list. You can change this so that if the respondent chooses one of the special responses, the questionnaire jumps to a different question. Type in the question name or select it from the drop-down list. Note: When additional response details are deﬁned for the questionnaire, and the questionnaire is then previewed on the Phone tab or activated, the keyboard shortcuts for the additional responses are presented as Ctrl+1, Ctrl+2 or Ctrl+3.

Creating Date/Time questions
Use a Date/Time question for any questions where the answer is a date or time.

108 Chapter 6

Note: The Routings section of the Properties pane allows you to select an interviewing mode for the questionnaire. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types. So if you select Paper - Scanning for the interviewing mode, selection of these question types will be automatically disabled.
Creating a date/time question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Date/Time

or press Ctrl+F9. The new question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, "At what time of day do you have your ﬁrst cup of coffee?"

The question is now ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details about the question, such as whether the respondent can leave the question blank. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question. You can also add special responses to the question using the Design pane.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-12 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

109 Creating questions and responses

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
Specifying the date range
E The Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds indicate the range of values that the respondent can enter. Enter

a date and time, or click on the drop-down list and select a start and end date from the calendar.
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane
E Choose the Design pane. E Check the Include box for the Don’t Know, Refuse, or No Answer responses to add these to the

question.
E If you want to use different text for the response, for example, “Can’t decide” instead of “Don’t know,” type the text in the appropriate Description ﬁeld. E The Go To ﬁeld shows that when the question has been asked, the questionnaire moves to the next

question in the routing list. You can change this so that if the respondent chooses one of the special responses, the questionnaire jumps to a different question. Type in the question name or select it from the drop-down list. Note: When additional response details are deﬁned for the questionnaire, and the questionnaire is then previewed on the Phone tab or activated, the keyboard shortcuts for the additional responses are presented as Ctrl+1, Ctrl+2 or Ctrl+3.

Creating display text
Use Display text when you want to add text to your questionnaire that does not require a response. This can include introductory text for which you do not want to record a response, such as “I’m conducting an interview on coffee-drinking habits. Do you have time to answer a few

110 Chapter 6

questions?” or information for the use of interviewers, such as “Questions for respondents who do not drink coffee.”
Creating display text
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Display Text

or press Ctrl+F10. The new question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.
E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the display text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, Questions for respondents who do not drink coffee.

The display text is now ready for use. However, you may also want to specify additional details. You specify additional details about the question using the Properties pane for the selected question.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-13 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.

111 Creating questions and responses E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.

Creating compound questions
A compound groups a number of questions that share a category list. Compounds are typically used in paper questionnaires, to present a number of separate questions that use the same response list side-by-side on the page.
Creating a new compound
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Compound

or press Alt+I, Q, C.
E Create the questions, and the associated responses, you want to add to the compound. E Select the questions in the Routings or Questions pane using Shift+click or Ctrl+click. E While still in the Routings or Questions pane, drag the selected questions into the newly created

compound. The questions are added to the compound. Adding questions to a newly created compound will clear the question category lists. Even though questions can share the same responses, they should be added to the compound question if there are no shared responses already deﬁned for the compound. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author clears the question elements when they are moved or grouped into a compound.
E The compound has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and

change it to a more meaningful name. Compound names must be unique, cannot be empty, and can contain only letters, numbers, and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a compound description in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. The

description will display at the top of the page.

112 Chapter 6

Notes: Keep the following in mind when creating compound questions: Questions inside the compound should always be empty. A compound question must have responses in order to properly function.
Grouping questions in a compound
E Use Shift+click in the Routings or Questions pane to select all the questions you want to group. E From the menu, choose Group > Group In > Compound

or press Alt+G, G, C. A new Compound item appears in the Routings pane, and the selected questions are moved into the compound.
E The compound has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and

change it to a more meaningful name. Compound names must be unique, cannot be empty, and can contain only letters, numbers, and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a compound description in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. The

description will display at the top of the page.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-14 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.

113 Creating questions and responses E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.

Creating loops to ask the same questions for different subjects
You may want to ask the same group of questions a number of times, for a different subject each time. One way to do this is to use a Loop, which is a container for a set of questions, with options for determining how many times the questions are asked. The questions can be asked: a ﬁxed number of times a number of times based on a list of entered responses a variable number of times, where the number is taken from the response to a numeric question once for each response in a single or multiple response question a number of times based on a shared list of responses. an unspeciﬁed number of times (known as an unbounded loop). For example, suppose that you have a set of questions about vacations, such as, “How long the vacation lasted”, “The number of people in your group”, “Mode of travel”, and you want to ask the questions for a number of vacations that the respondent has taken. You might choose to do this in a number of ways; here are some examples: Decide on a ﬁxed number in advance and ask all respondents to answer the questions this many times. For example, “For each of the last three vacations you took, please say...”. Begin by asking “How many vacations did you take last year?”, then ask the questions once for each vacation that the respondent took. Begin by asking the respondent to select a range of destinations and then ask the question once for each destination selected. You can create a loop and then add questions to it, or you can select existing questions and group them in a loop. Loops can contain any type of question. See also Grid questions.
Notes

The Routings section of the Properties pane allows you to select an interviewing mode for the questionnaire. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types. So if you select Paper Scanning for the interviewing mode, selection of these question types will be automatically disabled. When a loop is not directly in a routing (for example, in an existing block or loop), it is not considered a routing item. In these cases it is not possible to set a loop iterator from within IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. You can achieve similar functionality by creating a script routing item that sets the loop iterator (from within IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional for example).

114 Chapter 6

Creating a new loop
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Loop

or press Alt+I, Q, L.
E Create the questions you want to add to the loop. E Select the questions using Shift+click or Ctrl+click. E While still in the Routings pane, drag the selected questions into the newly created loop. The

questions are added to the loop.
E The loop has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change

it to a more meaningful name. Loop names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a loop description in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. The description

will display at the top of the page.
Grouping existing questions in a loop
E Use Shift+click to select all the questions you want to group. E From the menu, choose Group > Group In > Loop

or press Alt+G, G, L. A new Loop item appears in the Routings pane, and the selected questions are moved into the loop.
E The loop has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change

it to a more meaningful name. Loop names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a loop description in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. The description

will display at the top of the page.
Configuring a numeric iterator for a child loop that is grouped under a parent loop

The following code sample provides an example:
Persons.QuestionFilter = PeopleInHousehold For Each Person in Persons Person.Details.Ask() Person.NumberOfTrips.Ask() Person.Trips.QuestionsFilter = Person.NumberOfTrips Person.Trips.Ask() Next

115 Creating questions and responses

Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-15 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
Setting the number of times to ask the questions in the loop
E To ask the questions in the loop a ﬁxed number of times:

Select the Iterator tab in the Design pane. Select the A ﬁxed number of iterations option, and enter the appropriate number of iterations.

116 Chapter 6 Figure 6-16 Loop repeats five times, specified in Number of iterations field.

The questions in the loop will be shown to all respondents the same number of times (ﬁve times in the above example).
E To ask the questions in the loop based on responses you provide:

Select the Iterator tab in the Design pane. Select the A new set of responses option, and enter the appropriate responses in the Response column that displays.

117 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-17 Loop repeats five times, specified in Number of iterations field.

Note that if you choose a different iteration option after entering your list information, the list information will be lost.
E To base the loop on the number given in response to a numeric question:

Select a numeric question from the Routings pane. In the Properties pane for the numeric question, enter a minimum and maximum value. You are not required to set minimum or maximum values when iterating a numeric; you can leave the maximum value blank to provide ﬂexibility in regards to the quantity of loop iterations based on a numeric response. Select the loop in the Routings pane. Select the Iterator tab in the Design pane. Select the Responses to a previous numeric question option, and select the appropriate numeric question from the drop-down list.

118 Chapter 6 Figure 6-18 Loop repeats based on the response to a numeric question

Each respondent will see the questions in the loop the number of times they enter in response to the numeric question. For example, the respondent in the example below will see the questions twice:
Figure 6-19 Respondent answers “2” to the question “How many vacations did you take last year?” so will see the questions in the loop twice

E To base the loop on the number of responses given to a question:

Select the loop in the Routings pane. Select the Iterator tab in the Design pane. Select the Responses to a previous categorical question option, and select the appropriate categorical question from the drop-down list. Choose All Responses, Chosen, or Not Chosen.

119 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-20 Loop repeats for all selected responses in a multiple response question

Each respondent will see the questions in the loop once for each response that they selected in the question. For example, the respondent in the example below will see the questions four times:
Figure 6-21 Respondent selects “North America, Africa, Europe, Asia” in the question “Which locations did you visit on vacation last year?” so will see the questions in the loop four times

120 Chapter 6

You can also change the text in the questions inside the loop so that each time the question is asked it refers to the correct iteration of the loop. For example, you can change the text to refer to the response that the respondent selected. You do this by using substitution text in the loop description. For more information, see the topic Substituting text in a question in Chapter 9 on p. 219.
Converting a grid to a loop

You can to easily convert a single response, multi response, or numerical grid question into a loop of questions:
E Select a grid from the Routings pane and select the Convert to Loop option from the Edit menu (or

use the Alt+E, L keyboard shortcut). If the conversion is successful, the Routing pane refreshes to display the selected grid as a loop.
Creating an unbounded loop

For more information, see the topic Creating database question loops on p. 134.

Creating blocks of questions
Blocks are used to group questions for presentation or organizational purposes. For example, a block called Demographics might be used to group the demographic questions in a questionnaire. See also Grouping Questions in Pages and Grouping Questions in Sections. Note: The Routings section of the Properties pane allows you to select an interviewing mode for the questionnaire. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types. So if you select Paper - Scanning for the interviewing mode, selection of these question types will be automatically disabled.
Creating a new block
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Block

or press Alt+I, Q, B.
E Create the questions you want to add to the block. E Select the questions using Shift+click or Ctrl+click. E Drag the questions in the Routings pane and drop them on top of the block icon.

The questions are added to the block.
E The block has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change

it to a more meaningful name. Block names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.

121 Creating questions and responses E Optionally, enter a block description in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. The

description will display at the top of the page.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-22 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
Grouping questions in a block
E Use Shift+click to select all the questions you want to group. E From the menu, choose Group > Group In > Block

or press Alt+G, G, B. A new Block item appears in the Routings pane, and the selected questions are moved into the block.
E The block has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change

it to a more meaningful name. Block names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a block description in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. The

description will display at the top of the page.

122 Chapter 6

Creating database questions
Beginning with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author version 6, you can work with hierarchical data in the form of database questions. You can create single response, multiple response, and loop questions whose category lists are generated by connecting to an external database. Keep the following items in mind when working with database questions: Database questions are dependent on the appropriate drivers being installed. For example, a database driver that is available on a client machine may not be available on the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server. You must ensure that the database drivers used to create questions are also available on the server. Databases that are available while working on one network may not be available on another network. You must be aware of the availability of a database when working on multiple networks. The database used to create a database question must be available on the same network as the Interviewer Server. You must ensure that any DSNs they are used to setup the connection strings on the local machines exist and point to the same database or ﬁle on the Interviewer Server. The default error handler for database connections monitors whether the connection string returns any categories. If the question is not required to be answered, the error handler logs the error and the respondent will be automatically advanced to the next question. If the question must be answered, the error handler will present an error to the user and will not let the user continue with the survey. Script writers should be encouraged to write custom scripts to handle these errors. They should check all connections prior to starting the interview, and then ask the respondents to come back when the survey is ready. Translations are not provided for database items. You can create a different set of database questions for each language you want to use. In order to use Microsoft Excel as a data source for database questions you must have a deﬁned range on one worksheet. To deﬁne a range:
Microsoft Excel 2003

– Highlight all data rows and columns in the spreadsheet and select Insert > Name > Deﬁne. This displays the Deﬁne Name dialog where you will enter the name of your highlighted range. Name is the Table Name speciﬁed in the Database Settings dialog. This allows the ODBC driver to interpret the spreadsheet as a data table with column headings. – Click OK to save the named range.
Microsoft Excel 2007

– Highlight all data rows and columns in the spreadsheet and select Formula > Deﬁned Names > Deﬁne Name > Deﬁne Name.... This displays the Deﬁne Name dialog where you will enter the name of your highlighted range. Name is the Table Name speciﬁed in the Database Settings dialog. This allows the ODBC driver to interpret the spreadsheet as a data table with column headings. Refer to Working with database questions from Excel spreadsheets for additional information on working with database questions that are derived from an Excel spreadsheet.

123 Creating questions and responses

Refer to the following topics for more information: Creating single response database questions Creating multiple response database questions Creating database question loops

Creating single response database questions
If you want to create a question with a list of responses from which the respondent must choose one, and whose category lists are generated by connecting to an external database, use a single response database question type. For example: “Which is your favorite type of coffee?”
Creating a single response database question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Database Question > Single Response

or press Alt+I, Q, D, D, G

The Data Link Properties dialog displays, allowing you to provide the appropriate database provider and connection string information.
Refer to Working with database questions from Excel spreadsheets for additional information on working with database questions that are derived from an Excel spreadsheet. After specifying the appropriate data link property information the new single response database question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.

124 Chapter 6 Figure 6-23

E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, What is the main purpose of your current journey? E Manually enter your connection string parameters in the Connection string ﬁeld, or click Edit...

to launch the Data Link Properties dialog. The dialog provides options for selecting a database provider and deﬁning the connection string parameters.

125 Creating questions and responses

Note: When the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author does not provide the Data Link Properties dialog (the dialog can not be used against the connected Interviewer Server). When working with ﬁles opened against an Interviewer Server, you must manually enter the connection string in the Connection string ﬁeld. After entering the appropriate string, click Test to verify whether the connection string will work against the Interviewer Server. Contact your Interviewer Server administrator if you need assistance in constructing a connection string.
E Select the appropriate database table from the Table ﬁeld drop-down menu. The list contains all

tables in the selected database that correspond to the deﬁned connection string.
E Click Preview... to open the Database Table Preview dialog. The dialog allows you to preview

the table structure before actually mapping the database columns. For more information, see the topic Database Table Preview dialog on p. 141.
E Use the Column mapping table to specify which database columns will provide the survey metadata. The list Available items to be mapped depends on whether the item being edited is a loop driver or a response list inside of a categorical question. Map the Available items to the Database columns by selecting the appropriate database columns from each item’s drop-down column list.

Items that are of type String can be mapped to any database table column. Items that are of type Boolean can only be mapped to database table columns that are also Boolean. Items that are of type Numeric can only be mapped to database table columns that are also Numeric.
Table 6-1 Available items

Item Name* Response* Key Code File Analysis value Fixed Exclusive

Data Type String String String String String Boolean Boolean

Database Categorical Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Loops Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No

* - Required ﬁeld E Click Filter... to display the Filters dialog. The dialog allows you to write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database (via the Script tab), or compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter

dialog on p. 142.

126 Chapter 6

Viewing responses

After you have deﬁned the connection string, selected a table, and mapped the columns, you can view the Responses table in the Responses tab. When working with database questions: The data displayed in the table is read-only. The Advanced Category Editor is not available. You cannot assign custom properties to individual database items. You cannot write translator notes for database items.
E Click the Field Chooser button to select which ﬁelds will display in the Responses table. Table 6-2 Available fields

Item Name Response Key Code File Analysis value Factor Fixed Exclusive

Database Categorical Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Loops N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

E Click the Refresh button to view any changes that are made to the database items during the

active Author session.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-24 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

127 Creating questions and responses

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
Specifying response options
E The Response Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which responses are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list, Random to present responses in a random order, Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last response in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present

the responses in alphabetical order.
E Clicking the SQL button displays SQL tab in the Filters dialog, allowing you to compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter dialog

on p. 142.
E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the response list based on the responses to a previous

categorical database question, or by non-database questions. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box.
Filtering database questions by another database question
E In the At box, choose a database question whose answer controls the responses to be displayed for the current question. You are presented with the dialog that asks, Would you like to replace the current connection string for this question with the connection string of {selected question name}?.

If you select Yes, the current connection string is replaced with the selected database question’s connection string. If you select No, the current connection string is retained and the intersection of the two response lists is used as the basis for the ﬁlter options.
Filter selection All Responses Connection string replaced Intersection of Q1 and Q2 Connection string not replaced Q1

128 Chapter 6

Filter selection Chosen Not Chosen Expert Expression

Connection string replaced Intersection of Q1(chosen) and Q2 Intersection of Q1(not chosen) and Q2 User speciﬁed

Connection string not replaced Q1 chosen Q1 not chosen User speciﬁed

When Expert Expression is selected, the At ﬁeld changes to an ellipsis button that, when clicked, opens the Filter dialog. The dialog allows you to write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database (via the Script tab), or compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter dialog on p. 142. When prompted, conﬁrm that the responses deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the response list for the current question.
Filtering database questions by non-database questions
E In the At box, choose a non-database categorical question. The current connection string is not

replaced, and a list of returned responses from the connection string is ﬁltered based on the selected categorical question.
Filter selection All Responses Chosen Not Chosen Expert Expression Q1 is NOT a database question Intersection of Q1 and Q2 Intersection of Q1(chosen) and Q2 Intersection of Q1(not chosen) and Q2 User speciﬁed

Specifying presentation options

You can control how the question will appear in the output format using the presentation options.
E The Number of Rows/Columns ﬁeld controls how responses are arranged for the selected question. If you select rows in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered in rows, split into as many columns as necessary. If you select columns in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered

in columns, split into as many rows as necessary.
E The Presentation ﬁeld allows you to select how the responses are presented for the selected

question. Options include: Check Box, List Box, and Dropdown box.
E The Orientation ﬁeld provides options for displaying responses in rows or columns. Option

include: Default (rows), Columns, and Rows. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.

Creating multiple response database questions
If you want to create a question with a list of responses from which the respondent can choose several, and whose category lists are generated by connecting to an external database, use a multiple response database question type. For example: “Which of these types of coffee have you ever purchased??”

129 Creating questions and responses

Creating a multiple response database question
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Database Question > Multiple Response

or press Alt+I, Q, D, D, P

The Data Link Properties dialog displays, allowing you to provide the appropriate database provider and connection string information.
Refer to Working with database questions from Excel spreadsheets for additional information on working with database questions that are derived from an Excel spreadsheet. After specifying the appropriate data link property information the new multiple response database question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.
Figure 6-25

E The question has an automatically generated name. This is not seen by respondents, but it identiﬁes

the question in the questionnaire ﬁle and it appears as the variable name when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey

130 Chapter 6

Tabulation. Optionally, select the default question name in the Design pane and change it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Enter the question text, as it will be displayed to respondents, in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. For example, What types of transport does your current journey involve? E Manually enter your connection string parameters in the Connection string ﬁeld, or click Edit...

to launch the Data Link Properties dialog. The dialog provides options for selecting a database provider and deﬁning the connection string parameters. Note: When the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author does not provide the Data Link Properties dialog (the dialog can not be used against the connected Interviewer Server). When working with ﬁles opened against an Interviewer Server, you must manually enter the connection string in the Connection string ﬁeld. After entering the appropriate string, click Test to verify whether the connection string will work against the Interviewer Server. Contact your Interviewer Server administrator if you need assistance in constructing a connection string.
E Select the appropriate database table from the Table ﬁeld drop-down menu. The list contains all

tables in the selected database that correspond to the deﬁned connection string.
E Click Preview... to open the Database Table Preview dialog. The dialog allows you to preview

the table structure before actually mapping the database columns. For more information, see the topic Database Table Preview dialog on p. 141.
E Use the Column mapping table to specify which database columns will provide the survey metadata. The list Available items to be mapped depends on whether the item being edited is a loop driver or a response list inside of a categorical question. Map the Available items to the Database columns by selecting the appropriate database columns from each item’s drop-down column list.

Items that are of type String can be mapped to any database table column. Items that are of type Boolean can only be mapped to database table columns that are also Boolean. Items that are of type Numeric can only be mapped to database table columns that are also Numeric.
Table 6-3 Available items

Item Name* Response* Key Code File Analysis value Fixed Exclusive

Data Type String String String String String Boolean Boolean

Database Categorical Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Loops Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No

131 Creating questions and responses * - Required ﬁeld E Click Filter... to display the Filters dialog. The dialog allows you to write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database (via the Script tab), or compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter

dialog on p. 142.
Viewing responses

After you have deﬁned the connection string, selected a table, and mapped the columns, you can view the Responses table in the Responses tab. When working with database questions: The data displayed in the table is read-only. The Advanced Category Editor is not available. You cannot assign custom properties to individual database items. You cannot write translator notes for database items.
E Click the Field Chooser button to select which ﬁelds will display in the Responses table. Table 6-4 Available fields

Item Name Response Key Code File Analysis value Factor Fixed Exclusive

Database Categorical Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Loops N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

E Click the Refresh button to view any changes that are made to the database items during the

active Author session.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-26 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.

132 Chapter 6 E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
E The Response Required check box indicates whether the respondent must answer the question.

Check this box to prevent respondents from proceeding further in an online questionnaire without ﬁlling in a response to the question. This ﬁeld is not available for True/False, Text, and Display Text questions (the ﬁeld setting has no affect on these question types). Note: If you deselect this option for a question that does not contain a No Answer response Author inserts one automatically, so that respondents can choose Next for the question without having to select an answer. This response is not automatically removed if you re-enable Response Required.
E The Hide Question check box indicates whether the question is displayed to the respondent.

Normally, respondents will see all questions, but you can deselect this box for questions that are ﬁlled in automatically by responses to other questions. This ﬁeld is not available when the question is grouped in a Page, Loop, or Block.
E The Grid Variable Name ﬁeld

Specifying number of responses options
E The Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds indicate the number of responses that can be entered for the

question. For questions where a response is required, the minimum is 1.
Specifying response options
E The Response Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which responses are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list, Random to present responses in a random order, Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last response in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present

the responses in alphabetical order.
E Clicking the SQL button displays SQL tab in the Filters dialog, allowing you to compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter dialog

on p. 142.

133 Creating questions and responses E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the response list based on the responses to a previous

categorical database question, or by non-database questions. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box.
Filtering database questions by another database question
E In the At box, choose a database question whose answer controls the responses to be displayed for the current question. You are presented with the dialog that asks, Would you like to replace the current connection string for this question with the connection string of {selected question name}?.

If you select Yes, the current connection string is replaced with the selected database question’s connection string. If you select No, the current connection string is retained and the intersection of the two response lists is used as the basis for the ﬁlter options.
Filter selection All Responses Chosen Not Chosen Expert Expression Connection string replaced Intersection of Q1 and Q2 Intersection of Q1(chosen) and Q2 Intersection of Q1(not chosen) and Q2 User speciﬁed Connection string not replaced Q1 Q1 chosen Q1 not chosen User speciﬁed

When Expert Expression is selected, the At ﬁeld changes to an ellipsis button that, when clicked, opens the Filter dialog. The dialog allows you to write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database (via the Script tab), or compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter dialog on p. 142. When prompted, conﬁrm that the responses deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the response list for the current question.
Filtering database questions by non-database questions
E In the At box, choose a non-database categorical question. The current connection string is not

replaced, and a list of returned responses from the connection string is ﬁltered based on the selected categorical question.
Filter selection All Responses Chosen Not Chosen Expert Expression Q1 is NOT a database question Intersection of Q1 and Q2 Intersection of Q1(chosen) and Q2 Intersection of Q1(not chosen) and Q2 User speciﬁed

Specifying presentation options

You can control how the question will appear in the output format using the presentation options.
E The Number of Rows/Columns ﬁeld controls how responses are arranged for the selected question. If you select rows in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered in rows, split into as many

134 Chapter 6

columns as necessary. If you select columns in the Orientation ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered in columns, split into as many rows as necessary.
E The Presentation ﬁeld allows you to select how the responses are presented for the selected

question. Options include: Check Box, List Box, and Dropdown box.
E The Orientation ﬁeld provides options for displaying responses in rows or columns. Option

include: Default (rows), Columns, and Rows. For more information, see the topic Changing the presentation of a question in Chapter 9 on p. 216.

Creating database question loops
You may want to ask the same group of questions a number of times, for a different subject each time. One way to do this is to use a database questionLoop. A database question loop is a container for a set of questions, whose category lists are generated by connecting to an external database, with options for determining how many times the questions are asked. The questions can be asked: a ﬁxed number of times a number of times based on a list of entered responses a variable number of times, where the number is taken from the response to a numeric question once for each response in a single or multiple response question a number of times based on a shared list of responses. an unspeciﬁed number of times (known as an unbounded loop). For example, suppose that you have a set of questions about vacations, such as, “How long the vacation lasted”, “The number of people in your group”, “Mode of travel”, and you want to ask the questions for a number of vacations that the respondent has taken. You might choose to do this in a number of ways; here are some examples: Decide on a ﬁxed number in advance and ask all respondents to answer the questions this many times. For example, “For each of the last three vacations you took, please say...”. Begin by asking “How many vacations did you take last year?”, then ask the questions once for each vacation that the respondent took. Begin by asking the respondent to select a range of destinations and then ask the question once for each destination selected. You can create a loop and then add questions to it, or you can select existing questions and group them in a loop. Loops can contain any type of question. See also Grid questions.
Notes

The Routings section of the Properties pane allows you to select an interviewing mode for the questionnaire. This controls the supported question types. Paper - Scanning mode does not support True or False, Date/Time, Loop, or Block question types. So if you select Paper -

135 Creating questions and responses Scanning for the interviewing mode, selection of these question types will be automatically

disabled. When a loop is not directly in a routing (for example, in an existing block or loop), it is not considered a routing item. In these cases it is not possible to set a loop iterator from within IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. You can achieve similar functionality by creating a script routing item that sets the loop iterator (from within IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional for example).
Creating a new database question loop
E From the menu, choose Insert > Question > Database Question > Loop

or press Alt+I, Q, D, D, L

The Data Link Properties dialog displays, allowing you to provide the appropriate database provider and connection string information.
Refer to Working with database questions from Excel spreadsheets for additional information on working with database questions that are derived from an Excel spreadsheet. After specifying the appropriate data link property information the new multiple response database question is displayed in the Routings pane and in the Design pane.

136 Chapter 6 Figure 6-27

E The loop has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change

it to a more meaningful name. Loop names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a loop description in the text ﬁeld located beneath the Name ﬁeld. The description

will display at the top of the page.
E Manually enter your connection string parameters in the Connection string ﬁeld, or click Edit...

to launch the Data Link Properties dialog. The dialog provides options for selecting a database provider and deﬁning the connection string parameters. Note: When the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, Author does not provide the Data Link Properties dialog (the dialog can not be used against the connected Interviewer Server). When working with ﬁles opened against an Interviewer Server, you must manually enter the connection string in the Connection string ﬁeld. After entering the appropriate string, click Test to verify whether the connection string will work against the

137 Creating questions and responses

Interviewer Server. Contact your Interviewer Server administrator if you need assistance in constructing a connection string.
E Select the appropriate database table from the Table ﬁeld drop-down menu. The list contains all

tables in the selected database that correspond to the deﬁned connection string.
E Click Preview... to open the Database Table Preview dialog. The dialog allows you to preview

the table structure before actually mapping the database columns. For more information, see the topic Database Table Preview dialog on p. 141.
E Use the Column mapping table to specify which database columns will provide the survey metadata. The list Available items to be mapped depends on whether the item being edited is a loop driver or a response list inside of a categorical question. Map the Available items to the Database columns by selecting the appropriate database columns from each item’s drop-down column list.

Items that are of type String can be mapped to any database table column. Items that are of type Boolean can only be mapped to database table columns that are also Boolean. Items that are of type Numeric can only be mapped to database table columns that are also Numeric.
Table 6-5 Available items

Item Name* Response* Key Code File Analysis value Fixed Exclusive

Data Type String String String String String Boolean Boolean

Database Categorical Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Loops Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No

* - Required ﬁeld E Click Filter... to display the Filters dialog. The dialog allows you to write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database (via the Script tab), or compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter

dialog on p. 142.
Viewing responses

After you have deﬁned the connection string, selected a table, and mapped the columns, you can view the Responses table in the Responses tab. When working with database questions: The data displayed in the table is read-only. The Advanced Category Editor is not available.

138 Chapter 6

You cannot assign custom properties to individual database items. You cannot write translator notes for database items.
E Click the Field Chooser button to select which ﬁelds will display in the Responses table. Table 6-6 Available fields

Item Name Response Key Code File Analysis value Factor Fixed Exclusive

Database Categorical Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Loops N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

E Click the Refresh button to view any changes that are made to the database items during the

active Author session.
Iterator tab

For database question loops, the Iterator tab contains the same response table that displays for categorical database questions (via the Responses tab). Considering that the loop is driven by database data, the Iterator tab does not provide the same conﬁguration options as a regular loop’s Iterator tab. The iteration options are dictated by the database list.
Specifying additional question details in the Properties pane
E On the right of the screen is a task pane that contains several different options. If it is not already

visible, select Properties from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-28 Selecting the Properties pane

A list of properties is displayed for the selected question.
E The Layout Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a layout template to the questionnaire, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

folder containing the template you want to use. For more information, see the topic Applying a style template to an individual question in Chapter 9 on p. 231.
E The Question Template ﬁeld allows you to attach a question template to the question, overriding the template speciﬁed for the questionnaire. Choose the ... button next to the ﬁeld and browse to a

139 Creating questions and responses

folder containing the template you want to use. This ﬁeld is not available for Grid, Compound, Loop, Block, or Multiple Response Database questions.
E The Read Only check box indicates that the question is read only, and no response is required.

Any responses that are deﬁned for the question are disabled.
Specifying response options
E The Response Order ﬁeld indicates the order in which responses are displayed to respondents. Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list, Random to present responses in a random order, Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being ﬁrst in the list, or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last response in the list appears ﬁrst. Alternatively, select Ascending or Descending to present

the responses in alphabetical order.
E Clicking the SQL button displays SQL tab in the Filters dialog, allowing you to compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter dialog

on p. 142.
E The Filter ﬁeld enables you to ﬁlter the response list based on the responses to a previous

categorical database question, or by non-database questions. In the ﬁrst box, choose one of All Responses, Chosen, Not Chosen, or Expert Expression. Selecting Expert Expression allows you to enter an expression ﬁlter in the At box.
Filtering database questions by another database question
E In the At box, choose a database question whose answer controls the responses to be displayed for the current question. You are presented with the dialog that asks, Would you like to replace the current connection string for this question with the connection string of {selected question name}?.

If you select Yes, the current connection string is replaced with the selected database question’s connection string. If you select No, the current connection string is retained and the intersection of the two response lists is used as the basis for the ﬁlter options.
Filter selection All Responses Chosen Not Chosen Expert Expression Connection string replaced Intersection of Q1 and Q2 Intersection of Q1(chosen) and Q2 Intersection of Q1(not chosen) and Q2 User speciﬁed Connection string not replaced Q1 Q1 chosen Q1 not chosen User speciﬁed

When Expert Expression is selected, the At ﬁeld changes to an ellipsis button that, when clicked, opens the Filter dialog. The dialog allows you to write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database (via the Script tab), or compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section. For more information, see the topic Filter dialog on p. 142. When prompted, conﬁrm that the responses deﬁned for the chosen question (the parent question) may overwrite the response list for the current question.

140 Chapter 6

Filtering database questions by non-database questions
E In the At box, choose a non-database categorical question. The current connection string is not

replaced, and a list of returned responses from the connection string is ﬁltered based on the selected categorical question.
Filter selection All Responses Chosen Not Chosen Expert Expression Q1 is NOT a database question Intersection of Q1 and Q2 Intersection of Q1(chosen) and Q2 Intersection of Q1(not chosen) and Q2 User speciﬁed

Working with database questions from Excel spreadsheets
This section provides information on working with database questions that are derived from Excel spreadsheets. Creating database questions from an Excel spreadsheet is similar other database providers. Note: The easiest method for using Excel ﬁles is to store them on a network drive to which the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server will have access. The Excel ﬁle path will likely be the same from the client machine and the Interviewer Server. 1. If you want to reference an Excel ﬁle that is currently on your system, you will need to place the ﬁle in the associated project’s _ﬁles folder. This ensures that the ﬁle will be included with the ﬁles that are uploaded to the Interviewer Server. 2. Insert appropriate database question type (Insert > Question > Database Question). 3. Select the Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers option from the Data Link Properties’ Provider tab.

Refer to Data Link Properties for more information.
4. Select the Excel File option from the Connection tab’s Use data source name ﬁeld (or select the Use connection string option to manually enter a connection string). 5. Navigate to the Excel ﬁle location and select the appropriate Excel ﬁle. 6. Click OK on the Data Link Properties dialog to return to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. 7. The Connection sting ﬁeld will resemble the following example:

Provider=MSDASQL.1;Persist Security Info=0;Extended Properties="DSN=Excel Files;DBQ=C:\Documents and S

8. You will need to manually replace the following highlighted sections with %Project_Directory%:
Provider=MSDASQL.1;Persist Security Info=0;Extended Properties="DSN=Excel Files;DBQ=C:\Documents and Settings\\My Documents\My Surveys\DBDemo\dbDemo_files\excelfile.xls;DefaultDir=C:\Documents and Settings\\My Documents\My Surveys\DBDemo\dbDemo_files;DriverId=790;MaxBufferSize=2048;PageTimeout=5;"

The modiﬁed connection string should resemble the following:

Provider=MSDASQL.1;Persist Security Info=0;Extended Properties="DSN=Excel Files;DBQ=%Project_Directory%\excelfile.xls;DefaultDir=%Project_Directory%;DriverId=790;MaxBufferSize=

141 Creating questions and responses

9. You should now be able to select the appropriate table(s) and further deﬁne the database question.
Notes

The Excel data that you want to use must reside inside of a deﬁned data range in the worksheet. For more information, see the topic Creating database questions on p. 122. If you use MSDASQL.1 as the provider in the connection string, the Excel ODBC DSN must be available on the Interviewer Server, otherwise the connection string will fail with a “no default driver speciﬁed” error. The DSN name on the Interviewer Server must match the name on the client machine.

Database Table Preview dialog
The Database Table Preview dialog allows you to preview the table structure before actually mapping the database columns. The table information presented in the dialog is read-only.
Figure 6-29 Database Table Preview dialog

Table name: Displays the selected table’s name. Number of rows to display: Displays the number of rows to display for the selected table. The default value is 10. You can enter a different value and then click the refresh button to reload the table data.

142 Chapter 6

Filter dialog
The Filter dialog allows you to write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database (via the Script tab), or compose SQL Where clauses in the provided WHERE section.
Figure 6-30 Filter dialog

Depending on whether you are editing from the Routings pane (script) or the Questions pane (metadata), the SQL and Script tabs are available. Only the SQL tab is available when editing from the Questions pane (metadata). You can compose your SQL Where clause in the provided WHERE section. Both the SQL and Script tabs are available when editing from the Routings pane (script). You can write mrScript that can be used to further ﬁlter the response list returned from the database in the Script tab.
Notes

There are some limitations when editing mrScript directly in the Base and Script tabs. The limitations are the result of the In operator, which is not supported when customizing ﬁlter strings. For example, the following string would be blocked by the SQL validation logic:
MakeID in ('Audi', 'BMW')

You could modify the string, by removing the In operator, to something like the following:
MakeID = 'Audi'

or
MakeID = 'BMW'

143 Creating questions and responses

You can provide support for the In operator by turning off database question ﬁlter validation. For example:
Mdmdoc.EnableDBQuestionFilterValidation = false

The property can be changed in Metadata Model Explorer, via the properties list pane, when you select the Document node in the left tree. You can also change the property in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional by adding the following in the metadata section header:
DBQuestionFilterValidation = false

Note that turning off database question ﬁlter validation is not recommended as it may result in SQL injection issues.

Copying question and response text from other applications
You can copy the text of a question from another application (for example, a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or a text editor such as Microsoft Word), and paste it directly into IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. You can also copy and paste the text of one or more responses into a question in Author. Each response must be on a new line of the text editor, or in a separate cell of a table or spreadsheet. Note: Another method of converting the text in Word documents into a questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle is to use IBM® SPSS® Data Collection WordCapture, one of the accessories available with the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model. This is useful if you have large numbers of questions in a Word document. For more information, see the topic Opening Files from Other Products in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author in Chapter 16 on p. 365.
Copying question text from a text editor
E In Author, insert a new question or select an existing question. E In the text ﬁle, Microsoft Word document, or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, select the question text

and press Ctrl+C to copy it to the clipboard.
E In the Design pane in Author, place the cursor in the question text ﬁeld and press Ctrl+V to paste in

the formatted text. Alternatively, you can use the Paste as text keyboard shortcut (Alt+E, S) to paste the unformatted text. Note that if you use Paste as text, and paste into a section that already includes formatting, the pasted text will use the formatting of the section into which it is pasted.
Copying response text from a text editor
E In Author, insert a new question or select an existing question. E In the text ﬁle, Microsoft Word document or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, select the responses

that you want to copy.

144 Chapter 6 Figure 6-31 Selecting responses

E If you are using Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel, you can use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select

individual lines in a document or individual cells containing the responses in a table or spreadsheet.
Figure 6-32 Selecting responses using Ctrl+click

E Press Ctrl+C to copy the responses to the clipboard. E In Author, select the ﬁrst row of the Responses column and choose Edit > Paste

from the menu or press Ctrl+V to paste in all the responses. Alternatively, right-click in the ﬁrst row of the Responses column and choose Paste from the context menu. Note: Do not click in the row twice, as this places the Response row cell in edit mode, which allows you to edit the response text, but does not allow you to copy responses into separate rows. For more information, see the topic Editing responses on p. 146. Author adds the text of each selected response on a separate row, and automatically generates a name for each response based on the response text. If the text contains spaces or other characters that are not valid in names, Author replaces these in the response name (not the description) with the underscore character (_) or another valid character. You can edit the response name in the Name column of the Design pane if required.

145 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-33 Selected responses pasted into Design pane

Copying and pasting multiple rows from Microsoft Excel

When copying row information from Excel into an AuthorDescription ﬁeld, new categories will be created (instead of overwriting existing Description ﬁeld information). When selecting a single text cell, the lines of text are pasted as a single piece of text. When the description cell of a category list is selected, multiple lines are pasted within the selected cell, resulting in multiple line description. This is done because it is not possible to determine whether you want multiple categories, or a multiple line description. If you want to paste multiple categories you must select entire rows when copying from Excel. This is accomplished by clicking the row selectors to the left of the editable cells. Clicking the row selectors causes the entire row to become selected. After clicking the appropriate row selectors and copying the row information, pasting the multiple lines of text in Author will create a new category for each copied row. Note: When the copied selection exceeds the current Category Control row boundaries, new categories are added with IDs that are based on the ﬁrst column of the copied cells.

146 Chapter 6

Editing responses
You can edit response text that you have added to a question, and you can insert new responses, delete responses, and reorder responses in the question. You can also edit responses or subjects that you add to a grid question. If the subjects or responses come from a shared list, you must edit them in the list itself, not in the question. For more information, see the topic Editing a shared list on p. 155.
Editing the text of a response
E In the Routings pane, select a question. E In the Design pane, do one of the following:

double-click the response you want to edit. click once on the response text and then press the F2 key. This selects and highlights all of the response text, placing it in edit mode.
Figure 6-34 Edit mode

E To replace the existing response text with new text, simply type the new text. E To edit the existing text, click again to position the cursor in the response text. You can then use

the left or right arrow keys to move the cursor backwards and forwards through the text of the response, and then type the characters you require or use the Backspace or Delete keys to delete the characters left or right of the cursor.
Figure 6-35 Editing text

E Press Enter to accept the changes in the response or Esc to cancel.

Adding a response
E In the Routings pane, select a question. E In the Design pane, click once on the response above which you want to add the new response.

147 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-36 Selecting a response

E From the menu choose Insert > Response/Subject

Note: The Response/Subject option is not available when the selected response is in edit mode. A new response line appears.
Figure 6-37 Inserting a response

E Type the response text.

Deleting a response
E In the Routings pane, select the question. E In the Design pane, click the response once to select it. To select multiple responses, use

Shift+click or Ctrl+click.
Figure 6-38 Selecting multiple responses using Ctrl+click

E Press the Delete key or choose the Delete button on the toolbar: Figure 6-39 Delete button

Moving a response
E In the Routings pane, select a question. E In the Design pane, click the response once to select it. To move multiple responses, use

Shift+click or Ctrl+click.
E Right-click the selected responses, and choose Cut from the context menu.

148 Chapter 6 E Place the cursor on the response below which you want to place the selected responses and choose

Paste from the context menu. Note: Moving responses in the Design pane changes the order in which the responses are stored in the questionnaire ﬁle. If you want to keep the responses in the same order in the ﬁle but change the way in which they are displayed in the questionnaire, choose an order in the Response Order ﬁeld in the Properties pane for the question.
Editing subjects or responses in grid questions
E In the Routings pane, select the grid question. E In the Design pane, both subjects and responses are available; simply select the items you want to edit. In the Design pane, click either the Advanced Responses Editor button or the Advanced Subjects Editor button.

Button

Description Advanced Responses Editor button. When clicked the Advanced Category Editor displays in Responses mode, allowing you to edit, add, delete and move responses. Advanced Subjects Editor button. When clicked the Advanced Category Editor displays in Subjects mode, allowing you to edit, add, delete and move subjects.

Grouping responses into sub-lists

Similar responses, within a containing response list, can be grouped into separate sub-lists:
E In the Routings pane, select a question. E In the Design pane, select all of the responses that you want to group into a sub-list. E Do one of the following:

Select Group into Sublist from the Group menu. Right-click the selected responses and select Group into Sublist. Use the Alt+G, S keyboard shortcut. The selected responses should now display under the new sub-list SubList.
Figure 6-40 Sub-list

You can rename the sub-list name to a more suitable name.

149 Creating questions and responses

Ungrouping responses from sub-lists
E In the Routings pane, select a question that contains at least one response sub-list. E In the Design pane, select the sub-list from which you want to ungroup responses. E Do one of the following:

Select Ungroup Sublist from the Group menu. Right-click the selected sub-list and select Ungroup Sublist. Use the Alt+G, N keyboard shortcut. The sub-list heading disappears and sub-list responses display as normal responses.
Figure 6-41 Ungrouped Responses

Specifying additional response details in the design pane
Specifying additional response details in the Design pane Single and Multiple Response Questions

By default, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author only displays the Responses ﬁeld in the Design pane for single and multiple response questions. To view the other available ﬁelds, click the Field Chooser icon and select the appropriate ﬁelds from the dialog.
Grid Questions

To view available ﬁelds for responses or subjects, click either the Advanced Responses Editor button or the Advanced Subjects Editor button. In the Advanced Category Editor, click the Field Chooser icon and select the appropriate ﬁelds from the dialog. Note: Numeric grid questions only provide options for the Name, Description, and File columns.
E Choose the Design pane. E The Name ﬁeld displays automatically generated response names for each of the responses you

entered. These are not seen by respondents, but they identify the responses in the questionnaire ﬁle and appear as category names when the results are analyzed in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, click on the default response names and change them to more meaningful names. Names cannot contain spaces.
Tip: Use the up and down arrow keys to move between response names. If the Key Code ﬁeld does

not display, click the Field Chooser icon and select Key Code from the dialog.

150 Chapter 6 E The Responses ﬁeld allows you to enter a description for each question response. When printing

draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E The Key Code ﬁeld allows you to enter a custom keycode for each question response. Author

automatically assigns keycodes to categories for the following question types: Single Response Multiple Response Single Response Grid Multiple Response Grid Entering a custom keycode for a categorical list question allows you to deﬁne the keycodes used for entry rather than using those generated by Author. This custom keycodes remain the same even when categories are ﬁltered. Note: Avoid using keycodes that start with the same characters. You should not deﬁne ambiguous keycodes, especially when one keycode is a part of another keycode. For example:
Q1 "What activities do you like?" {Basketball keycode(1), Football keycode(11)};

For this question, the interviewer’s intention cannot be determined when the 1 key is pressed. Changing the keycodes to the following would result in better results:
Q1 "What activities do you like?" {Basketball keycode(01), Football keycode(11)};

For this question, the interviewer’s intention can be determined because although both keycodes contain 1, the interviewer must press a unique ﬁrst character.
E The Type ﬁeld shows that all responses are single response, which means that the respondent can

select only one of these responses (as you would expect in a single response question). You can, however, change one or more of the responses so that it has a type of Don’t Know, Refuse to Answer, or No Answer. Choose an option from the drop-down list.
E The Go To ﬁeld shows that when the question has been asked, the questionnaire moves to the

next question in the routing list. You can change this so that a particular response causes the questionnaire to jump to a different question. Type in the question name or select it from the drop-down list.
E The Other ﬁeld provides a check box that allows you to specify that a response is to be treated as an

Other specify response, so that respondents can enter additional text when selecting the response.
E The Missing ﬁeld provides as check box that allows you to specify that a response is to be treated

as missing data. For more information, see the topic Setting responses as missing on p. 164.
Formatting responses
E The File ﬁeld allows you to attach a picture ﬁle to each response or subject. For more information,

see the topic Attaching images to responses in Chapter 9 on p. 228.

151 Creating questions and responses

Attaching analysis values to responses
E The Analysis Value ﬁeld allows you to attach values to each response for use when the question

results are analyzed. For more information, see the topic Adding analysis values to responses on p. 164.
E The Factor ﬁeld allows you to attach a factor to each response for use when the question results

are analyzed. For more information, see the topic Adding factors to responses on p. 163.
E The Fixed ﬁeld provides a check box that allows you to specify that a response/subject, or a

group of responses/subjects, is to retain its original position in the response/subject list when the list is sorted, rotated, randomized, or reversed.
E The Exclusive ﬁeld provides a check box that allows you to deﬁne a single-choice category in a

Categorical question. This option is typically used in multiple-response questions to deﬁne a single-choice category such as None of the above.

Creating shared lists of responses
You may want to reuse the same response list in a number of different questions. For example, the questions “Which of these products have you heard of?” and “Which of these products have you bought in the past week?” may have an identical list of products to choose from. To use the same list of responses for both questions you can use a shared list. You can also base the lists of responses and subjects in grid questions on shared lists. If you make a change to a shared list, the change applies to any questions that use the list, with certain exceptions. For more information, see the topic Editing a shared list on p. 155.
Creating a shared list
E From the menu, choose Insert > Shared List > Add New

or press Ctrl+F11. A new list is added to the Shared Lists pane, and the view switches to show the Design pane. The shared list has an automatically generated name. This name is not seen by respondents, but you may want to change it to a more meaningful name to make it easier to ﬁnd when adding it to a question, especially if you create several shared lists.
E If required, select the list name and type a new name. E You can optionally enter a more detailed shared list description in the description ﬁeld immediately below the Name ﬁeld. This information appears in the question, and is useful as a subheading in

cases where you want to add two or more shared lists to a question.
E In the ﬁrst row of the Reponse ﬁeld, type the text of the ﬁrst response. This is the text that will

be displayed to respondents. To save the response and move to a new line, press Enter, or use the down arrow key. Each time you do this, a new row is displayed where you can type the next response.

152 Chapter 6 E As you add responses, The Name ﬁeld displays automatically generated names for each response.

These are not seen by respondents, but they identify the responses in the questionnaire ﬁle and appear as category names when the results are analyzed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation. Optionally, click on the default response names and change them to more meaningful names. Names cannot contain spaces. Note: If the Name ﬁeld does not display, click the Field Chooser icon and select Name from the dialog For more information, see the topic Specifying additional response details in the design pane on p. 149. Note: Try to avoid using the same name between shared lists and their contained responses. For example, when a shared list contains a response named Drink, use a shared list name like DrinkList to avoid any potential conﬂicts.
Using shared lists in Loops
E You can base the number of iterations in a loop on a shared list. For more information, see the

topic Creating loops to ask the same questions for different subjects on p. 113.

Attaching a shared list to a question
Once you have created a shared list of responses, you can attach it to questions that you create.
Attaching a shared list to a question
E In the Routings pane or the Questions pane, select the question to which you want to attach

the shared list.
E Click the Responses ﬁeld header in the Design pane. Ensure that none of the cells in the selected

column are edit mode. or
E Click the Responses ﬁeld header in the Advanced Category Editor. Ensure that none of the cells in

the selected column are edit mode.
E From the menu, choose Insert > Shared List > Use Existing E Select the list that you created. E Alternatively, right-click in a Responses row header and from the context menu choose Insert Shared List, followed by the name of your list.

The list of responses is added to the question.

153 Creating questions and responses

Attaching multiple shared lists to a question
You can add more than one shared list to a question. When you do this, you can choose whether you want to display each list with its own subheading, or combine all the lists in a single list in the questionnaire. To display the lists separately, type the text you want to use as the subheading in the description ﬁeld for the shared list. For example, you may want to use separate lists to subdivide types of coffee into their place of origin:
Figure 6-42 Using two shared lists with subheadings

If you do not use subheadings, the responses in all the shared lists are displayed as a single list:
Figure 6-43 Using two shared lists with no subheadings

Changing the response order when using multiple shared lists

If you change the response order for a question that uses shared lists, the ordering depends on whether or not the list has a subheading. If it has a subheading, the responses in the list are kept in their original order and only the subheadings are reordered within the question. The following example shows this using the America and Africa shared lists with subheadings, sorted in ascending order. The lists have been placed in ascending alphabetical order but the responses within the lists retain their original order.

154 Chapter 6 Figure 6-44 Using two shared lists with subheadings, sorted

If there are no subheadings, the responses in the question are treated as a single list. The following example uses the same lists without subheadings. The responses are sorted in ascending alphabetical order, regardless of which list they come from.
Figure 6-45 Using two shared lists without subheadings, sorted

If you want to use subheadings in a shared list in one question but not in another question, leave the description ﬁeld blank when you create the shared list. When you add the shared list to the question where you want to display subheadings, type the required subheading in the Description ﬁeld next to the shared list name for that question.

155 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-46 Entering a description for a shared list in the question

Editing a shared list
You can edit the text of responses that you have added to a shared list, and you can insert new responses, delete responses, and reorder responses in the list. The changes that you make apply automatically to all questions that use the list. You cannot edit a shared list in a question that uses the list. The only change you can make to shared responses once they have been inserted in a question is to change the question to go to when the respondent chooses a response for that question. This change applies to the selected question and does not affect any other questions in which the shared list is used.
Editing the text of a response
E In the Shared Lists pane, select the list. E In the Design pane, do one of the following:

double-click the response you want to edit. click once on the response text and then press the F2 key. This selects and highlights all of the response text, placing it in edit mode.
Figure 6-47 Edit mode

E To replace the existing response text with new text, simply type the new text. E To edit the existing text, click again to position the cursor in the response text. You can then use

the left or right arrow keys to move the cursor backwards and forwards through the text of the response, and then type the characters you require or use the Backspace or Delete keys to delete the characters left or right of the cursor.

156 Chapter 6 Figure 6-48 Editing text

E Press Enter to accept the changes in the response or Esc to cancel.

Adding a response
E In the Shared Lists pane, select the list. E In the Design pane, click once on the response above where you want to add the new response. Figure 6-49 Selecting a response

E From the menu choose Insert > Response/Subject

A new response line appears.
Figure 6-50 Inserting a response

E Type the response text.

Deleting a response
E In the Shared Lists pane, select the list. E In the Design pane, click the response once to select it. To select multiple responses, use

Shift+click or Ctrl+click.
Figure 6-51 Selecting multiple responses using Ctrl+click

157 Creating questions and responses E Press the Delete key or choose the Delete button on the toolbar: Figure 6-52 Delete button

Moving a response
E In the Shared Lists pane, select the list. E In the Design pane, click the response once to select it. To move multiple responses, use

Shift+click or Ctrl+click.
E Right-click the selected responses, and choose Cut from the context menu. E Place the cursor on the response below which you want to move the cut responses and choose

Paste from the context menu. Note: Moving responses in the Design pane changes the order in which the responses are stored in the questionnaire ﬁle. If you want to keep the responses in the same order in the ﬁle but change the way in which they are displayed in the questionnaire, choose an order in the Response Order ﬁeld in the Properties pane for the question that uses the shared list. Your changes are applied to all questions that use the shared list when you click away from the list.
Changing the response order

The following steps explain the process of changing the response order for categorical responses that are added via a shared list:
E Select a question, whose responses are generated from a shared list, and display it in the Design

pane.
E Select the shared list response and click Advanced, located near the bottom of the Design pane.

This launches the Advanced Category Editor.
E In the Advanced Category Editor, select View > Advanced Properties to display the Advanced

Properties pane.
E In the Advanced Properties pane, click Response Order and select the appropriate response order

for the selected shared list.
E Click Close when ﬁnished.

Converting existing responses to a shared list
If you have already created a question with a list of responses and you want to use the response list in another question, you can convert the responses in the original question to a shared list.

158 Chapter 6

Converting a response list to a shared list
E In the Routings pane or the Questions pane, select the question containing the list of responses. E In the Design pane, right-click on the response list, and from the context menu, choose Convert All to Shared List.

The entire list of responses is converted to a shared list. The original question continues to use the shared list, and you can now attach the list to other questions.
Converting selected responses to a shared list
E In the Routings pane or the Questions pane, select the question containing the list of responses. E In the Design pane, use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select the responses that you want to include in

the shared list.
E Right-click on the response list, and from the context menu, choose Convert Selected to Shared List.

The selected list of responses is converted to a shared list. The original question continues to use the shared list, and you can now attach the list to other questions.

Deleting a shared list
If you have attached a shared list to a question, you can delete the list from that question without deleting it from the questionnaire ﬁle. You can also delete a shared list from the questionnaire ﬁle.
Deleting a shared list from a question
E In the Routings pane, select the question containing the shared list. E In the Design pane, select the list in the Responses ﬁeld (or the Name ﬁeld). E Press the Delete key or choose the Delete button on the toolbar: Figure 6-53 Delete button

The list is deleted from the selected question, but remains in the questionnaire ﬁle and in any other questions that use the list.
Deleting a shared list from the questionnaire file
E In the Shared Lists pane, select the list name. E Press the Delete key or choose the Delete button on the toolbar: Figure 6-54 Delete button

159 Creating questions and responses

The list is deleted from the questionnaire ﬁle, and from any questions that use the list.

Adding notes to a questionnaire
You can add notes to a questionnaire to record information that you do not want to appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire. For example, you could add a note to indicate that one of the questions is only a draft and further information is required to complete it. The text of individual notes appears in the Design pane in the order in which the note appears in the routing.
Adding a note
E Select the Routings pane. E Select the question or item after which you want to place the note. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Note

or press Alt+I, R, N.
E A new note is created, with a default name. If required, select the name and change it to a more

meaningful one.
E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the note, if desired. When printing draft

paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E Type the text of the note in the description ﬁeld. E To create additional notes, repeat the above steps. Each note is created with a unique name.

Deleting a note
E Select the note in the Routings pane. E Press the Delete key, or choose the Delete button on the toolbar: Figure 6-55 Delete button

Creating a “Total Awareness” question
Surveys and market research questionnaires often ask respondents to name any items (for example, brands of a product) that they can remember, and then look at a list of items and say which ones they recognize from the list. The ﬁrst question is known as a spontaneous awareness question and the second is known as a prompted awareness question.

160 Chapter 6

It is often useful to create a “total awareness” question that combines the responses to the two questions for use during analysis. This can be used both in the questionnaire (for example, to ask a further set of questions for each brand that the respondent is aware of) and during analysis of the results. Note: As the spontaneous awareness question is intended to ﬁnd out what the respondent remembers without seeing the list of responses, this type of question is most suitable for questionnaires in an output format such as telephone interviewing or computer assisted personal interviewing, where the respondent is asked the question by an interviewer, rather than for a self-administered web interview.
Creating a total awareness question

The following example sets up a total awareness question based on the responses given to a spontaneous awareness and a prompted awareness question. It then adds a further set of questions in a loop, using the responses in the total awareness question to determine how many times to ask the questions in the loop. This example makes use of a number of features, including: Single response and multiple response questions. Shared lists. See Creating shared lists of responses and Attaching a shared list to a question for more information. A script that deﬁnes the content of the total awareness question. For further information on adding scripts to your questionnaires, see Adding Scripts. Loops based on the responses in a multiple response question. For more information, see the topic Creating loops to ask the same questions for different subjects on p. 113. Substitution text in the text of the questions in the loop. For more information, see the topic Substituting text in a question in Chapter 9 on p. 219. Questionnaire previews. For more information, see the topic Previewing questionnaires in Chapter 10 on p. 235.
Creating spontaneous, prompted, and total awareness questions
E Create a multiple response question (press Ctrl+F2) and change the name to Spontaneous. In the

description ﬁeld, enter Please list the types of coffee that you buy. Leave the response list blank.
E Create a second multiple response question called Prompted. Enter the question text: Which of the

coffees on this list have you ever purchased? Leave the response list blank.
E Create a third multiple response question called TotalAwareness. This question will not be displayed to respondents, so check the Hide Question box in the Properties pane. You do not

161 Creating questions and responses

need to add any text for this question, but you can use the question text to add a description of the question. Leave the response list blank. Note: Another method of creating a question, that is not displayed to respondents, is to add the question in the Questions pane, rather than the Routings pane. For more information, see the topic The Routings Pane and the Questions Pane in Chapter 7 on p. 171.
E Create a shared list (press Ctrl+F11) and name it CoffeeList. Enter a list of coffee types:

Costa Rican Columbian Java Italian Blend Brazilian
E Attach the shared list to all three questions. E In the Properties pane for the Prompted question, select Not Chosen from the Filter ﬁeld drop-down list, and select Spontaneous from the At ﬁeld drop-down list, then click OK at the

prompt. This means that any responses selected in the spontaneous question will not be shown again when this question is asked.
Setting the content of the Total Awareness question
E After the TotalAwareness question, insert a script item by choosing Insert > Routing Item > Script Item

from the menu, and name it SetTotalAwareness.
E In the Enter Script Here ﬁeld, type the following script to deﬁne the content of the total awareness

question:
TotalAwareness = Spontaneous + Prompted

Creating questions in a loop

The next stage is to add some questions that will be asked in a loop, once for each response in the TotalAwarenessely question.
E After the ﬁnal item in the Routings pane add a single response question (press Ctrl+F1) and name

it Frequency. Leave the question text blank for now, and add the responses: Often Occasionally Only once

162 Chapter 6 E Add a single response question called Cost. Leave the question text blank for now, and add

the responses: Yes No Not sure
E Select the Frequency and Cost questions and choose Group > Group In > Loop

from the menu.
E Change the name of the loop to BuyingHabits. E In the Design pane for the loop, select the Iterator tab located at the bottom of the pane, then select Responses to a previous categorical question, select TotalAwareness from the drop-down

list, and select Selected responses.
Figure 6-56 Buying Habits loop

163 Creating questions and responses E Expand the BuyingHabits loop and select the Frequency question. In the description ﬁled, enter

the following text exactly as shown: How often do you buy {@BuyingHabits}? The text inside the curly braces substitutes the relevant response each time the BuyingHabits loop is asked.
E Now select the Cost question, and in the description ﬁeld, enter the following text exactly as

shown: Would you still buy {@BuyingHabits} if it was more expensive?
E Preview the interview (press Ctrl+I). You will see that the ﬁrst question contains all the responses

in the shared list, but the second question omits any responses that you select in the ﬁrst question. The total awareness question does not appear. The two questions in the loop appear once for each response in the total awareness question (that is, each response selected in either of the ﬁrst two questions) and the question text changes each time the question is asked to include the appropriate response text.
Figure 6-57 Loop questions showing the text for a response taken from the TotalAwareness question

Adding factors to responses
You can add factors to each response in a single or multiple response question (including grid questions). A factor is a constant numerical value that can be used when the questionnaire results are analyzed in other applications, for example, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Tabulation or IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter.
Adding factors
E Select the question to which you want to attach the factors. E Choose the Design pane. E If the Factor ﬁeld is not displayed, click the Field Chooser icon and select Factor from the dialog. E In the Factor ﬁeld, enter a factor for each response. Factors are typically numeric, and can be

either whole numbers or decimals. However, you can also deﬁne factors as string values.

164 Chapter 6

Factor format rules

The application will automatically convert factor values as follows: Convert numeric character to a long if the value allows it. Convert decimal and numeric character to a double if the value allows it. Convert non-numeric characters to a string. If the string value is a double-quoted numeric type (“123” or “123.4”), the value is saved it without the quotes.
Table 6-7 Factor formats

Entered value abc 123 123.4 “abc” “123”

Created factor factor(“abc”) factor(123) factor(123.4) factor(“”abc””) factor(“123”)

Adding analysis values to responses
You can assign a code to each response in a categorical question, so that the code is available instead of the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection value when the questionnaire results are analyzed using other applications, for example, IBM® SPSS® Statistics.
Adding analysis values
E Select the question to which you want to add the analysis values. E Choose the Design pane. E If the Analysis Value ﬁeld is not displayed, click the Field Chooser icon and select Analysis Value

from the dialog.
E Type an analysis value for each response in the question.

Setting responses as missing
You can set responses in a Single Response, Multiple Response, or Compound question to be treated as missing data. This is useful when analyzing questionnaire results in other applications such as IBM® SPSS® Statistics.
Setting responses as missing
E Select the question for which you want to set responses as missing. E Choose the Design pane. E If the Missing ﬁeld is not displayed, click the Field Chooser icon and select Missing from the dialog. E In the Missing ﬁeld, select the box for every response you want to treat as missing data.

165 Creating questions and responses

Protecting questions
You can protect individual questions from being edited by other users when you create the custom property, IsProtected. The property is set within a selected question’s Custom Properties tab in the Details pane. Once in place, only users with the role of Can edit protected questions (as deﬁned in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration’s User Administration activity) can modify the protected question labels and/or properties when working in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition or when connected to a Data Collection server from Author. You will need to manually set the IsProtected property for each question that you want to protect; the custom property does not govern an entire routing or .MDD ﬁle. Note: Refer to the “User Administration” section in the Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for more information on working with roles.
Protecting a question
E Select the appropriate question from the Routings or Questions pane. E Display the question’s Custom Properties tab in the Design pane. Refer to Design pane for

information on working with Design pane tabs.
E Enter IsProtected in an empty Name ﬁeld. E Enter a value of True in the Value ﬁeld. E Enter a value of Authoring in the Context ﬁeld.

Unprotecting a question
E Select a currently protected question from the Routings or Questions pane. E Display the question’s Custom Properties tab in the Design pane. Refer to Design pane for

information on working with Design pane tabs.
E Enter a value of False for the IsProtected custom property.

Inserting questions from the library
You can quickly add questions to your questionnaire by selecting a ﬁle containing a suitable question from the library of questions provided with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author and inserting it into your questionnaire. This copies the content of the selected ﬁle and pastes it into your questionnaire ﬁle. You can then edit it as required. There is no link between the content of the question in the source ﬁle and that in your questionnaire ﬁle, so changes made in one ﬁle after you insert the question do not affect the other. Note: If the library ﬁle contains more than one language, you can select the language to insert. For more information, see the topic Insert Library Item dialog box on p. 167. If the library ﬁle contains more than one routing, the ﬁrst routing in the ﬁle is inserted automatically, and any other routings are ignored. For further information on routings, see Changing the Questionnaire Order.

166 Chapter 6

Inserting a question from the library
E In the Routings pane, select the question after which you want to insert the library question. E If it is not visible, display the Library pane: Figure 6-58 Selecting the Library pane

E In the Library pane, locate the ﬁle you want to use: Figure 6-59 Inserting a question from the library

E From the menu, choose Insert > From Library

or press Alt+I, L, or choose the Insert button on the Library pane. Alternatively, you can drag the question from the Library pane and drop it in the location in the Routings pane where you want to place the question.
E If the library ﬁle is in a different default language than your questionnaire ﬁle, the Insert Library

Item dialog box appears, explaining that the question will be inserted into the default language context in your ﬁle.
E Some library ﬁles include questionnaire wizards to help tailor the question to your needs. If the

library ﬁle includes a wizard, follow the on-screen instructions to ﬁll in the required information. Note: You must ﬁrst save the open document before working with the questionnaire wizard. Saving the document ensures that the working folder is properly deﬁned. The contents of the .mddﬁle in the library, including questions and routing information, are copied into your questionnaire ﬁle and displayed after the selected question. If required, you can edit them to tailor them for use in the new questionnaire. Note: If the library ﬁle includes templates, Author copies the template ﬁles to a subfolder with the name FileName_ﬁles beneath the folder containing the questionnaire .mdd ﬁle, where FileName is the name of the .mdd ﬁle. If the template uses additional ﬁles or subfolders, these

167 Creating questions and responses

are also copied into the subfolder. For more information, see the topic Using style templates in Chapter 9 on p. 229.

Insert Library Item dialog box
The Insert Library Item dialog box appears when you add a question from the library to a questionnaire that does not use the same language, or when there are multiple languages in the library ﬁle. You can add only one language from the library ﬁle. The texts are added to the currently selected language context in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author questionnaire ﬁle. If the ﬁle from the library contains a single language, that does not match the language context selected for the questionnaire ﬁle in Author, you can either: Choose OK to add the questions from the library ﬁle into the questionnaire ﬁle. The question text will be added into the currently selected language context, even though they do not match. Choose Cancel to cancel the insert. You can then select the matching language context in your questionnaire from the languages drop-down list on the toolbar. If the matching language does not exist in your questionnaire, you can add the language using the Manage Languages and Contexts Dialog Box, select it, and then add the question from the library. If the ﬁle from the library contains multiple languages, you can either: Select a language from the drop-down list that matches the selected language context in your questionnaire ﬁle. The question text from the language you select will be added into the currently selected language context. Choose Cancel to cancel the insert. You can then use the select languages drop-down list to select a language from the languages dialog box that matches one of the languages in the library ﬁle. If the matching language does not exist in your questionnaire, you can add the language using the Manage Languages and Contexts Dialog Box, select it, add the question from the library, and then select the matching language.

Saving questions or questionnaires to the library
You can save your own questions, sections of questionnaires, or whole questionnaires to the Library for reuse in other questionnaires.
Saving a question to the library
E Create a new questionnaire ﬁle. E Create the question or questions that you want to add to the Library. If you want to be able to

select the questions individually, you need to create each of them in a separate ﬁle. If you always want to add them all together, you can add multiple questions to the same ﬁle.
E From the menu, choose File > Save

168 Chapter 6 E Navigate to the folder containing the Library ﬁles. By default, this is located in a subfolder of

the Documents and Settings folder on your hard drive. The exact location of the ﬁle on your machine is displayed in the Options dialog box.
E Use the Create New Folder button to add a subfolder beneath the Questions folder to contain your

questions, and give it a suitable name (if required, you can add other subfolders beneath the Questions folder or within your new subfolder to save questions of different types).
E Enter a name for the questionnaire ﬁle. E Choose Save. The ﬁle is saved in the Questionnaire Library.

Using a question template
You can quickly format questions in your questionnaire by applying a question template provided with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. After applying a question template from the Library, you can then edit the question as required.
Inserting a new question template from the library
E In the Routings pane, select the routing in which you want to insert the question. E If the Library pane is not showing, display it: Figure 6-60 Selecting the Library pane

E Expand the Questions/Question Types folder in the Library pane, and locate the question template

.mdd ﬁle you want to use. The following question templates and their associated ﬁles are installed with Author. You can also create your own custom question templates for reuse and sharing with others.
Calendar Question. Select this question template to insert a Date/Time question containing a

button that launches a special calendar tool to allow the respondent to select a date, as seen below. The default title is “Birthday” and the default question text is “What is your birthday?” Modify the title and question text as desired.

169 Creating questions and responses Figure 6-61 Calendar tool

Change Language. Select this question template to add a question to every page that allows the

respondent to change the language for the interview.
Change Text Size Question on Every Page. Select this question template to add a question to

every page that allows the respondent to decrease or increase the text size.
Click Image to Proceed. Select this question template to create a question where the respondent

can click on an image to proceed.
Constant Sum. Select this question template to create a constant sum question. Format Grid. Select this question template to set up default styles for the grids in your

questionnaire.
Page Header. Select this question template to create and add a page header. Ranking. Select this question template to create a ranking question. Slider Question. Select this question template to insert a Numeric question containing a special

sliding number selection tool to allow the respondent to select an answer, as seen below. The default title is “Coffee” and the default question text is “How many cups of coffee do you drink in an average day?” Modify the title and question text as desired.
Figure 6-62 Slider tool

Split a Large Grid. Select this question template to create a script to split a grid across several

pages.
Substitute from Participant Record. Select this question template to substitute data from a

participant record into the question text.
Write to Participant Record. Select this question template to write the response to a question to

a participant record.

170 Chapter 6 E From the menu, choose Insert > From Library

or press Alt+I, L, or click Insert in the Library pane. Alternatively, you can drag the question template from the Library pane and drop it in the location in the Routings pane where you want to place the question.
E The question template is inserted into the questionnaire. See the results by previewing the question

or previewing the entire questionnaire.
Applying a question template to an existing question

You can also apply the Calendar or Slider question template to an existing question in your questionnaire. This inserts the calendar tool or sliding number selection tool into your question response.
E Select the question you want to apply the template to. Supported question types for question

templates are Single Response, Multiple Response, True or False, Numeric, Text, Date/Time, and Display Text.
E If the Properties pane is not showing, display it: Figure 6-63 Selecting the Properties pane

The Question section is displayed in the Properties pane.
E Click the ... button beside the Question Template ﬁeld. E Browse to the location of the template ﬁle you want to use. By default, question templates are

stored in the Documents and Settings\All Users folder (for example, C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Author\Library\Questions\Question Types). Select Calendar.htm, Slider.htm, or a custom template ﬁle you created, and click Open.
E The question template is applied to the question you selected. See the results by previewing the

question.

Chapter

Changing the Questionnaire Order

7

When you create questions in the Routings pane, they are automatically added to a routing. A routing is a list of all the questions in the order in which they will appear in the questionnaire, together with additional instructions to skip questions, end the interview prematurely, and control the sequence of questions asked. A single default routing called NewRouting is created whenever you create a new questionnaire ﬁle, and all questions that you create in the Routings pane are automatically added to this routing. You will probably want to rename the default routing to identify the output format. The standard routing names used in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection products are: Web (for online interviews) CATI (for telephone interviews) Paper (for interviews in paper format) However, you do not have to use these names, but can give your routings any valid name. You can add multiple routings to the questionnaire ﬁle. For example, you may want the questionnaire to be published both online and as a paper survey. You can use the same questionnaire ﬁle for both versions by creating two routings, Web_Survey and Paper_Survey, and adding the same or different questions to each routing. You can also add questions to the questionnaire ﬁle without adding them to a routing. This means that the question exists in the questionnaire ﬁle but does not appear in the questionnaire. It is useful if you want to calculate the results to a question automatically using the responses to another question that does appear. You can also move questions around within and between routings, and you can group questions into pages or sections and add instructions to change the routing order, for example, by jumping to different questions or terminating the interview early.

The Routings Pane and the Questions Pane
When you add new questions or routing items in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author, they appear in the Design pane (individually) in the central area of the window and also in the Routings pane on the left of the screen. The Routings pane displays a list of all the questions and routing items as you add them. When you add a question with the Routings pane selected, the question is automatically added not just to the questionnaire ﬁle but to a list of questions that appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire. Author creates a default routing when you create a questionnaire ﬁle, and automatically adds all the questions that you create to this routing. If you create more than one routing (see Adding Routings), you can select the routing to which you want to add the question. In addition to the Routings pane, any questions that you add are also automatically added to the Questions pane (this applies to all items in the Question submenu on the Insert menu). The Questions pane contains a list of all the questions in the questionnaire ﬁle, whether or not
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 171

172 Chapter 7

they appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire. You can also add questions directly in the Questions pane. When you add a question in the Questions pane, it is added to the questionnaire ﬁle but it is not automatically added to a routing. This means that the question will not appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire. Routing items (any items in the Routing Item submenu on the Insert menu) are not added to the Questions pane. As it is likely that you will want most of the questions that you add to appear in the ﬁnished questionnaire, the Routings pane is displayed and the Questions pane is hidden when you ﬁrst use Author. This means that all the questions you add are also added to the questionnaire, which is usually what you want to happen. However, in some cases, you may want to add questions to the questionnaire ﬁle that are not asked as part of the questionnaire (for example, you may want to create a question for which the results are calculated automatically based on the answers to another question, so you do not need to display the calculated question in the questionnaire). In this case, you can either add the question in the Routings pane and then check the Hide Question check box, or you can add the question using the Questions pane.
To add questions or routing items using the Routings pane
E Ensure that the Routings pane is selected. E If more than one routing exists, place the cursor in the speciﬁed routing, then insert the question

or routing item.
To add questions using the Questions pane
E If it is not visible, display the Questions pane by choosing View > Questions

from the menu or pressing Alt+V, Q.
E Click anywhere in the Questions pane to select it, then insert the question.

When you are working with the Questions pane displayed, remember that the questions are not automatically added to a routing. For this reason, you may want to close the Questions pane when you are not using it, so that you do not accidentally add questions with this pane selected instead of the Routings pane. Unless otherwise stated, the instructions for adding questions and routing items throughout this help ﬁle use the Routings pane for adding questions.
To add a question from the Questions pane to the Routings pane

If you have created a question in the Questions pane and want to add it to the Routings pane, you can do this by dragging and dropping it. To do this, you can drag the question from the Questions tab and drop it in the appropriate location on the Routings tab. See Changing the layout of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window for information on how to arrange panes in the window. If the question already exists, it is added again with a new name based on the existing name. The Properties pane also indicates the question that it is based on. Only one version of the copied question exists in the Questions pane.

173 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Adding Routings
You can output your questionnaires in different formats. For example, you may want to create a questionnaire for use both online and in paper format, with similar questions but with some changes for the different output formats. You can do this by creating multiple routings in your questionnaire ﬁle, and using the same questions in two or more routings.
To add a routing
E From the menu, choose Insert > New Routing

or press Alt+I, O.
E A new routing is created with a default name. Change this to reﬂect the type of routing (for

example, Web_Survey or Paper_Survey).
E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the routing, if desired. When printing

draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E Add the questions that you want to appear in the new routing by copying them from the existing

routing.

Copying Routings
You can copy speciﬁc routing information from an existing routing to a new routing by: Right-clicking an existing routing name, from the Routings pane, and selecting Copy Routing from the menu. Clicking Copy Routing from the Shortcuts pane.

174 Chapter 7

The Copy Routing windows displays:
Figure 7-1 Copy Routing Window

E Enter an appropriate name for the new routing, or keep the default name. The default name displays

as Copy_of_RoutingName, where RoutingName is the name of the original, source routing.
E Select the appropriate elements from the existing routing and add them to the new routing by clicking Add >>>. You can add all elements by simply clicking Add All. E If required, you can use Routing Item > Section

or press Alt+I, R, C.
E Create the questions you want to add to the section. E Select the questions using Shift+click or Ctrl+click. E Drag the questions in the Routings pane and drop them on top of the section icon.

The questions are added to the section.
E The section has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change

it to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
To group existing questions in a section
E Use Shift+click to select all the questions you want to group. E From the menu, choose Group > Group In > Section

or press Alt+G, G, S.

181 Changing the Questionnaire Order

A new Section item appears in the Routings pane, and the selected questions are moved into the section.
E The section has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change

it to a more meaningful name. Section names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.

Grouping Questions in Pages
You can group a number of consecutive questions in a page. The grouped questions all appear on a single web page in an online questionnaire (this is sometimes known as a multiask). Note: Grouping questions in a page has no effect on paper questionnaires. To deﬁne a page in a paper questionnaire you need to insert page breaks before and after the questions you want to include on the page using IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper. For more information, see the topic Opening Questionnaires in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper in Chapter 16 on p. 368.
To create a new page
E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Page

or press Alt+I, R, P.
E Create the questions you want to add to the page. E Select the questions using Shift+click or Ctrl+click. E Drag the questions in the Routings pane and drop them on top of the page icon.

The questions are added to the page.
E The page has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change it

to a more meaningful name. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a description of the page in the description ﬁeld. This appears at the top of

the page.
To group existing questions in a page
E Use Shift+click to select all the questions you want to group. E From the menu, choose Group > Group In > Page

or press Alt+G, G, P. A new Page item appears in the Routings pane, and the selected questions are moved into the page.

182 Chapter 7 E The page has an automatically generated name. Optionally, select the default name and change it

to a more meaningful name. Page names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Optionally, enter a description of the page in the description ﬁeld. This appears at the top of

the page.

Ungrouping Questions
You can ungroup any questions that you have grouped in a loop, page, or section. This deletes the group item and moves the questions up one level in the routing list. Any settings associated with the group item, for example, the loop driver, are also removed. You can also ungroup one or more of the questions in a group without deleting the group item, by cutting the questions from the group and pasting them elsewhere in the Routings pane.

To ungroup questions by deleting the group
E In the Routings pane, select the group item that you want to delete. E From the menu, choose Group > Ungroup

or press Alt+G, U.

To ungroup questions without deleting the group
E In the Routings pane, expand the group item to display the questions. E Use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select the questions you want to remove from the group. E From the menu, choose Edit > Cut

or press Ctrl+X.
E Position the cursor outside the group, and choose Edit > Paste

or press Ctrl+V. The selected questions are moved out of the group.

183 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Adding a Jump to Another Question
You can add an instruction to a questionnaire so that the next step is to jump to a particular question. You can do this either for all respondents who reach a particular point in the questionnaire, or for respondents who meet certain criteria. To jump to another question, use one of the following routing items:
Go to: Use a Go to routing item in a questionnaire that has many sections, where each respondent

answers the questions in one section plus a general demographic section. To ensure that each respondent skips the unwanted sections and reaches the demographic section, you could end each section with a Go to item that takes the respondent straight to the start of the demographic section. You can also deﬁne Go to conditions for special responses (don’t know, refuse to answer, and no answer for example).For more information, see the topic Go To Routing Item on p. 183.
If ... Go to: Use an If...Go to routing item to deﬁne routing for some respondents but not others. Specify the respondents to which the condition applies by listing responses (including special responses) that they must have given to previous questions. For example, to create a condition that applies to women, you might say that the response to the Gender question must be Female. The questions and answers that control a conditional jump are commonly called the routing condition because they deﬁne the conditions under which the jump will be followed. For more information, see the topic If Go To Routing Item on p. 184.

Note: The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the Go to or If... Go to, if desired. When printing draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.

Go To Routing Item
Use the Go To routing item to add a jump to a question other than the next one in the routing.
To add a Go To routing item
E In the Routings pane, select the question after which you want to add a Go To item. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Go To

or press Alt+I, R, G.
E The item has an automatically generated name. If required, select the item name and replace it

with a more meaningful one. This is useful if you add several Go To items to your questionnaire.
E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the routing item, if desired. When

printing draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E Select the question that you want to jump to from the drop-down list.

184 Chapter 7

To change the destination of a Go To item

If you add a Go To item before creating any questions, or you want to change the destination after adding the item, you can do this in the Properties pane.
E Select the Go To item in the Routings pane. E In the Properties pane, select the question that you want to use as the new destination from the Go To drop-down list.

If Go To Routing Item
Use the If Go To routing item to add a conditional jump to a question other than the next one in the routing. You can deﬁne one or more conditions and link them using And or Or operators. When you add an If... Go To statement, the statement is activated if the responses meet the conditions. If the result is true, the questionnaire jumps to the speciﬁed question. If it is false, the questionnaire goes to the next item in the Routings pane.
To add an If... Go To routing item
E In the Routings pane, select the question after which you want to place the If... Go To item. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > If .. Go To

or press Alt+I, R, I.
E The item has an automatically generated name. If required, select the item name and replace it with

a more meaningful one. This is useful if you add several If... Go To items to your questionnaire.
E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the routing item, if desired. When

printing draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E Click the Add button on the Logic tab of the If... Go To item. E In the resulting If... Go To dialog, select one or more questions from the Routings pane or the

Questions pane to use as the condition(s) for the If... Go To item, then click the Add button.
E Specify the conditions for the selected questions. E If required, create script ﬁlters for the conditions. Script ﬁlters allow you to deﬁne expressions that

cannot be directly parsed for IfBlock, If Go To, and Skip-and-Fill items. For more information, see the topic Adding Script Filters on p. 196.
E Select a question or routing item from the Then go to drop-down list to jump to if the conditions

are met. As an alternative to the If... Go To dialog, you can select questions to use as conditions from the Routings pane or the Questions pane in the main IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author window and drag them onto the Logic tab of the If... Go To item. This requires that double click navigation is enabled (Tools > Enable Double Click Navigation).

185 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Fields in the If... Go To Dialog Routings/Questions panes. On the left of the dialog box are a Routings pane and a Questions pane.

These panes contain the questions in the routings or questionnaire ﬁle in the same way as the panes on the main Author window. Select a question from either of these panes and click the Add button in the center of the dialog box to use it in a condition. Note: You cannot add a single or multiple response question or grid question as a condition if the question does not contain any responses. Set up the responses for the desired question in the Design pane before adding the question as a condition.
If this condition is true. The information in this area of the dialog box varies depending on the type

of question you have selected. Use this area to deﬁne a condition. For more information, see the topic Adding Conditions on p. 191. When you add multiple conditions, the conditions are displayed on separate lines. You can select a line to change or remove it. For more information, see the topic Working with Multiple Conditions on p. 195.
Then go to. Once you have deﬁned the conditions, select a question or routing item to jump to if

the conditions are met. For example, you might set a condition on the question “Which do you prefer, dogs or cats?” that jumps to a page called QuestionsOnDogs if the respondent selects dogs.
Clear Expression. Choose this button to delete all the conditions. Delete Selected. Choose this button to delete the currently selected condition. Expand Categories. Choose this button to display the Category Selection dialog box where you can select responses from a single or multiple response question or grid question, in cases where there are too many questions to display without scrolling.

Skip and Fill
This topic describes the Skip and Fill dialog and the Fill Wizard. The Skip and Fill dialog provides options for specifying the response value for a set of questions, based on the responses to a previous set of questions, and then jumping to another question. The dialog allows you to: Specify the response value for a set of questions based on a set of conditional statements. Create conditional statements under which the speciﬁed questions will be ﬁlled. Move focus to another question. The Fill Wizard allows you to specify response values for a set of questions and is typically used in conjunction with conditional logic (For more information, see the topic Creating a Condition Block on p. 188.). The Skip and Fill dialog is accessed from the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Tools menu:
Tools > Create Skip and Fill...

The Fill Wizard is accessed from:
Tools > Fill Wizard

186 Chapter 7

The Skip and Fill dialog is composed of the Condition and Fill tabs. The Fill Wizard has the same ﬁelds as the Fill tab of the Skip and Fill dialog except for the Then go to list.
Condition tab

The Condition tab allows you to select the questions upon which to base the conditional statements, and allows you to select questions to jump to when conditions are met.
Available questions. List all questions for the active questionnaire. Condition. Lists all questions selected for conditional statements, and provides options for deﬁning

the statements.
Then go to. Lists questions that are eligible to jump to. View Script/Hide Script. Displays or hides the conditional statement script.
Icon Description Add Conditions – adds the selected questions to the Condition list. Script Filter - creates script ﬁlters that allow you to deﬁne expressions that cannot be directly parsed for IfBlock, If Go To, and Skip-and-Fill items. For more information, see the topic Adding Script Filters on p. 196. Clear Conditions – removes all conditions from the Condition list. Delete Selected Clause – removes the selected condition clauses from the Condition list. Expand Categories – opens the Category Selection dialog, allowing you to view and select question responses. This is particularly useful when a question contains numerous responses.

Creating conditional statements
E Select a question(s) from the Available questions list. E Click the Add Conditions icon. The selected questions are added to the Condition list. E Deﬁne the appropriate response conditions for the selected questions. The available response

condition options will vary depending on the question type.
E Select an appropriate question to skip to, when the parameters of the conditional statement are met, from the Then go to drop-down list. E Click the Fill tab and enter any appropriate question ﬁll parameters (if required), otherwise click OK to save your conditional statement and return to Author.

Fill tab

The Fill tab allows you to select the questions that you want automatically ﬁlled when a skip condition is met.

187 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Available questions. List all questions for the active questionnaire. Set Values. Lists all questions selected for auto-ﬁll, and provides options for deﬁning the ﬁll

behavior.
Then go to. Lists questions that are eligible to jump to. View Script/Hide Script. Displays or hides the conditional statement script.
Icon Description Add Statements – adds the selected questions to the Set Values list. Delete All Statements – removes all set values from the Set Values list. Delete Selected Clause – removes the selected set values from the Set Values list. Expand Categories – not available on the Fill tab.

Defining fill parameters
E Select a question(s) from the Available questions list. E Click the Add Statements icon. The selected questions are added to the Set Values list. E Deﬁne the appropriate ﬁll behavior for the selected questions. The available ﬁll options will

vary depending on the question type.
E Select an appropriate question to skip to, when the parameters of the conditional statement are met, from the Then go to drop-down list. E Click OK to save your conditional statement and return to Author.

Adding General Conditional Logic
You can add general conditional logic—beyond jumping to another question—to your questionnaires through the use of Condition blocks. Condition blocks consist of If, ElseIf, and Else items that allow you to specify conditions and actions to be taken if those conditions are met. Actions can include questions as well as routing items. For example, you might have a condition that checks the gender of the respondent and asks one set of questions if the gender is female and another set if the gender is male. An If item could check the gender and ask the set of questions for female respondents and an Else item could ask the set of questions for male respondents.
Conditional logic samples

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author provides the following sample questions that demonstrate conditional logic.

188 Chapter 7

Lifestyle Question - located under Library > Questions > Demographics Coffee Question - located under Library > Questions > Ratings and Frequencies

For more information, see the topic Inserting questions from the library in Chapter 6 on p. 165.

Creating a Condition Block
When you create a Condition block, an If item is automatically generated. You can manually add one or more ElseIf items and a single Else item as needed.
To add a Condition block
E In the Routings pane, select the item after which you want to add a Condition block.

Note: You can insert a Condition block within an existing Condition block by selecting an If, ElseIf, or Else item within the existing block.
E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Condition > IfBlock

or press Alt+I, R, O, I.
E The item has an automatically generated name. If required, replace it with a more meaningful

one. This is useful if you add several Condition blocks to your questionnaire. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces. To access the Condition block item, select the icon for the item in the Routings pane.
E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the routing item, if desired. When

printing draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E Specify the If item.

Optionally: Add ElseIf items. Add an Else item.
To group existing questions in a Condition block
E Use Shift+click to select all the questions you want to group. E From the menu, choose Group > Group In > Condition

A new Condition block item appears in the Routings pane, and the selected questions are moved into the If item of the block. You can change the name or description of the Condition block item, and add ElseIf or Else items, as described above.

189 Changing the Questionnaire Order

If Item
The If item of a Condition block consists of one or more conditions and one or more actions to take if the conditions are met. If the conditions are not met, control passes to the ﬁrst ElseIf item, if any in the Condition block. If there are no ElseIf items, control passes to the Else item if present; otherwise control passes to the next item following the Condition block in the current routing. Each Condition block has exactly one If item.
To specify an If item
E Select the If item in the Routings pane. E If desired, replace the automatically generated name of the item and/or enter a description for the

item. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Select one or more questions from the Routings pane or the Questions pane to use as the condition(s) for the If item, then click the Add button. E The selected questions display in the If item’s logic builder section.

Note: You cannot add a single or multiple response question or grid question as a condition if the question does not contain any responses. Set up the responses for the desired question in the Design pane before adding the question as a condition.
E Specify the conditions for the selected questions. How you deﬁne the conditions depends on the

question types. For more information, see the topic Adding Conditions on p. 191. When you add multiple conditions, the conditions are displayed on separate lines. You can select a line to change or remove it. For more information, see the topic Working with Multiple Conditions on p. 195. As an alternative, you can select questions to use as conditions from the Routings pane or the Questions pane in the main IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author window and drag them onto the Logic tab of the If item. This requires that double click navigation is enabled (Tools > Enable Double Click Navigation).
E Add items to the If item. If items can contain questions and routing items, including other

Condition blocks. You can add items in a variety of ways: Select one or more items from the Routings or Questions pane and drag them onto the icon for the If item. Select the If item and insert a new question or routing item from the Insert menu. Note: When adding additional items to an If item, you can select an existing item within the If as the target. The items will be added after the selected item. Selecting the If item itself results in adding the new items after any existing ones. If required, create script ﬁlters for the conditions. Script ﬁlters allow you to deﬁne expressions that cannot be directly parsed for IfBlock, If Go To, and Skip-and-Fill items. For more information, see the topic Adding Script Filters on p. 196.

190 Chapter 7

ElseIf Item
An ElseIf item of a Condition block consists of one or more conditions and one or more actions to take if the conditions are met. If the conditions are not met, control passes to the next ElseIf item, if any in the Condition block. If there are no additional ElseIf items, control passes to the Else item if present; otherwise control passes to the next item following the Condition block in the current routing. A Condition block can have one or more ElseIf items.
To add an ElseIf item
E In the Routings pane, select the Condition block to which the new ElseIf item should be added. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Condition > ElseIf E If desired, replace the automatically generated name of the item and/or enter a description for the

item. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Select one or more questions from the Routings pane or the Questions pane to use as the condition(s) for the ElseIf item, then click the Add button. E The selected questions display in the ElseIf item’s logic builder section.

Note: You cannot add a single or multiple response question or grid question as a condition if the question does not contain any responses. Set up the responses for the desired question in the Design pane before adding the question as a condition.
E Specify the conditions for the selected questions. How you deﬁne the conditions depends on the

question types. For more information, see the topic Adding Conditions on p. 191. When you add multiple conditions, the conditions are displayed on separate lines. You can select a line to change or remove it. For more information, see the topic Working with Multiple Conditions on p. 195. As an alternative, you can select questions to use as conditions from the Routings pane or the Questions pane in the main IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author window and drag them onto the Logic tab of the ElseIf item. This requires that double click navigation is enabled (Tools > Enable Double Click Navigation).
E Add items to the ElseIf item. ElseIf items can contain questions and routing items, including other

Condition blocks. You can add items in a variety of ways: Select one or more items from the Routings or Questions pane and drag them onto the icon for the ElseIf item. Select the ElseIf item and insert a new question or routing item from the Insert menu. Note: When adding additional items to an ElseIf item, you can select an existing item within the ElseIf as the target. The items will be added after the selected item. Selecting the ElseIf item itself results in adding the new items after any existing ones. If required, create script ﬁlters for the conditions. Script ﬁlters allow you to deﬁne expressions that cannot be directly parsed for IfBlock, If Go To, and Skip-and-Fill items. For more information, see the topic Adding Script Filters on p. 196.

191 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Else Item
An Else item of a Condition block consists of one or more actions that are taken when the conditions for the If and ElseIf items (in the block) are not satisﬁed. A Condition block can only have one Else item and it follows any ElseIf items in the block.
To add an Else item
E In the Routings pane, select the Condition block to which the new Else item should be added. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Condition > Else E If desired, replace the automatically generated name of the item and/or enter a description for the

item. Names must be unique, cannot be empty and can contain only letters, numbers and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _. Names cannot contain spaces.
E Add items to the Else item. Else items can contain questions and routing items, including other

Condition blocks. You can add items in a variety of ways: Select one or more items from the Routings or Questions pane and drag them onto the icon for the Else item. Select the Else item and insert a new question or routing item from the Insert menu. Note: When adding additional items to an Else item, you can select an existing item within the Else as the target. The items will be added after the selected item. Selecting the Else item itself results in adding the new items after any existing ones.

Adding Conditions
You can deﬁne one or more conditions for an If item, ElseIf item, or If... Go To item. For example, you could specify that if a respondent answers Male to the Gender question and 45-55 to the Age question, the questionnaire jumps to a section of questions relevant to that demographic. How you deﬁne the conditions depends on the question’s type: Single Response Questions Multiple Response Questions Grid Questions True/False Questions Numeric Questions Text Questions Date/Time Questions

Setting up Conditions for Single Response Questions
Figure 7-9 Single response variable icon

192 Chapter 7

When you add a single response question, the right side of the pane enables you to deﬁne a condition based on the selected question.
E Select the responses you want to base the condition on and select the option from the drop-down

list box that you want to apply: includes any of these. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose at

least one of the selected responses. includes none of these. Select this option if you want to exclude respondents who chose any

of the selected responses. has a value. Select this option to include respondents who speciﬁed a value for this question. has no value. Select this option to include respondents who did not specify a value for this

question. This includes cases where a particular question was skipped, for example.

Setting up Conditions for Multiple Response Questions
Figure 7-10 Multiple response variable icon

When you add a multiple response question, the right side of the pane enables you to deﬁne a condition based on the selected question.
E Select the responses you want to base the expression on and select the option from the drop-down

list box that you want to apply: includes any of these. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose at

least one of the selected responses. includes any of these (no others). Select this option if you want to include respondents who

chose any of the selected responses and no others. includes none of these. Select this option if you want to exclude respondents who chose any

of the selected responses. includes all of these. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose all

of the selected responses. includes exactly these. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose all of

the selected responses and no others. includes at least. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose at least a

speciﬁed number of the selected responses. Specify the number in the text box. includes at most. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose no more than

a speciﬁed number of the selected responses. Specify the number in the text box. is between. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose a restricted

number of the selected responses, for example, who chose between two and ﬁve responses. Specify the numbers in the text boxes. has a value. Select this option to include cases where a value exists for the selected variable. has no value. Select this option to include cases where there is no value for the selected

variable. This includes cases where a particular survey question was skipped, for example.

193 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Setting up Conditions for Grid Questions
Figure 7-11 Categorical Grid icon

When you add a grid, the right side of the pane enables you to deﬁne a condition based on the selected question. includes any of these. Select this option if you want to include respondents who chose at least

one of the selected cells. includes none of these. Select this option if you want to exclude respondents who chose any

of the selected cells.

Setting up Conditions for True/False Questions
Figure 7-12 Boolean variable icon

When you add a true/false question, the right side of the pane enables you to deﬁne a condition based on the selected question.
E Select the option from the drop-down list box that you want to apply:

is true. Select this option if you want to include respondents who answered True. is false. Select this option if you want to include respondents who answered False.

Setting up Conditions for Numeric Questions
Figure 7-13 Numeric variable icon

When you add a numeric question, the right side of the pane enables you to deﬁne a condition based on the selected question.
E Enter a value in the text box and select the required operator from the drop-down list box. The

full list of operators is: is less than is less than or equal to is equal to is not equal to is greater than or equal to is greater than is between

194 Chapter 7

Setting up Conditions for Text Questions
Figure 7-14 Text variable icon

When you add a text question, the right side of the pane enables you to deﬁne a condition based on the selected question.
E Select the option from the drop-down list box that you want to apply:

includes. Select this option if you want to include respondents who entered a response that

contains the speciﬁed text. Enter the text in the text box. begins with. Select this option if you want to include respondents who entered a response that

begins with the speciﬁed text. Enter the text in the text box. ends with. Select this option if you want to include respondents who entered a response that

ends with the speciﬁed text. Enter the text in the text box. is empty. Select this option if you want to include respondents who entered a response that

contains an empty or Null value or white space only. is not empty. Select this option if you want to include respondents who entered a response that

does not contain an empty or Null value or white space only. is exactly. Select this option if you want to include respondents who entered a response that

contains exactly what you specify in the text box. is different from. Select this option if you want to exclude respondents who entered a response

that is identical to the speciﬁed text. Enter the text in the text box. does not begin with. Select this option if you want to exclude respondents who entered a

response that begins with the speciﬁed text.

Setting up Conditions for Date/Time Questions
Figure 7-15 Date variable icon

When you add a date/time question, the right side of the pane enables you to deﬁne a condition based on the selected question.
E Select an option from the drop-down list box:

is before is after is equal to is between

Then use the text boxes to enter the required date and time. When you choose the Between option, additional text boxes are available for entering the second date and time.

195 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Working with Multiple Conditions
You can specify multiple conditions for a given If, ElseIf, or If Go To item. Multiple conditions are combined using logical operators:
And. This means that all of the conditions must be true. This is the default. Combine

conditions with the And operator when you want to take the action associated with the If, ElseIf, or If Go To item only if the responses satisfy all conditions.
Or. This means that any or all of the conditions can be true. Combine conditions with the Or

operator when you want to take the action associated with the If, ElseIf, or If Go To item if the responses satisfy any or all of the conditions. Choose And or Or from the drop-down list that appears at the right of a condition item when you insert multiple conditions.
Moving a Condition
E If you want to change the order in which a condition appears after you have added it, highlight the

condition and use the up or down arrow buttons on the Logic tab to move it to the correct location.
Grouping Conditions

You can group conditions so that an And or Or operator applies to the group rather than to an individual condition. Once you have grouped two or more conditions, you also have the option to use the NOT operator. Selecting NOT means that only responses where the grouped conditions are not true are considered. To group conditions:
E In the Logic tab, use Shift+click to select the conditions that you want to group, and choose the

Group button.
Figure 7-16 Group button

A box is displayed around the grouped conditions. To ungroup conditions that you have previously added to a group:
E In the Logic tab, select the grouped conditions and choose the Ungroup button. Figure 7-17 Ungroup button

The grouping is removed from the conditions.

196 Chapter 7

Category Selection
Use the Category Selection dialog box to help you select categories to include in a condition for an If, ElseIf, or If Go To item in cases where there are too many responses to display without scrolling.
E To open the Category Selection dialog box, select a categorical question (on the Design tab) that you have added as a condition and choose the Expand Categories button on the Design tab. Figure 7-18 Expand Categories button

The dialog box contains a list of all the responses in the selected question, or the subjects and responses in a grid question. You can resize the dialog box if necessary to show more responses.
E Check the boxes for any subjects or responses you want to include in the condition. Alternatively,

if you want to select most of the responses, you can check the Select all box, then clear the individual responses that you do not want to include.
E Choose OK to save your changes and return to the Design tab.

Adding Script Filters
Adding script ﬁlters allows you to deﬁne expressions that cannot be directly parsed for IfBlock, If Go To, and Skip-and-Fill items.
E To create a Script Filter, select the appropriate condition from the IfBlock or If Go To logic builder dialogs, or the Skip-and-Fill dialog and click the Script Filter button. Figure 7-19 Script Filter button

A new sub-expression is added to the selected condition that provides an editable text-ﬁeld, allowing you to enter the appropriate expression.
E Enter the appropriate expression in the provided text-ﬁeld. For example, the following script

generates an exit message in a CATI survey:
If IOM.Info.InterviewMode = InterviewModes.imLocal Then InfoLocal.Ask() ElseIf IOM.Info.InterviewMode = InterviewModes.imDataEntry Then TextDE.Response = "Data Entry" TextDE.Show() ElseIf IOM.Info.InterviewMode = InterviewModes.imPhone Then InfoCATI.Ask() ElseIf IOM.Info.InterviewMode = InterviewModes.imWeb Then InfoWeb.Ask() End If

197 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Ungrouping Condition Blocks
You can ungroup any questions and routing items that you have grouped in a Condition block. You can choose to ungroup the entire block or an If, ElseIf, or Else item within the block. You can also ungroup items by cutting them from the Condition block and pasting them elsewhere in the Routings pane.
To ungroup an entire Condition block
E In the Routings pane, select the Condition block that you want to ungroup. E From the menu, choose Group > Ungroup

or press Alt+G, U. This moves the items within the Condition block up one level in the routing list and deletes the block.
To ungroup an If, ElseIf, or Else item in a Condition block
E In the Routings pane, select the If, ElseIf, or Else item that you want to ungroup. E From the menu, choose Group > Ungroup

or press Alt+G, U. This moves the items within the If, ElseIf, or Else item up to the same level as the containing Condition block, and immediately following that block. The If, ElseIf, or Else item is removed from the Condition block.
To ungroup items without deleting the associated If, ElseIf, or Else item
E In the Routings pane, expand the If, ElseIf, or Else item containing the desired items. E Use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select the items you want to remove. E From the menu, choose Edit > Cut

or press Ctrl+X.
E Position the cursor outside the Condition block or If, ElseIf, or Else item, and choose Edit > Paste

or press Ctrl+V.

198 Chapter 7

Adding an Exit Instruction to a Questionnaire
You can add an instruction to a questionnaire so that the next step is to end the questionnaire. This is useful if you have set up a number of routes through the questionnaire so that respondents are directed to a different set of questions depending on their answers to previous questions. You can add an exit instruction at the end of each set of questions. When you add an exit instruction, you can specify an exit code to indicate the status of the questionnaire; for example, whether it should be regarded as complete. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author provides a standard set of exit codes but you can also deﬁne your own codes with your own meanings.
To add an exit instruction
E If it is not selected, select the Routings pane. E Select the question after which you want the interview to ﬁnish. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Exit E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the routing item, if desired. When

printing draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E In the Properties pane:

To use one of the predeﬁned exit codes, select the code from the Exit Code drop-down list. See below for an explanation of the predeﬁned exit codes. To use a custom exit code, place the cursor in the drop-down list and type in the code. Exit codes may be any whole number in the range 0 to 2147483647. To set which question’s description text will be used as the exit text, select the appropriate question from the Exit text drop-down list. When the Show display items only option is selected, only available Display questions are presented in the list; when the Show display items only option is not selected, all available questions are presented in the list. When the questionnaire completes via an exit routing item, the selected question’s description text displays as a message at the end of the interview. Note: Leaving the default [Use standard text] in place will result in predeﬁned text displaying at the end of the interview. The name of the code is displayed in the Design pane. If you have entered your own custom code, the text Custom Exit Code is displayed.
Predefined Exit Codes
Code 1 Meaning Successful completion Remarks Any interview in which all relevant questions have been asked is ﬂagged as successfully completed. This is the default.

199 Changing the Questionnaire Order

Code 2

Meaning Premature termination with data.

5

Terminated by quota control

6

Early completion

8

Premature termination without data Interview stopped with no data written Interview stopped with data written

9 10

Remarks You can use this code to identify interviews that were not completed for whatever reason. This is a useful exit code for paper questionnaires or telephone surveys where the respondent can simply choose not to continue answering questions. It allows you to differentiate between these interviews and interviews that were stopped, where the respondent may have had the intention of continuing with the interview. Interviews that are terminated by quota control can often be confused with successfully completed or partially completed interviews. Use this exit code to ﬂag interviews that were terminated because the respondent belonged in a group whose quota had already been ﬁlled. You can use this code to treat an interview that is only partially completed as if it were a fully completed interview. You might decide to do this if the respondent has reached a certain point in the questionnaire. This code is not applicable to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection products, which always write data. This code is not applicable to Data Collection products, which always write data. You can use this code to identify interviews that have been stopped pending completion at a later date.

Adding Bookmarks
You can add bookmarks to a questionnaire so that you can jump to the bookmark using a Go To or an If... Go To routing item, instead of jumping to a speciﬁc question.
To add a bookmark
E If it is not selected, select the Routings pane. E Select the question after which you want to place the bookmark. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Bookmark

200 Chapter 7 E The bookmark is created, with a default name. You can change this if required. E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the routing item, if desired. When

printing draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E To create additional bookmarks, repeat the above steps. Each bookmark is created with a unique

name.

Adding Scripts
You can insert scripts into a questionnaire, so that you can create more complex instructions than are possible using the features in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author user interface. For example, you can allow respondents to return to any of the previous questions in the questionnaire by selecting the name from a drop-down list and clicking a Go To button:
Figure 7-20 Question with Go To button and drop-down list of previous questions

You can do this by adding the following script before the ﬁrst question on which you want the button to appear:
IOM.Navigations.Add(NavigationTypes.nvGoto)

The button then appears on all subsequent pages of the questionnaire. A number of predeﬁned script items (including the one shown above) are available in the Library. For more information, see the topic Adding Script Items from the Library on p. 201. You can also write your own script items. Script items must be written in the Interview Scripting Language, which is documented in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library, under:
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional > Interview Scripting

To insert a script
E If it is not selected, select the Routings pane. E Select the question after which you want to insert the script.

201 Changing the Questionnaire Order E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Script Item

or press Alt+I, R, S.
E A script item is created with a default name. You can change this if required. E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the script, if desired. When printing draft

paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey.
E Type the script in the ﬁeld indicated, or paste in the script from another ﬁle. E It is a good idea to add comments to your scripts to explain what the script does, for future

reference. To add a comment, preface each line of the comment with a single quote:
' Add a navigation button to each question E To create additional script items, repeat the above steps. Each script item is given a unique name.

Adding Script Items from the Library
You can quickly add predeﬁned scripts to your questionnaire by selecting a ﬁle from the library of scripts provided with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author and inserting it into your questionnaire. This copies the content of the selected ﬁle and pastes it into your questionnaire ﬁle. You can then edit it as required. Each script item supplied with the library includes an explanation of what the script does and lists the changes, if any, that you need to make when adding the script to your own questionnaire. There is no link between the content of the source ﬁle and that in your questionnaire ﬁle, so changes made after you insert the script do not affect the original script in the library.
To insert a script from the library
E In the Routings pane, select the question after which you want to insert the script. E If it is not visible, display the Library pane: Figure 7-21 Selecting the Library pane

E Expand the Script Items folder in the Library pane, and select the ﬁle you want to use:

From the menu, choose
Insert > From Library

202 Chapter 7

or press Alt+I, L, or choose the Insert button on the Library pane. Alternatively, you can drag the script from the Library pane and drop it in the location in the Routings pane where you want to place it. The script is added to the questionnaire.
E If the script indicates that it requires customizing, edit the script in the Design pane.

Adding a Set Response to a Questionnaire
Adding Set Response routing items to a questionnaire allows you to set the response to a speciﬁc question using the question’s default answers as set in metadata, responses to other questions, or manually entered expressions. Set Response routing items are typically used in conjunction with conditional logic to set the response values for a question. For more information, see the topic Creating a Condition Block on p. 188. Note: After you add a Set Response routing item, failure to complete its conﬁguration may result in syntax errors when running the survey.
Name. The Set Response routing item name. The default value is SetResponse. You can change

this value if required.
Description. The Set Response description allows you to enter a description for the routing item (if desired). When printing draft paper surveys in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, this description is included. Descriptions are not included in the actual paper survey. Question to set. The drop-down menu provides a list of all questions, in alphabetical order, from the Questions pane. You can also drag-and-drop a question from the Routings or Questions pane. Select an appropriate question upon which to apply the set response. Choose response(s). Displays responses already deﬁned for the selected Question to set. Depending

on the selected question type, the provided options will vary: Single-response question responses are presented as a single-select list. Select the appropriate response from the list. Multiple-response categorical question responses are presented as a multiple-select list. Select the appropriate responses from the list. True/False (boolean) questions are presented as the options True and False. Numeric questions are presented as an empty ﬁeld, allowing you to enter an appropriate numeric value. Text questions are presented as an empty ﬁeld, allowing you to enter an appropriate text value. Date/Time questions are presented as date/time ﬁeld, allowing you to enter a speciﬁc date and time. Clicking the down arrow displays a calendar, allowing you to select a speciﬁc date. Notes: Special responses (such as “not applicable” or “no answer”) are provided for those questions that include them. Grid questions are not currently supported.

203 Changing the Questionnaire Order

In all situations, users will be able to set the item to blank or default answer using a radio button. In addition, depending on the question type, the system will present a control for setting the response to the question.
Default answer. When selected, the question’s default answer is used as the set response. Blank. When selected, a blank response is used as the question’s set response. This is not the same

as not selecting a question to use as a set response; it is however the same as not selecting any answers in the Choose response(s) section. This option is not available for numeric or date/time questions.
Build a response. When selected, you can deﬁne the set response to equal another question

response or any other property. You can use the expression editor ﬁeld to create expressions by dragging-and-dropping other questions into the ﬁeld editor. You can also select the Add button to add a selected question to the ﬁeld editor at the current cursor position. You can specify text (“text value”), a numeric expression (such as 5 + NumericQuestion), or the value of a question’s (or multiple questions’) properties. Note: The Add button is only available when double-click navigation mode is enabled. For more information, see the topic The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author menu in Chapter 4 on p. 45. Clicking the code samples button will open the help system to the Code Samples topic. The help topic provides code samples that are commonly used to set the response for speciﬁc question types. You can copy the code sample text, paste it into the build response expression editor ﬁeld, and then edit the sample to suit your needs.
To add a Set Response routing item
E If it is not selected, select the Routings pane. E Select the question after which you want to place the Set Response. E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Set Response E The routing item is created with a default name. You can change this if required. E Optionally enter a description for the routing item. E The Question to set drop-down menu provides a list of all questions from the Questions pane.

Select an appropriate question upon which to apply the set response, or drag-and-drop a question from the Routing or Questions pane.
E Select an appropriate option under the Response Value section. Refer to the descriptions above for

information regarding each option.

204 Chapter 7

Code Samples
The following code samples can be used to set the response for speciﬁc question types:
Setting the value from a sample management field:
"IOM.SampleRecord.Item["Gender"]"

Setting the value based on an expression (Total awareness example):
"Spontaneous + Prompted"

Filtering answers from AllBrands by the categories defined in BrandsOfInterest:
"AllBrands * BrandsOfInterest.DefinedCategories() "

Setting the value for all categories not answered:
"Brands.DefinedCategories() - Brands"

Setting the value for a text example:
"Name + mr.CrLf + Address"

Setting the value for a Date\Time example:
"DateNow()"

Setting the value for a Boolean example:
"Income > 100000"

Chapter

Adding Languages and Contexts

8

You can add multiple languages or contexts to your questionnaire, to allow the text of questions and responses to be added for that language or context. For example, you may want to create a questionnaire in English and have it translated into French, German, and Danish, or you may want to have two separate sets of text for each question, one to be shown to the respondent, and the other containing a brief summary of the question’s content for use by data analysts. Once you add a language or a context, you can enter question and response text for that language or context in either IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author or the IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility. To enter text for a language, it is recommended that you use SPSS Translation Utility, which has facilities to support entering text for different languages and for displaying multiple languages at the same time. You can use Author to enter the text for different contexts, but you may prefer to use the SPSS Translation Utility if the text is substantially different in each context. You can specify alternatives for a language or context. When you set an alternative, text from the alternative language or context is automatically displayed in the questionnaire if no text exists for the selected language or context. You can change the default language or context. This is the language used as the base language in SPSS Translation Utility and in the ﬁnished questionnaire. You can change the read/write status of any language in the .mdd ﬁle, including the default language. The read/write status controls whether or not users of the SPSS Translation Utility can enter or edit text for the language.

Adding and Removing Languages
You can add languages to the questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle, so the question and response text can be translated into those languages. When you add a language, new ﬁelds are added to the questionnaire ﬁle to store the text for each question and response in that language. You can then enter the translated text in those ﬁelds. It is recommended that you use the IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility to enter the translations, as this has facilities for displaying both the original language and the translation at the same time. You can also remove existing languages from a questionnaire ﬁle; for example, if you have added a language in error. Warning: Removing a language permanently deletes all content for the language.

To add a language
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 205

206 Chapter 8

or press Alt+T, M, or click the Manage Languages and Contexts toolbar button:
Figure 8-1 Manage Languages and Contexts button

On the Languages tab, any languages already deﬁned for the .mdd ﬁle are displayed in the dialog box.
E Choose the Add button. The Add Language dialog box appears. E Select a language from the drop-down list. The list contains all the languages that are installed on

your computer.
Figure 8-2 Add Languages dialog box

E If required, deﬁne alternatives for the language. E Click OK to close the Add Language dialog box and save your changes, then click OK again to

close the Manage Languages and Contexts dialog box. This adds the language to the list of languages in the questionnaire ﬁle and creates an empty ﬁeld for that language for each item of text that exists in the ﬁle. You can then pass the ﬁle on to your translators to enter translations for the language using the SPSS Translation Utility.
To change the language displayed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author
E Select the language from the drop-down list in the Set Language and Context toolbar, or choose View > Set Language

207 Adding Languages and Contexts

from the menu and select the language from the Set Language dialog box:
Figure 8-3 Changing the language

Changing the language in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author displays the question and response text for the selected language. For newly created languages, no text is displayed unless you have also set up alternatives for the language. For more information, see the topic Deﬁning Alternative Texts for Languages or Contexts on p. 210.
To Remove a Language

You cannot remove a language if it is set as the default. To remove the default language, ﬁrst select another language as the default. For more information, see the topic Changing the Default Language or Context on p. 212.
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or click the Manage Languages and Contexts toolbar button:
Figure 8-4 Manage Languages and Contexts button

E On the Languages tab, highlight the language you want to remove. E Click Remove and click Yes to conﬁrm that you want to remove the language. The language is

removed from the list of available languages in the .mdd ﬁle. Warning: Removing a language from the .mdd ﬁle permanently deletes all content for that language.
E Click OK to close the dialog box.

Adding and Removing Contexts
You can add different contexts to a questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle, so that the question and response text can be varied according to the context in which they appear. When you add a context, new ﬁelds are added to the questionnaire ﬁle to store the text for each question and response in that context. You can then select the context and enter the appropriate text in those ﬁelds. If you have a lot of text to enter, you may want to use the IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility to enter the text for the different contexts, as this enables you to display all contexts at the same time. You can also remove contexts from a questionnaire ﬁle; for example, if you have added the context in error.

208 Chapter 8

Warning: Removing a context permanently deletes all content for the context.
To Add a Context
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or click the Manage Languages and Contexts toolbar button:
Figure 8-5 Manage Languages and Contexts button

On the Contexts tab, any contexts already deﬁned for the .mdd ﬁle are displayed in the list.
E Click Add. E In the Add Context dialog box, do one of the following:

To use a standard context, select the context from the drop-down list. The standard contexts supplied with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author are Analysis, Question, Paper, and CATI. To create your own context, click the Custom context option button and enter a name for the new context.
E If required, deﬁne alternatives for the context. E Click OK to close the dialog box and save your changes, then click OK again to close the Manage

Languages and Contexts dialog box.
To change the context displayed in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author
E To switch the context displayed in Author, select the context from the drop-down list in the

Set Language and Context toolbar, or choose
View > Set Context

from the menu and select the context from the Set Context dialog box:
Figure 8-6 Changing the context

Changing the context in Author displays the question and response text for the selected context. For newly created contexts, no text is displayed unless you have also set up alternatives for the context. For more information, see the topic Deﬁning Alternative Texts for Languages or Contexts on p. 210.

209 Adding Languages and Contexts

To Remove a Context

You cannot remove a context if it is set as the default. To remove the default context, ﬁrst select another context as the default. For more information, see the topic Changing the Default Language or Context on p. 212.
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or click the Manage Languages and Contexts toolbar button:
Figure 8-7 Manage Languages and Contexts button

E Highlight the context you want to remove in the list. E Click Remove. The context is removed from the .mdd ﬁle.

Warning: Removing a context from the .mdd ﬁle permanently deletes all content for that context.
E Click OK to close the dialog box and save your changes.

Entering Text for Additional Languages and Contexts
Once you have added a new language or context to your questionnaire ﬁle, you can enter question and response text for that language or context (question and response names remain the same for all languages and contexts). To enter text for a language, it is recommended that you use the IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility, which has facilities to support entering text for different languages and for displaying multiple languages and contexts at the same time. However, it is possible to enter texts for different languages using IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. You can use Author to enter the text for different contexts, but you may also prefer to use SPSS Translation Utility for this in the case of long questionnaires where the text is substantially different in each context.
To enter text for additional languages or contexts
E First, add the language or context to your questionnaire ﬁle. E In the Author window, select the language or context from the drop-down list in the Set Language

and Context toolbar, or from the menu option:
View > Set Language/Set Context

The Design pane changes to display the selected language or context. As you have not yet added any texts for this, the question and response text are blank (unless you have deﬁned any alternatives for the language or context). If you have deﬁned alternatives, the text from the

210 Chapter 8

alternative language or context is displayed instead. For more information, see the topic Deﬁning Alternative Texts for Languages or Contexts on p. 210.
E For each question or response, place the cursor in the text ﬁeld and type the text for the language

or context. If the ﬁeld contains text from an alternative language or context, select the text and delete it, then enter the new text.
E Remember to switch back to the original language or context if you want to add new questions.

Defining Alternative Texts for Languages or Contexts
You can specify languages or contexts to use as alternatives when no text exists in another language or context. This reduces the amount of work required to add translations or enter text for different contexts. For example, suppose that you have added the languages English (UK) and English (Australia) to your questionnaire. In most cases, the text for a question or response will be identical in both languages. Instead of entering all the question and response text twice, you could select English (UK) as the alternative language for English (Australia). Then you need only enter question and response text for English (Australia) where there is a difference between the two languages. In all the ﬁelds where you do not enter any text, the questionnaire will display the English (UK) text when it is opened in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server. You can set multiple alternative languages or contexts, and you can also set the default language or context as an alternative for all of the others in the ﬁle. For example, in the above ﬁle, if your default language is English (US), you can make this the alternative language for all other languages in the ﬁle. Then, if no translations have been added for either Australian English or UK English, the US English text will be displayed.
To Set Alternatives for a Language or Context
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or choose the Manage Languages and Contexts button:
Figure 8-8 Manage Languages and Contexts button

E Choose the Languages or Contexts tab as required. E If you are adding a new language or context, choose the Add button and select the language or

context for which you want to set alternatives from the drop-down list, or enter a new context in the Custom context ﬁeld.
E If you are adding alternatives to an existing language or context, select the language or context in the list and choose the Edit button.

211 Adding Languages and Contexts Figure 8-9 Adding alternatives

The Available section of the dialog box displays all the other languages or contexts in the ﬁle. If you have previously set alternatives, they appear in the Selected list.
E Highlight a language or context in the Available list, and choose the Add -> button to move it to the Selected list.

Note: You can add multiple alternative languages or contexts and place them in order of preference using the Move up and Move down buttons.
E Choose OK to save your changes and return to the main window, then choose OK again to close

the dialog box.

To Set the Default Language or Context as the universal Alternative

You can use the default language or context as the alternative for all languages or contexts in the .mdd ﬁle. This does not change any alternatives already set, but adds the language or context to the end of the alternatives list. You can change this for individual languages or contexts in the Edit dialog box.
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or choose the Manage Languages and Contexts button:
Figure 8-10 Manage Languages and Contexts button

212 Chapter 8 E In the Languages or Contexts tab as appropriate, choose the Use Default button at the bottom of the

dialog box. The language or context that is currently set as the default is added as an alternative to all other languages or contexts in the ﬁle. Note: For any languages or contexts you subsequently add, you can set alternatives using the Add or Edit dialog box.
E Choose OK to close the dialog box and save your changes.

To Remove all Alternative Languages or Contexts From an .mdd File

You can remove the alternatives from all languages or contexts in the .mdd ﬁle.
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or choose the Manage Languages and Contexts button:
Figure 8-11 Manage Languages and Contexts button

E Choose the Clear All button. All alternative languages or contexts are removed. E Choose OK to close the dialog box and save your changes.

Changing the Default Language or Context
You can change the language or context that is used as the default. The default language is treated as follows in other IBM® SPSS® Data Collection applications: When you activate a questionnaire to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, the default language is used as the base language in the resulting questionnaire. If the questionnaire contains texts in the respondent’s browser language, it automatically uses that language. However, if there are no texts in the respondent’s browser language, the interviewing program uses the texts in the base language. In the Interviewer Server’s Build activity, the default language is used as the primary language (all questions are displayed in that language). When you test a questionnaire in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional (using the Debug option) the default language is used as the base language. If the questionnaire contains texts in your browser language, it automatically uses that language. However, if there are no texts in the browser language, the test is carried out using the texts in the base language. When you open a questionnaire in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper, the questionnaire appears in the default language (you can change this by selecting a different language when you load the questionnaire ﬁle).

213 Adding Languages and Contexts

When you open a questionnaire in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Questionnaire Viewer, the questionnaire appears in the default language (you can change this by selecting a different language from the drop-down list in the viewer). When you open a questionnaire in the IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility, the default language is shown as the source language; that is, the text to be translated. Note: You can also change the default language before you activate the questionnaire to Interviewer Server, using the Default Questionnaire Language option in the Activate dialog box.
To Change the Default Language or Context
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or choose the Manage Languages and Contexts button:
Figure 8-12 Manage Languages and Contexts button

E Highlight a language or context, and choose the Set as Default button. E Choose OK to close the dialog box.

Changing the Current Context
You can change the context at any point in a given routing. This allows you to display different contexts in different routings. For example, you might want to use one context for the text displayed in a web interview and another context for the text that is displayed in Data Entry Player. This is accomplished by using one routing for the web interview, another routing for data entry, and specifying the particular context in each routing. You can set the context at the beginning of the routing so that all questions in the routing are displayed in that context or you can set the context at a particular point in the routing so that subsequent questions are displayed in that context.
To Set the Context in a Routing
E From the menu, choose Insert > Routing Item > Script Item E A script item is created with a default name. You can change this if required. E The Description ﬁeld allows you to type a description for the script, if desired. E In the Script tab, enter IOM.context=, where is the name of the

desired context, enclosed in quotes. For example, if you used the name “DataEntry” for the context to be displayed in Data Entry Player, you would enter IOM.context="DataEntry". Questions that follow the script item will be displayed using the content deﬁned for the speciﬁed context.

214 Chapter 8

Setting the Read/Write Status for a Language
You can change the read/write status of any language in the questionnaire ﬁle. This determines whether or not IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility users can edit the text for that language. When you specify a language as the default for the ﬁle, it is automatically set to read-only, which means that SPSS Translation Utility users cannot edit the text for the default language. However, if you want users to be able to edit the default language, you can change this. For example, if you specify English US as the default language in your questionnaire ﬁle, it is automatically set to read-only, so SPSS Translation Utility users will not be able to edit the English US text. This is usually what you want, because this is the base text that translators work from when writing translations in other languages, so you do not want anyone to change it accidentally. However, you may want to give the English text to an editor to standardize the style or correct typographical errors. In this case, you can remove the read-only setting from the language so that the editor can make the changes using the SPSS Translation Utility.
To Set the Read/Write Status for a Language
E From the menu, choose Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

or press Alt+T, M, or choose the Manage Languages and Contexts button:
Figure 8-13 Manage Languages and Contexts button

E In the Languages tab, check the read-only box for languages that you want to prevent SPSS

Translation Utility users from editing.
E Clear the read-only check box for languages that you want SPSS Translation Utility users to

be able to edit.
E Choose OK to close the dialog box.

Manage Languages and Contexts Dialog Box
Use the Manage Languages and Contexts dialog box to add languages and contexts to your questionnaire ﬁles.

215 Adding Languages and Contexts Figure 8-14 Manage Languages and Contexts dialog box – Languages tab

To open the Manage Languages and Contexts dialog box, choose
Tools > Manage Languages and Contexts

from the menu, or press Alt+T, M, or click the Manage Languages and Contexts toolbar button:
Figure 8-15 Manage Languages and Contexts button

You can also open this dialog by choosing the Manage Languages and Contexts in the Settings tab of the File Properties dialog box.

Chapter

Formatting questionnaires
Changing the presentation of a question Using text substitution ﬁelds to insert references to question and response names Adding HTML formatting to question and response text Attaching image ﬁles to individual responses Applying a style template to the questionnaire Applying style templates to individual questions, to override the questionnaire style Changing the formatting of question text

9

You can format the way that your online questionnaires appear, and test the results in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. You can format questionnaires by:

Note: The formatting that you can apply in Author is suitable for online questionnaires. To format paper questionnaires, you should use IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper.

Changing the presentation of a question
You can change the way that a question is displayed in the ﬁnished questionnaire, for example by changing the number of rows or columns to use to display responses, or changing whether grid subjects are displayed in rows or columns. The presentation options available depend on the question type.
Setting presentation options
E Select the question in the Routings pane. E If it is not visible, display the Properties pane: Figure 9-1 Selecting the Properties pane

The Presentation options display in the Properties pane.
Displaying responses in multiple rows or columns

This option is available for single and multiple response questions.
E In the Orientation ﬁeld, choose from Default, Columns, or Rows. Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 216

217 Formatting questionnaires E In the Number of Rows/Columns ﬁeld, enter a number. If you selected rows in the Orientation

ﬁeld, the responses will be ordered in rows, split into as many columns as necessary. For example, this question is set out using two rows:
Figure 9-2 Multiple response question in two rows

If you selected columns, the responses will be set out in this number of columns. Here is the same question displayed using two columns:
Figure 9-3 Multiple response question in two columns

Changing the style of responses

By default, single response questions are displayed using an option button and multiple response questions are displayed using a check box. You can change this so that the responses are displayed in a list box:
Figure 9-4 Multiple response question using a list box

218 Chapter 9

For single response questions, you can also choose to display responses in a drop-down list:
Figure 9-5 Single response question using a drop-down list

E In the Presentation drop-down list, choose from Check Box, List Box, or Dropdown Box.

Changing the orientation of a grid question

This option is available for all types of grid questions. By default, subjects in grids are displayed in rows:
Figure 9-6 Grid question with subjects displayed in rows

You can change this so that they are displayed in columns instead:
E In the Display Subjects In ﬁeld, choose Rows or Columns. Figure 9-7 Grid question with subjects displayed in columns

219 Formatting questionnaires

Changing the size of a text box

This option is available for text questions. You can change the size of a text box to tailor it to the number of words that the respondent is likely to type. For example, if you are expecting the answer to be a single word, you can reduce the size of the box. Note: This option simply controls the size of the input box, not the number of characters that the respondent is permitted to enter. To restrict the number of characters that the respondent can enter, use the Minimum and Maximum ﬁelds. For more information, see the topic Creating text questions in Chapter 6 on p. 105. However, note that Minimum and Maximum values override the text box size you specify here.
E Enter the number of characters for the text box in the Width and Height ﬁelds.

Note: You cannot use the Width and Height ﬁelds for text variables in a loop. As a work around, you can use the Control StyleHeight and Width properties in the Advanced Properties pane. Note that the Control StyleHeight and Width properties are set in pixels.

Substituting text in a question
You can add substitution ﬁelds to the text in a question, so that when the questionnaire is shown in an online format such as web or telephone interviewing the code is replaced with the text from the response to a previous question. For example, you might ask the question: If you could go on vacation anywhere in the world, where would you go? followed by one or more questions about the respondent’s preferred destination. The text of the subsequent questions could include the text of the ﬁrst response, so if the respondent answered Hawaii:
Figure 9-8 Respondent answers ‘Hawaii’ to first question

220 Chapter 9

the questions would appear as: Why did you choose Hawaii?, Have you ever visited Hawaii?, When was the last time you visited Hawaii?, and so on:
Figure 9-9 Question text of subsequent question includes the text ‘Hawaii’ from the response to the first question

You can substitute response text taken from any of the following types of question: single response multiple response (all selected responses are displayed, separated by commas) text (the exact text that the respondent typed is displayed) numeric date/time true/false (the text True or False is displayed) Substitution ﬁelds are enclosed in curly braces {}. The syntax for inserting responses from another question is {#QuestionName} including the curly braces. You can also add substitution ﬁelds to the text of questions inside a loop, so that the question text changes each time the questions are asked in the loop, based on the loop driver. For example, suppose that you have a loop that contains a number of questions about vacations. If you use a numeric question or a ﬁxed number of iterations as the loop driver:
Figure 9-10 Respondent answers “2” to the question “How many vacations did you take last year?” so will see the questions in the loop twice

221 Formatting questionnaires

the iteration number appears each time the question is asked:
Figure 9-11 Loop questions with the number of the iteration inserted into the text

If you use a multiple response question the text of the relevant response appears each time the question is asked. The syntax for inserting iterations of a loop is {@LoopName} including the curly braces.
Substituting a response from a previous question
E Create the question from which you want to take the substitution text. For example, add a text

question named FavoriteDestination with the question text: If you could take a vacation anywhere in the world, where would you go?
E Create the question in which you want to add the substitution text. For example, create a text

question called Reason.
E In the question text ﬁeld, add the text for the question. In the place where you want the substituted

text to appear, enter the text {#FavoriteDestination} including the curly braces. For example, to insert the response from the FavoriteDestination question into the text of the Reason question, you might enter something like this:
Why did you choose {#FavoriteDestination}?

When the interview is run, the substitution text is replaced by the response text.

222 Chapter 9

Substituting the text from a loop iteration
E Create the loop and loop questions. For more information, see the topic Creating loops to ask the

same questions for different subjects in Chapter 6 on p. 113.
E Edit the text of the loop questions and insert the {@LoopName} syntax in the appropriate place in

the text. For example, to insert the iterations for the VacationLoop in the HowLong question, you might enter something like this if you are using a multiple response question as the loop driver:
How long did the vacation in {@VacationLoop} last?

When the interview is run, this displays the text of the relevant response each time the question is asked:
Figure 9-12 Loop questions with the text of the response “North America” inserted into the text

If you are using a numeric question or a ﬁxed iteration as the loop driver, you would need to reword the text slightly, for example:
How long did vacation {@VacationLoop} last?

When the interview is run, this displays the number of iterations each time the question is asked. For a further example of using text substitution with loops, see Creating a “Total Awareness” question.
Advanced Text Substitution Features

Additional functionality is available by using interview scripting. For full details of the features available, see the section in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library under:
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional > Interview Scripting > Writing Interview Scripts > Displaying Information on a Page > Text Substitution

223 Formatting questionnaires

Changing the formatting of question and response text
You can use the Formatting toolbar to change the formatting of question and response text.
Formatting question text
E Select the question or response text to be formatted. E Use the Formatting toolbar to apply text formatting. To display the Formatting toolbar, right-click anywhere on the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author toolbar and select Formatting. E Click the Show Design/HTML View icon to quickly preview the formatted text.

For details about the Formatting toolbar, see The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author toolbar buttons.

Adding formatting to question and response text
You can add formatting to question and response text using a limited number of HTML tags. You can add bold, italic, or underlining to a word or phrase, or insert a line break:
Figure 9-13 Questions using HTML tags to add bold, italic, underlining, and line breaks

When possible, it is preferable to control the formatting using a style template rather than HTML tags embedded in the question and response text. This gives you more control over the details of the formatting, and makes it easier to implement changes. However, the HTML tags are useful when you want to emphasize individual words or phrases.

224 Chapter 9

The HTML tags used must be well-formed HTML, otherwise they may not be recognized as HTML and will appear as plain text.
Tag
... ... ... ...

Description Bold text Italic text Underlined text Line break Indent text

Note: HTML formatting is not supported in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer or Data Entry Player.
Adding formatting to question text
E In the Design pane, place the cursor in the question text. E Select the text you want to format, then select the appropriate formatting option from the

formatting toolbar.
E You can also enter well-formed HTML tags around the text (after clicking theShow Design/HTML View icon). For example: What is your age? Figure 9-14 Question text with word formatted in bold

Adding formatting to subject or response text
E In the Design pane, place the cursor in the appropriate question text cell. E Click the ... icon in the cell to display the Advanced Text Editor window. E Select the text you want to format, then select the appropriate formatting option from the

formatting toolbar.
E You can also enter well-formed HTML tags around the text (after clicking theShow Design/HTML View icon). For example: Refuse

225 Formatting questionnaires Figure 9-15 Response text with one response formatted in italics

E Click OK to apply the formatting changes and return to the Design pane.

Adding formatting to substituted text

When you add formatting to substituted text, ensure that you add the formatting outside the curly braces, for example:
How long did the vacation in {@VacationLoop} last? Figure 9-16 Question text with substituted text formatted in bold

Adding line breaks

You can split text over two lines, or add a line space after the text, by adding one or more tags. This example adds extra line breaks between the text in a page header and the ﬁrst question:
It would be helpful if you could also answer the following optional questions:

this example adds extra line breaks after the 61 and over response:
61 and over

226 Chapter 9 Figure 9-17 Questions on page with additional line breaks after page text and between responses

Advanced Text Editor
The Advanced Text Editor provides advanced text editing capabilities. The editor provides the same features as those available from the Formatting toolbar (with the exception of the indentation options), and can be accessed by clicking the ellipsis (...) button that appears throughout the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author interface. For more information, see the topic The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author toolbar buttons in Chapter 4 on p. 48.

Advanced Category Editor
The Advanced Category Editor provides advanced category editing capabilities. The editor supports the same options as those available from the Design pane’s context (right-click) menu. The editor is composed of three main areas:
Responses – lists the question responses and their associated column attributes. Custom Properties – lists any user-deﬁned custom properties for the selected response. This

pane can be hidden from view by means of the View menu.
Advanced Properties – displays advanced property options for the selected response. This pane

can be hidden from view by means of the View menu.
E After applying the appropriate changes, click Close to close the editor and return to the Design

pane.
Custom property values

When entering custom property values, the application will automatically convert values as follows: Convert numeric character to a long if the value allows it. Convert decimal and numeric character to a double if the value allows it.

227 Formatting questionnaires

Convert non-numeric characters to a string. If the string value is a double-quoted numeric type (“123” or “123.4”), the value is saved it without the quotes. Convert True/true and False/false to boolean values.
Table 9-1 Converted data types

Entered value abc 123 123.45 true false “123” “123.45” “true” “abc”

Converted data type string long double boolean boolean string string string quoted string (“abc” instead of abc)

Advanced Response Editor
The Advanced Response Editor provides advanced HTML editing capabilities for numeric grid based content. The editor supports the same options as those available from the Design pane’s context (right-click) menu. The editor is composed of three main areas:
Responses – lists the question responses and their associated column attributes. Custom Properties – lists any user-deﬁned custom properties for the selected response. This

pane can be hidden from view by means of the View menu.
Advanced Properties – displays advanced property options for the selected response. This pane

can be hidden from view by means of the View menu.
E After applying the appropriate changes, click Close to close the editor and return to the Design

pane.
Custom property values

When entering custom property values, the application will automatically convert values as follows: Convert numeric character to a long if the value allows it. Convert decimal and numeric character to a double if the value allows it. Convert non-numeric characters to a string. If the string value is a double-quoted numeric type (“123” or “123.4”), the value is saved it without the quotes. Convert True/true and False/false to boolean values.

228 Chapter 9 Table 9-2 Converted data types

Entered value abc 123 123.45 true false “123” “123.45” “true” “abc”

Converted data type string long double boolean boolean string string string quoted string (“abc” instead of abc)

Attaching images to responses
You can attach pictures to individual responses, so that they are displayed to the respondent in the questionnaire.
Figure 9-18 Attaching images to responses

Adding an image to a response
E Select the question in the Routings pane. If you have not done so, create the question and response

text.
E Choose the Design pane.

229 Formatting questionnaires E If the File ﬁeld is not displayed, click the Field Chooser icon and select File from the Field

Chooser dialog.
E In the File ﬁeld for each response, click the ... button and browse to the folder containing the

image you want to attach. Note: If the image you choose is not in the user project folder, when the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, the ﬁle is automatically copied to the user project folder.
E Select the appropriate image and click Open. E Repeat for all responses to which you want to attach images.

Note: If you select the same image for more than one response, a message appears asking whether you want to use the same image ﬁle or a ﬁle with a different name. This is because all the image ﬁles are saved in the same folder when you add them to the questionnaire: If you are using ﬁles with the same name that contain different images, choose to rename the ﬁles. If you are using the same ﬁle multiple times, choose to overwrite.
E Press Ctrl+S to save the ﬁle.

Note: When you attach an image to a response, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author copies the image ﬁle to a subfolder with the name FileName_ﬁles beneath the folder containing the questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle, where FileName is the name of the .mdd ﬁle. This means that if you make any changes to an image ﬁle in the original source location they are not reﬂected in the questionnaire. You need to copy the image ﬁle to the subfolder.

Using style templates
You can apply different presentation styles to a questionnaire to change the way that the questions are displayed in a web page. For example, you can specify fonts, add colors and images, and deﬁne the types of control displayed to the respondent. The presentation style is in the form of a style template (.htm) ﬁle. A number of style templates are provided with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. You can use any of these templates, or you can create your own template ﬁles or modify existing templates to your requirements. Detailed documentation on creating and modifying templates is available in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library, under:
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional > Interview Scripting > Writing Interview Scripts > Page Layout Facilities > Templates

If you create your own template ﬁles or modify existing templates, you can validate the HTML in the template ﬁle using the Validate Template dialog box. Note: When you attach a template to a questionnaire ﬁle, Author copies the template ﬁle to a subfolder with the name FileName_ﬁles beneath the folder containing the questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle, where FileName is the name of the .mdd ﬁle. If the template uses additional ﬁles or subfolders, these are also copied into the subfolder. This means that if you make any changes to a

230 Chapter 9

template ﬁle in the original source location they are not reﬂected in the questionnaire ﬁle. You need to copy the updated template ﬁle to the subfolder.

Applying a style template to a questionnaire
You can apply different presentation styles to a questionnaire to change the way that the questionnaire is displayed in a web page. For example, you can specify fonts, add colors and images, and deﬁne the types of control displayed to the respondent. The presentation style is in the form of a style template (.htm) ﬁle. A default style template is provided with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. This is the style that applies to all questionnaires unless you specify a different template. The name and location of the default style template is set in the View tab of the Options dialog box. You can attach a template to a questionnaire to override the default template, and you can also attach a different template to individual questions, overriding the questionnaire template.
Applying a style template to a questionnaire
E Select a routing in the Routings pane. E If it is not visible, display the Properties pane: Figure 9-19 Selecting the Properties pane

The Routing options are displayed in the Properties pane.
E Choose the ... button next to the Layout Template ﬁeld, and browse to the location of the template ﬁle

you want to use. By default, when the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from a local directory, templates are stored beneath the Documents and Settings\All Users folder, for example: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Author\Library\Templates. When the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, you can select templates that are stored in the user project folder, the role presentation style folder (for example, [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Interviewer Server\FMRoot\Roles\DPMAdmins\Templates\DataCollection), or the shared presentation styles folder (for example, [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Interviewer Server\FMRoot\Shared\Templates\DataCollection). If you select a ﬁle from a role folder or the shared folder, the ﬁle is automatically copied to the user project folder.
E Choose OK.

The template is applied to the questionnaire. You can see the results by displaying the questionnaire preview.

231 Formatting questionnaires

Applying a style template to a questionnaire from the Library

Alternatively, you can apply templates using the Library pane.
E If it is not visible, display the Library pane: Figure 9-20 Selecting the Library pane

E Expand the Templates folder and select the template you want to use. E Click Apply.

Applying a style template to an individual question
E Select the question in the Routings pane. E If it is not visible, display the Properties pane: Figure 9-21 Selecting the Properties pane

The Question options are displayed in the Properties pane.
E Click the ... button next to the Question Template ﬁeld, and browse to the location of the template ﬁle

you want to use. By default, when the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from a local directory, templates are stored beneath the Documents and Settings\All Users folder, for example: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Author\Library\Templates. When the questionnaire ﬁle is opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, you can select templates that are stored in the user project folder, the role presentation style folder (for example, [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Interviewer Server\FMRoot\Roles\DPMAdmins\Templates\DataCollection), or the shared presentation styles folder (for example, [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Interviewer Server\FMRoot\Shared\Templates\DataCollection). If you select a ﬁle from a role folder or the shared folder, the ﬁle is automatically copied to the user project folder.
E Choose OK.

The template is applied to the question, overriding the style of the template applied to the full questionnaire. You can see the results by displaying a preview of the question or of the whole questionnaire.

232 Chapter 9

Creating a custom template
E Browse to the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author’s Templates

directory (by default, C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Author\Library\Templates).
E Create a custom template (.htm) from scratch, or copy an existing template and modify it as

desired to suit your needs.
E Copy your new custom template into the Templates directory. E Follow the instructions in Applying a style template to an individual question or Applying a style

template to a questionnaire to apply your new custom template. You can see the results by displaying a preview of the question or of the whole questionnaire. Note: Your custom template will not appear in the Library until after you restart Author.

Changing the default template
You can set a default style template for all new questionnaires that you create. You can also set a separate default template for grid questions.
Changing the default style template
E From the menu, choose Tools > Options

In the View tab, choose the Browse button next to the Default template for new questionnaires ﬁeld, and browse to the location of your style template.
E Choose OK.

The template becomes the default for all new questionnaires that you create.

Using question templates
You can apply the Calendar or Slider question template to an existing question in your questionnaire. This inserts the calendar tool or sliding number selection tool into your question response. For details about these templates, see Using a question template. You can also apply a custom question template you created.
E Select the question you want to apply the template to. Supported question types for question

templates are Single Response, Multiple Response, True or False, Numeric, Text, Date/Time, and Display Text.

233 Formatting questionnaires E If the Properties pane is not showing, display it: Figure 9-22 Selecting the Library pane

The Question options are displayed in the Properties pane.
E Click the ... button beside the Question Template ﬁeld. E Browse to the location of the template ﬁle you want to use. By default, all templates are stored

in the Documents and Settings\All Users folder (for example, C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Author\Library\Questions\Question Types). Select Calendar.htm, Slider.htm, or a custom template ﬁle you created, and click Open.
E The question template is applied to the question you selected. See the results by previewing the

question. Note: You can also insert question templates from the Library under Questions\Question Types.

Testing questionnaires

10

Chapter

You can test your questionnaires in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author by previewing individual questions or whole questionnaires. You can preview questionnaires in Web, phone, or data entry format. If you have IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper you can use it to preview the questionnaire in paper format. You can also test your questionnaire by allowing Author to run a preview a number of times and ﬁll in random answers, using the Auto Answer option. In addition, you can validate both the questionnaire ﬁle and the template ﬁle that you are using, to check for common errors. You can also view the underlying script created by Author, and copy it for use in other applications. You can carry out all these tests on your local machine, without uploading the questionnaire to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server. Once you have tested the questionnaire on your machine, you can activate it in test mode. This uploads the questionnaire to an Interviewer Server. Note: Once you activate a questionnaire, either in test mode or live mode, subsequent changes are saved as new versions in the questionnaire ﬁle. This means that the changes are never deleted, which may not be what you want if you are still editing the questionnaire and correcting errors. Previewing a questionnaire is therefore a useful way of testing that the questions and responses appear as you expect them to, before activating the questionnaire.

Previewing questions
You can preview individual questions to verify that they display as expected, without activating the questionnaire. You can preview a question as you are creating it, alternating between making changes to the question settings and running a preview to see how the latest changes appear. If you have attached style templates to the questionnaire, the question is displayed in the style deﬁned in the templates. For more information, see the topic Using style templates in Chapter 9 on p. 229. You can also use a question template for questions. For more information, see the topic Using a question template in Chapter 6 on p. 168. Note: When working with questionnaire ﬁles that are opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, previewing WEB and PHONE questionnaires is performed on the server, while previewing Data Entry questionnaires is performed on the local machine.
Previewing a question
E In the Routings pane, select the question that you want to preview. E Select the Preview Question pane. If the pane is not available, select it from the View menu: View > Question Preview Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 234

235 Testing questionnaires

or press Ctrl+Q. The question is displayed in a separate pane.
E To switch between a Web view of the question and a telephone interview view, choose the Web or Phone tab at the bottom of the pane. E To preview a different question, select another question from the Routings pane.

Notes: Question preview is used to preview an individual question, and does not test how multiple questions will interact with each other. If you want to test the question, you will need to use the Interview Preview option instead of Question Preview. If you use HTML formatting in your question (for example, if you manually add formatting or edit existing HTML formatting), the HTML tags used must be well-formed HTML, otherwise they may not be recognized as HTML and will appear as plain text (full tags will be displayed) when previewing the question. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author retains the authoring mode between sessions. If you were working in HTML mode in a previous session, Author will automatically place you HTML mode when you re-launch the application.

Previewing questionnaires
Previewing a questionnaire is a useful way of testing that the questions and responses appear as you expect them to, without activating the questionnaire. You can preview a questionnaire as you are creating it, alternating between making changes to the question settings and running a preview to see how the latest changes appear in the online questionnaire. If you have attached style templates to your questionnaire, the questions are displayed in the style deﬁned in the templates. For more information, see the topic Using style templates in Chapter 9 on p. 229. Note: When working with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition, you must ﬁrst save the active document before you will be allowed to preview the questionnaire.
Previewing a questionnaire
E In the Routings pane, choose the routing that you want to preview. E From the menu, choose View > Interview Preview

or press Ctrl+Shift+I. The questionnaire is displayed full screen, one page at a time.
E To switch between the Web view, the telephone interview view, and the data entry view, choose the Web, Phone, or Data Entry tab at the bottom of the dialog box. When the questionnaire ﬁle is

opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, Web and Phone previewing is run on the server; Data Entry previewing is run on the local machine.

236 Chapter 10 E Choose the next or back buttons to move through the questionnaire and check that the text and

layout are correct.
E Click New Case to restart the interview preview (return the questionnaire back to its beginning). E Click Close to close the preview and return to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author.

Notes: If you have set up any of the questions so that a response is required rather than optional, you will need to enter a response of some kind in order to continue moving through the questionnaire. If you use HTML formatting in your question (for example, if you manually add formatting or edit existing HTML formatting), the HTML tags used must be well-formed HTML, otherwise they may not be recognized as HTML and will appear as plain text (full tags will be displayed) when previewing the question. Author retains the authoring mode between sessions. If you were working in HTML mode in a previous session, Author will automatically place you HTML mode when you re-launch the application. When additional response details are deﬁned for the questionnaire, and the questionnaire is then previewed on the Phone tab or activated, the keyboard shortcuts for the additional responses are presented as Ctrl+1, Ctrl+2 or Ctrl+3. When entering case data in Data Entry mode, the user interface only displays responses that are currently being entered. If default answers are already present, the answers will be written to the database but will not be visible in the user interface at the time of initial entry. If the case is reopened in Data Entry Player, the defaults answers will be visible, as the data is read from the database for display in Data Entry Player. You can record case data when previewing a questionnaire. This recorded case data can be used during auto answer playback. For more information, see the topic Auto Answer dialog box on p. 245. In Data Entry mode, you can use the right-click context menu to: – Select which panels display – Select which columns appear in the Question List panel – Save or restore saved settings – Restore the default settings
Keyboard navigation

The following keyboard shortcuts are available when previewing questionnaires:
Table 10-1 Phone tab shortcuts

Key Tab Up arrow

Description Switch between different questions by placing focus on the Next button Previous question

237 Testing questionnaires

Key Down Arrow Esc

Description Next question Stop or end interview

Table 10-2 Data Entry tab shortcuts

Key Tab Ctrl+Tab

Description Switch between controls within the currently docked frame Switch between docked frames

Previewing IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper questionnaires
If you have IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper installed, you can preview your questionnaire in paper format. Note that if you have Paper installed, Print and Print Preview in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author will prompt you to select a Look Group and will automatically launch Paper. For details about Look Groups, see the Paper User’s Guide.
Previewing a questionnaire in paper format
E Save your questionnaire ﬁle in Author. E Open Paper from the Windows Start menu: Programs > IBM Corp. > IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 > Paper > Paper E From the Paper menu, choose Load Questionnaire. E In the Load dialog box, use the Look in: ﬁeld to browse to the location where you saved the

questionnaire ﬁle, and select the ﬁle.
E In the Look Group ﬁeld, select the Look Group you want to use with the ﬁle. E In the Routings ﬁeld, select the name of your paper routing (for example, Paper_Survey). E Change any other options as desired, and click Open. If you have the ﬁle open in Author, a

message appears saying the ﬁle will open in read-only format. Paper loads the questionnaire ﬁle and displays it using the formatting in the selected Look Group. For further information, see the Paper User’s Guide. Note: If you have Paper installed, you can also use Print and Print Preview to launch Paper from Author. For more information, see the topic Printing questionnaires in Chapter 4 on p. 55.

Validating questionnaire files
You can validate your questionnaire ﬁles before previewing or activating them, to check for any inconsistencies in the questions and routing items that you have created. When you validate a ﬁle, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author checks that the script created by the ﬁle is correct, and displays any errors in the script. For more information, see the topic Viewing the questionnaire script on p. 238.

238 Chapter 10

Validating a questionnaire file
E From the menu, choose Tools > Validate Document

or press Alt+T, V.
E The Document Validation dialog box opens and displays any errors found during validation.

Viewing the questionnaire script
When you create a questionnaire using IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author, the questions and routing items that you create are stored in the questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle in the form of a script. The script is written using the Interview Scripting Language. It is not necessary to understand the script underlying the questionnaire ﬁle in order to use Author, as the user interface provides the options necessary to create many types of questionnaire without using the scripting language. However, if you are creating complex questionnaires, you may ﬁnd that there are some things you want to do that require you to edit the script directly. You cannot edit the script in Author, but you can open .mdd ﬁles created using Author in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional. Base Professional provides an integrated development environment that enables you to create, edit, run, and debug scripts. If you use Base Professional to edit scripts, you may ﬁnd it useful to view the script that Author creates as you add questions and routing items to your questionnaire ﬁle, so that you can see the effect of a change in the user interface on the underlying script. You can do this using the View Script dialog box.
Viewing the script for a questionnaire
E In the Routings pane, select the routing for which you want to view the script. E From the menu, choose Tools > View Script

or press Alt+T, S. The View Script dialog box displays the script for the selected routing in the currently open questionnaire ﬁle. This consists of the following sections: Script header section Error handler section Routing section Metadata section These sections are described in more detail below. You may want to reuse parts of the script in your own script ﬁles using Base Professional. You can copy or save the contents of the View Script dialog box and use the saved ﬁle as a source of script snippets.

239 Testing questionnaires E To copy the contents of the View Script dialog box, choose the Copy All button. You can then

paste the copied text into a text ﬁle.
E To save the contents of the View Script dialog box directly to a ﬁle, choose the Save As button,

then browse to a location where you want to save the ﬁle. The ﬁle is saved with the extension .ivs. You can then open the ﬁle created using either of these methods in a text editor or in Base Professional and edit it as required, before pasting the required items into an .mdd ﬁle in Base Professional (you will need to add the routing and metadata sections separately and remove the line numbering and other unwanted sections). Note: Base Professional does not recognize ﬁles saved from the View Script dialog box as valid .mdd ﬁles, but simply as text ﬁles. This is because the View Script dialog box simply displays and copies the text from the .mdd ﬁle rather than including the xml structure that enables IBM® SPSS® Data Collection applications to interpret it as a metadata ﬁle. The View Script dialog box is intended for viewing scripts and to provide a quick method of copying snippets of script from the ﬁle for use in another script. If you want to edit a ﬁle that you have created using Author in Base Professional, simply save and close the ﬁle in Author and then open the .mdd ﬁle directly in Base Professional.
Script sections in the View Script dialog box

The Interview Scripting Language is fully described in the Interview Scripting topics in the Base Professional section of the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library. To provide an overview of how the script corresponds to the options that you select in Author, the following samples show the script sections from an .mdd ﬁle created using the topics in the Getting Started section of this help ﬁle. For more information, see the topic Getting started in Chapter 3 on p. 6.
Script header

This section contains information about how and when the script was created. It is automatically generated for use in debugging ﬁles created in Author.
0 : '— Script header — 1 : 'NOTE: changes in this section are ignored, to edit remove above comment 2 : ' Interview script created by Routing Script MDSC (Unicode) 3 : ' mrRoutingScriptDsc 1.0.7.2692 4 : ' Date/time script generated: 2007-07-11 12:51 5: 6 : '— script header — End 7:

This section is displayed in one of the routing tabs when you open the .mdd ﬁle in Base Professional.
Error handler

This section contains some error handling script for use with Web interviews.

240 Chapter 10 8 : '— Error handler — 9 : 'NOTE: changes in this section are ignored, to edit remove above comment 10 : If Not IOM.Info.IsDebug Then On Error Goto __DefaultErrHandler 11 : Goto __StartOfScript 12 : 13 : __DefaultErrHandler: 14 : Dim __err_msg, __error 15 : __err_msg = "Script error at line " + CText(Err.LineNumber) + ", " + Err.Description 16 : IOM.Log(__err_msg, LogLevels.LOGLEVEL_ERROR) 17 : If IOM.Info.IsTest Then 18 : IOM.Banners.AddNew("__ScriptErrMsg" + CText(__error), __err_msg) 19 : __error = __error + 1 20 : End If 21 : Resume Next 22 : 23 : __StartOfScript: 24 : '— error handler — End 25 :

This section is displayed in the Web routing tab when you open the .mdd ﬁle in Base Professional.
Routing section

This section lists all the questions that are asked as part of the routing. If more than one routing exists in your questionnaire, the View Script dialog box displays the routing that is currently selected in the Routings pane. It also contains any routing items such as Exit statements, Go To statements, or script items, that you add to the ﬁle. Information that changes how a question appears in the routing is also shown here, including templates attached to routings or to questions, and routing options speciﬁed in the Properties pane, for example, whether to hide the question or whether the question requires a response. Note: When you open an .mdd ﬁle in Base Professional, each routing section is displayed in a separate tab. This is the script produced by the Web_Survey routing section of the ﬁle created using the topics in the Getting started section of this help ﬁle. It names the template attached to the routing using the statement IOM.LayoutTemplate = "People_Working_Red_Layout.htm", and then lists each question that forms part of the routing, using the statements QuestionName.Ask. Questions where the Response Required box is checked are indicated by the statement QuestionName.MustAnswer = True. The statement Page.Ask indicates the questions that are grouped in a page. The Email question includes the statement Email.MustAnswer = false to indicate that the Response Required box is unchecked, and also contains statements indicating the changes made to resize the text box for the response.
26 : IOM.LayoutTemplate = "People_Working_Red_Layout.htm" 27 : 28 : Title.MustAnswer = true 29 : Title.Show() 30 : 31 : InstantOrGround.MustAnswer = true 32 : InstantOrGround.Ask()

241 Testing questionnaires 33 : 34 : HowMany.MustAnswer = true 35 : HowMany.Ask() 36 : 37 : DrinkCoffees.MustAnswer = true 38 : DrinkCoffees.Ask() 39 : 40 : FavoriteCoffee.MustAnswer = true 41 : FavoriteCoffee.Ask() 42 : 43 : CoffeeTime.MustAnswer = true 44 : CoffeeTime.Ask() 45 : 46 : '— Start of page Page — 47 : 48 : 49 : Page.Ask() 50 : '— of page Page — End 51 : 52 : Email.MustAnswer = false 53 : Email.Style.Columns = 50 54 : Email.Style.Rows = 1 55 : Email.Ask()

Metadata section

This section contains information about all the questions that exist in the ﬁle, whether or not they are part of any routing. The questions are displayed in the order in which they are shown in the Questions pane. This section also contains information that you have speciﬁed about the structure of the question using the Properties pane, for example, minimum and maximum values, or the ordering of the responses in a question. Note: When you open an .mdd ﬁle in Base Professional, the metadata section is displayed in a separate tab. This is the script produced by the metadata section of the ﬁle created using the topics in the Getting Started section. The section is bounded by the words Metadata and End Metadata. It indicates the default template and the template location (this location depends on where you save the questionnaire ﬁle). It then deﬁnes all the shared lists and questions in the ﬁle and also deﬁnes a page containing the two questions age and gender.
56 : Metadata (en-GB, Question, Label) 57 : 58 : HDATA 59 : [ 60 : Template = "DefaultLayout.htm", 61 : TemplateLocation = "E:\My Questionnaire Files\Coffee Survey 2007_files" 62 : ]; 63 : 64 : CoffeeList "" define

242 Chapter 10 65 : 66 : 67 : 68 : 69 : 70 : 71 : 72 : 73 : 74 : 75 : 76 : 77 : 78 : 79 : 80 : 81 : 82 : 83 : 84 : 85 : 86 : 87 : 88 : 89 : 90 : 91 : 92 : 93 : 94 : 95 : 96 : 97 : 98 : 99 : 100 : 101 : 102 : 103 : 104 : 105 : 106 : 107 : 108 : 109 : 110 : 111 : 112 : 113 : 114 : 115 : 116 : { Costa_Rican "Costa Rican", Columbian "Columbian", Java "Java", Italian_Blend "Italian Blend", Brazilian "Brazilian" }; Title "Survey of Coffee-Drinking Habits 2007" info; InstantOrGround "Do you usually drink instant or ground coffee?" categorical [1..1] { Instant "Instant", Ground "Ground", Don_t_drink_coffee "Don't drink coffee" }; HowMany "How many cups of coffee do you drink in an average day?" long [0..50]; DrinkCoffees "Please say which of these coffees you have ever tried." categorical [1.. ] { use CoffeeList sublist "" }; FavoriteCoffee "Which of these types of coffee is your favorite?" categorical [1..1] { use CoffeeList sublist "" }; CoffeeTime "At what time do you have your first cup of coffee of the day?" date; Email "Please enter your email address." text; age "What is your age?" categorical [..1] { _18_to_24 "18 to 24" exclusive, _25_to_34 "25 to 34" exclusive, _35_to_44 "35 to 44" exclusive, _45_to_54 "45 to 54" exclusive, _55_to_60 "55 to 60" exclusive, _61_and_over "61 and over" exclusive, Response7 "Refuse" exclusive };

243 Testing questionnaires 117 : gender "What is your gender?" 118 : categorical [..1] 119 : { 120 : Male "Male" exclusive, 121 : Female "Female" exclusive 122 : }; 123 : 124 : Page 125 : page( 126 : age, 127 : gender 128 : ); 129 : 130 : End Metadata 131 :

For an introduction to the Interview Scripting Language, see the topics under
Base Professional > Interview Scripting > Getting Started

in the Data Collection Developer Library.

Validating style templates
Style template ﬁles must be written using well-formed HTML. If you have created your own template or edited an existing template, you can check your template ﬁle for HTML that is not well-formed and automatically correct it using the Validate Template dialog box.
Validating a template file
E From the menu, choose Tools > Validate Template

or press Alt+T, T.
E Choose Open and browse to the folder where your template is saved, then choose Open.

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author opens the ﬁle, checks the template for HTML statements that are not well-formed, and silently corrects them. The corrected output is displayed in the dialog box.
E Choose Save As and browse to the folder where you want to save the corrected ﬁle. Enter a name for the ﬁle and choose Save.

Generating test answers for an interview
You can run a test interview and have IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author ﬁll in random answers, allowing you to verify your interview works under realistic circumstances. For example, you can verify that all questions are being answered. If one of your questions is not being answered at all, you can check your routing to make sure it is being asked correctly in the Routing section. You do this using the Auto Answer feature.

244 Chapter 10

Notes: When working with questionnaire ﬁles that are opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, Auto Answer is performed on the server. If you want to save the Auto Answer results to a data source, see Saving auto answer data to a data source before performing the following steps.
Running an interview using Auto Answer

Note: When working with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition, you must ﬁrst save the active document before you will be allowed to use Auto Answer.
E In the Routings pane, select the routing you want to test. E From the menu, choose Tools > Auto Answer > Start Auto Answer

or press Alt+T, U. The Auto Answer dialog box is displayed.
E Enter the appropriate settings in the Auto Answer dialog box and click OK.

Author runs the interview based on the auto answer parameters you deﬁned in the Auto Answer dialog box. Details of the questions and answers are listed in the Answer Log pane.

Setting up hints for auto answer tests
When you test your interviews using the Auto Answer feature, you can add hints to help IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author enter valid answers for some question types. For example, if you have a date/time question, Author is not able to generate a random answer that constitutes a valid date or time within a short number of tries. Therefore, you can add hints to the question to increase the chances of entering a valid answer. You do this using the Advanced Properties pane.
Adding hints to questions
E In the Routings pane, select the question to which you want to add a hint. E Display the Advanced Properties pane. E In the AutoAnswer Custom Properties section, enter one of the following custom properties:

Allowed Categories AutoAnswer Max AutoAnswer Min AutoAnswerValue
Notes

245 Testing questionnaires

Auto answer playback provides a more direct method for providing question values. For more information, see the topic Auto Answer dialog box on p. 245. Use caution when modifying advanced properties, as there is limited error validation. For complete details about advanced properties, see the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library (DDL).

Auto Answer dialog box
Use the Auto Answer dialog box to set options that control automatic generation of answers when you test questionnaires.
Response creation Create responses from a data source. When selected, auto answer playback is enabled during interviewing, and the auto answer questions are generated from a speciﬁed data source (the question values are set according to what is found in the data source). This setting is not selected by default. Random values are generated for questions that do not exist in the speciﬁed data source. When this setting is enabled, valid Data source connection, Select table, Select columns, and Specify where clause values are required. Data source connection. Use this ﬁeld to specify the data source connection string used in auto

answer playback (when the Create responses from a data source option is selected). Clicking the Edit button displays the Data Link Properties dialog that prompts you to input the appropriate data source information. Refer to For more information, see the topic Data Link Properties dialog box on p. 247. for information on working with the Data Link Properties dialog. Note: Some data source options are not available when working with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition. For example, there is no Edit button or Data Link Properties options. When working with Author Server Edition, you can conﬁgure the data source connection string by deﬁning %Project_Directory% in the Data source connection ﬁeld.
Select table. Indicate whether HDATA or VDATA will be used for querying the data source. Select columns. Select which data source columns will be used in the auto answer playback. Specify where clause. Use this ﬁeld to provide a valid select clause for querying the data

source.
Create responses using hints from .mdd. Select this option if you want IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author to refer to hints in the Advanced Properties tab when answering a question. For more information, see the topic Setting up hints for auto answer tests on p. 244. When the Create responses from a data source setting is enabled, the data source’s question values take priority over random values.

246 Chapter 10

Number of cases Create the same number of interviews as specified in the source above. Select this option when you want to create the same number of interviews as the record count in the speciﬁed data source. When selected, the total number of interviews created by ALL threads is equal to the source’s record count. The option is only available when the Create responses from a data source option is selected. Interviews to create. Enter the number of times you want the application to run the interview

and ﬁll in random answers for each question.
Maximum attempts to answer a question. Enter the maximum number of attempts that the application can have at generating a valid answer to a question. If that limit is exceeded, Auto Answer stops and displays an error message.

Saving auto answer data to a data source
After running an interview using Auto Answer, details of the questions and answers are listed in the Answer Log pane. You can save these details to a data source. Note: When working with questionnaire ﬁles that are opened from an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server, auto answer always generates a .ddf ﬁle in the User_Data directory (located in the user project directory). A data source deﬁnition is not provided.
Adding a data source definition

The Conﬁgure Data Source dialog provides options for adding, editing, and removing data sources. Note: The Conﬁgure Data Source dialog is not available when working with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition.
E From the menu, choose Tools > Conﬁgure Data Sources

or press Alt+T, F. The Conﬁgure Data Source dialog is displayed.
E Click Add… or press Alt+A. The Data Link Properties dialog displays. E Enter the required information on each tab of the Data Link Properties dialog and click OK when

ﬁnished. For more information, see the topic Data Link Properties dialog box on p. 247.
E Click OK to exit the Conﬁgure Data Source dialog.

Selecting a different data source definition
E Select the appropriate data source from the Conﬁgure Data Source dialog’s Data Source list, then click Set As Current or press Alt+S. The selected data source is set as the current data source.

247 Testing questionnaires E Click OK to exit the Conﬁgure Data Source dialog.

Editing a data source definition
E Select the appropriate data source from the Conﬁgure Data Source dialog’s Data Source list, then click Edit... or press Alt+E. The Data Link Properties dialog displays. E Enter the required information on each tab of the Data Link Properties dialog and click OK when

ﬁnished. For more information, see the topic Data Link Properties dialog box on p. 247.
E Click OK to exit the Conﬁgure Data Source dialog.

Removing a data source definition
E Select the appropriate data source from the Conﬁgure Data Source dialog’s Data Source list, then click Remove or press Alt+R. The selected data source is removed. E Click OK to exit the Conﬁgure Data Source dialog.

Saving the auto answer details to a data source

To save the results to a data source when you run Auto Answer, you must ﬁrst perform the following step after setting up your data source:
E From the menu, choose Tools > Write Data to Database

or press Alt+T, W.

Data Link Properties dialog box
The Data Link Properties dialog box has the following tabs: Provider - provides options for selecting the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access. Connection - provides access to the Metadata Properties and Metadata Versions dialog boxes Advanced - provides options for deﬁning additional connection options. All - provides options for editing the initialization properties that are available for the chosen Provider.

Data Link Properties: Provider
You use the Provider tab in the Data Link Properties dialog box to select the provider you want to use.

248 Chapter 10

Selecting the appropriate OLE DB Provider

To connect to the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model, select IBM® SPSS® Data Collection DM-n OLE DB Provider (where n is the version number) from the list of OLE DB Providers. To connect to another provider, select the appropriate entry from the list of OLE DB Providers (for example to select a Microsoft SQL Server provider, select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server from the list). Refer to the appropriate database provider documentation for information on conﬁguring connection strings.

Data Link Properties: Connection
You use the Connection tab in the Data Link Properties dialog box to deﬁne the name, location, and type of the data to which you want to connect. When you select IBM® SPSS® Data Collection DM-n OLE DB Provider (where n is the version number) on the Provider tab, an Data Collection-speciﬁc Connection tab is displayed.

249 Testing questionnaires

Metadata Type. Deﬁnes the type of metadata. The drop-down list shows the types of metadata for

which you have a metadata source component (MDSC). The default options are:
None. Choose this option if you want to connect to case data only. Data Collection Metadata Document. Selects metadata that is in the standard IBM® SPSS®

Data Collection Data Model format, which is a questionnaire deﬁnition (.mdd) ﬁle.
ADO Database. Selects metadata that is in an ActiveX Data Objects (ADO) data source. Data Collection Log File. Selects metadata in a standard Data Collection log ﬁle. Data Collection Participation Database. Selects metadata that is in a IBM® SPSS® Data

Collection Interviewer Server Administration project’s Sample and HistoryTable tables.
Data Collection Scripting File. Selects metadata that is in a mrScriptMetadata ﬁle. In2data Database. Selects metadata that is in an In2data database (.i2d) ﬁle. Quancept Definitions File (QDI). Selects metadata in a IBM® SPSS® Quancept™ .qdi ﬁle

using the QDI/DRS DSC.
Quancept Script File. Writes the metadata in an MDM document to a Quancept script (.qqc) ﬁle. Quantum Specification. Writes the metadata in an MDM document to a IBM® SPSS®

Quantum™ speciﬁcation.
Quanvert Database. Selects metadata that is in a IBM® SPSS® Quanvert™ database. Routing Script File. Writes the routing section of an MDM document to a script that deﬁnes the

routing required for interviewing.
SPSS Statistics File (SAV). Selects metadata that is in an IBM® SPSS® Statistics .sav ﬁle. Surveycraft File. Selects metadata that is in a IBM® SPSS® Surveycraft™ Validated

Questionnaire (.vq) ﬁle.

250 Chapter 10

Metadata Location. The name and location of the metadata. The way you specify this depends on the type of metadata that you selected in the previous drop-down list: Data Collection Metadata Document. The name and location of the .mdd ﬁle. ADO Database. The name and location of a .adoinfo ﬁle, which is an XML ﬁle that speciﬁes

the connection string for the target data source and the name of the target table in that data source. For more information, see ADO DSC in the Data Model section of the DDL.
Data Collection Log File. The name and location of the log ﬁle. Typically log ﬁles have a

.tmp ﬁlename extension. However, some log ﬁles may have another ﬁlename extension. If necessary, you can rename the ﬁle so that it has a .tmp ﬁlename extension.
Data Collection Participation Database. The name and location of a Participants Report

Document (.prd) ﬁle, which is an XML ﬁle that speciﬁes the connection string and the names of the table and columns to be used.
Data Collection Scripting File. The name and location of the mrScriptMetadata ﬁle. Typically

these ﬁles have an .mdd or .dms ﬁlename extension.
In2data Database. The name and location of the .i2d ﬁle. Quancept Definitions File (QDI). The name and location of the .qdi ﬁle. Quancept Script File. The name and location of the .qqc ﬁle. Quantum Specification. The location of the Quantum speciﬁcation ﬁles. Quanvert Database. The name and location of the qvinfo or .pkd ﬁle. Routing Script File. The name and location of the routing script ﬁle. SPSS Statistics File (SAV). The name and location of the .sav ﬁle. Surveycraft File. The name and location of the .vq ﬁle.

Click Browse to select the ﬁle in the Open dialog box.
Open Metadata Read/Write. By default, the metadata is opened in read-only mode. Select this

option if you want to be able to write to it. When you open some types of data (for example, a Quanvert database) the metadata is always opened in read-only mode.
Properties. Click this button to open the Metadata Properties dialog box, in which you can specify

the versions, language, context, and label type to use. For more information, see the topic Data Link Properties: Metadata Properties on p. 252.
Case Data Type. Deﬁnes the type of case data. The drop-down list shows all of the types of case data for which you have a case data source component (CDSC). The default options are: ADO Database. Reads case data from an ActiveX Data Objects (ADO) data source. Delimited Text File (Excel). Writes case data in tab-delimited format to a .csv ﬁle. Data Collection Database (MS SQL Server). Reads and writes case data in a Data Collection

relational database in SQL Server. This option can be used to read data collected using IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server.
Data Collection Log File. Selects the Log DSC, which enables you to read Data Collection

log ﬁles.
Data Collection XML Data File. Reads and writes case data in an XML ﬁle. Typically, you use

this option when you want to transfer case data to another location.

251 Testing questionnaires

In2data Database. Reads case data from an In2data Database (.i2d ) ﬁle. Quancept Data File (DRS). Reads case data in a Quancept.drs, .drz, or .dru ﬁle using the

QDI/DRS DSC.
Quantum Data File (DAT). Selects the Quantum DSC, which reads and writes case data in a

Quantum-format ASCII ﬁle.
Quanvert Database. Selects the Quanvert DSC, which reads data in a Quanvert database. SPSS Statistics File (SAV). Reads and writes case data in an SPSS Statistics .sav ﬁle. Surveycraft File. Reads case data from a Surveycraft data ﬁle.

Tip: If you have speciﬁed a Metadata Type and a Metadata Location, and the default data source in your metadata refers to the case data that you want to connect to, you don’t need to specify a Case Data Type or a Case Data Location.
Case Data Location. The name and location of the case data. The way you specify this depends on

the type of case data that you selected in the previous drop-down list:
ADO Database. The OLE DB connection string for the ADO data source. To build this string,

click Browse, which opens a second Data Link Properties dialog box in which you can choose the options for your data source. For example, to connect to a Microsoft Access database or a Microsoft Excel ﬁle, select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers in the Provider tab and click the Build button in the Connection tab to build a connection string that uses the Machine Data Source called “MS Access Database” or “Excel Files” as appropriate. If your data source is a Microsoft SQL Server database that is not a Data Collection relational database, select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server in the Provider tab and enter the server name and database name in the Connection tab. Then click OK to close the second Data Link Properties dialog box and return to the Connection tab of the ﬁrst Data Link Properties dialog box.
Delimited Text File (Excel). The name and location of the .csv ﬁle. Data Collection Database (MS SQL Server). This must be an OLE DB connection string. For

more information, see Connecting to a Relational MR Database Using RDB DSC 2 in the Data Model section of the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library.
Data Collection Log File. The name and location of the log ﬁle. Typically log ﬁles have a

.tmp ﬁlename extension. However, some log ﬁles may have another ﬁlename extension. If necessary, you can rename the ﬁle so that it has a .tmp ﬁlename extension.
Data Collection XML Data File. The name and location of the .xml ﬁle. In2data Database. The name and location of the .i2d ﬁle. Quancept Data File (DRS). The name and location of the .drs, .drz, or .dru ﬁle. Quantum Data File (DAT). The name and location of the .dat ﬁle. If a .dau ﬁle is created, it will

have the same name, but with the ﬁle name extension of .dau.
Quanvert Database. The name and location of the qvinfo or .pkd ﬁle. SPSS Statistics File (SAV). The name and location of the .sav ﬁle. Surveycraft File. The name and location of the Surveycraft Validated Questionnaire (.vq) ﬁle.

The Surveycraft .qdt ﬁle, which contains the actual case data, must be in the same folder as the .vq ﬁle. Click Browse if you want to browse to the location of the case data in a dialog box.

252 Chapter 10

Case Data Project. This text box should be blank, unless you are connecting to one of the

following case data types:
ADO Database. If you are connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server database (that is not a Data

Collection relational database) or a Microsoft Access database, enter the name of the database table that you want to use. If you are connecting to a Microsoft Excel ﬁle, enter the name of the worksheet that you want to use, for example, Sheet1. Depending on the version of Excel installed, you may have to add a dollar sign ($) after the worksheet name for the connection to be successful, for example, Sheet1$.
Data Collection Database (MS SQL Server). Enter the name of the project that you want to use. Test Connection. Click this button to test the connection and verify whether you have entered all

information correctly.

Data Link Properties: Metadata Properties
You use the Metadata Properties dialog box to deﬁne the version, language, context, and label type that you want to use when you connect to a questionnaire deﬁnition (.mdd) ﬁle (also known as IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Metadata Document ﬁle). You open this dialog box by clicking the Properties button in the Metadata section on the Connection tab in the Data Link Properties dialog box.

Version. Select the version or versions that you want to use. Questionnaire deﬁnition (.mdd) ﬁles typically contain versions, which record any changes to the content of the questionnaire. Typically, when the questionnaire changes (for example, a question or category is added or deleted) a new version is created and when the changes are complete, the version is locked. The drop-down list box displays all of the available versions plus three additional options: All versions. Select this option if you want to use a combination (superset) of all of the

available versions. (This is sometimes called a superversion). When there is a conﬂict between the versions, the most recent versions generally take precedence over the older versions. For example, if a category label differs in any of the versions, the text in the latest version will be used. However the order of questions and categories is always taken from the most recent version and there is special handling of changes to loop deﬁnition ranges and the minimum and maximum values of variables, similar to that described for the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Metadata Model Version Utility in The Master Version in a Merge Operation

253 Testing questionnaires

in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model section of the DDL. Use the Multiple Versions option if you want to change the order of precedence.
Multiple versions. Select this option if you want to use a combination (superset) of two or

more speciﬁc versions. For more information, see the topic Data Link Properties: Metadata Versions on p. 253.
Latest version. Select this option if you want to use the most recent version.

Using a combination of some or all of the versions is useful when, for example, you want to export case data for more than one version and there have been changes to the variable and category deﬁnitions that mean that case data collected with one version is not valid in another version. Selecting all of the versions for which you want to export the case data, means that generally you can export the case data collected with the different versions at the same time without encountering validity errors due to the differences between the versions. However, depending on the version changes, some validity errors may still be encountered.
Language. Select the language you want to use. You can change the language only if there is more than one language deﬁned. Context. Select the user context you want to use. The user context controls which texts are

displayed. For example, select Question to display question texts, or Analysis to display shorter texts suitable for displaying when analyzing the data.
LabelType. Select the label type you want to use. You should generally select the Label option.

Data Link Properties: Metadata Versions
You use the Metadata Versions dialog box when you want to select two or more versions of the questionnaire deﬁnition (.mdd) ﬁle. You open this dialog box by selecting Multiple Versions in the Version drop-down list box in the Metadata Properties dialog box.

254 Chapter 10

Versions. The Metadata Versions dialog box lists all of the versions that are available. Click Select All to select all of the versions. Click Clear All to deselect all of the versions and then select the

versions you want individually. For each version, the following information is shown:
Version. The version name. Version names are made up of a combination of the major version

and minor version numbers in the form Major#:Minor#, where Major# is the number of the major version and Minor# is the number of the minor version. Changes in the major version number indicate that the structure of the case data has changed (for example, variables or categories have been added or deleted) whereas changes in the minor version number indicate that the changes affect the metadata only (for example, a question text has been changed). Version names are created automatically when a version is locked. A version that has not been locked is always called LATEST.
Created by. The ID of the user who created the version. Created Date. This shows the date and time at which the version was locked. Description. When present, this is a text that gives information about the version.

The order in which you select the versions controls the order of precedence that will generally be used when there is a conﬂict between the versions. For example, if a category label differs in the versions you select, the text in the version with the higher precedence will be used. However the order of questions and categories is always taken from the most recent version and there is special handling of changes to loop deﬁnition ranges and the minimum and maximum values of variables, similar to that described for the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Metadata Model Version Utility in The Master Version in a Merge Operation in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model section of the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library. If you want the most recent version to take precedence, start selecting the versions at the top and work down the list. If you want the oldest version to take precedence, start at the bottom and work up the list. Note that you can select multiple versions by pressing Ctrl or Shift while you click. Tip. You can select individual or multiple versions by pressing Ctrl or Shift while you click, provided the mouse is in the Description or Date/Time Locked column. You can then click in the Version column to select or deselect the check boxes for all of the versions that you have selected. You may ﬁnd this useful when you are working in a ﬁle that has many versions.
Selected Versions. Displays an expression that represents the selection you have chosen. You can

optionally select the versions you want to use by typing an expression directly into this text box. The order of precedence is taken from the order in which versions are speciﬁed, with the rightmost versions taking precedence over the leftmost.
Syntax
..

v1, v2, v3, v4 v1..v2 ^v1..v2

Description Speciﬁes all versions Speciﬁes individual versions Speciﬁes an inclusive range of versions Excludes a range of versions Speciﬁes the most recent version.

255 Testing questionnaires

You can specify a combination of individual versions, and ranges to include or exclude. For example, the following speciﬁes version 3:2 and all versions from 4:5 to 7:3 with the exception of versions 7 through 7:2:
3:2, 4:5..7:3, ^7..7:2

See Version Expressions in the Data Model section of the DDL for more information.

Data Link Properties: Advanced
You use the Advanced tab in the Data Link Properties dialog box to deﬁne additional connection options. When you select IBM® SPSS® Data Collection DM-n OLE DB Provider (where n is the version number) on the Provider tab, an Data Collection-speciﬁc Advanced tab is displayed.

If existing Data Source has a different location. The Data Model uses the DataSource object to store

details about case data that is associated with an MDM Document (.mdd ﬁle). This option speciﬁes what should happen if there is no DataSource object in the MDM Document with the same case data type whose location matches the case data location speciﬁed on the Connection tab:
Use the Data Source (except for location). This is the default behavior. Select this option if

you want to use the ﬁrst DataSource object of the same type that is encountered and do not want to store the new case data location in it.
Use the Data Source and store the new location. Select this option if you want to use the ﬁrst

DataSource object of the same type that is encountered and store the new case data location in it.

256 Chapter 10

Create a new Data Source. Select this option if you want to create a new DataSource object.

This is useful when you do not want to use the same variable names when exporting to SPSS .sav as used previously.
Raise an Error. Select this option if you want the connection to fail.

For more information, see About the MDM DataSource Object in the Data Collection Data Model section of the DDL.
Preserve source column definitions. Select this option if you want the native objects in the

underlying database to be exposed directly as Data Model variables without any interpretation. For example, if you select this option, a multiple dichotomy set in a .sav ﬁle would be represented as several long or text variables instead of one categorical variable.
Reading categorical data. Speciﬁes whether to display the categories of categorical variables as

numeric values or names.
Writing data. Speciﬁes whether the CDSC deletes the output data, if it exists, before writing

new data. The options are as follows:
Append to existing data. This is the default behavior. Select this option if you want to append

to the existing data if it exists.
Replace existing data. Select this option if you want to delete the existing data and schema.

This will allow data to be created with a different schema.
Replace existing data but preserve schema. Select this option if you want to delete the existing

data, but preserve the existing schema if possible. Note that for some CDSCs, such as SPSS SAV and Delimited Text, the schema will not be preserved because deleting the data results in the loss of the schema.
Perform data validation. Select if you want case data to be validated before it is written. Deselect if

you do not want any validity checks to be performed on case data before it is written.
Allow dirty data. Select if you have chosen data validation, and you want to run in dirty mode.

This means that data is accepted even if it has some inconsistencies. Deselect this option to run in clean mode, which means that data is rejected if it contains any inconsistencies (for example, if more than one response has been selected in answer to a single response question). The validation that is performed varies according to the CDSC that is selected.

Data Link Properties: All
You can use the All tab in the Data Link Properties dialog box to edit all of the initialization properties that are available for the Provider. However, generally you deﬁne the values for the properties on the Connection and Advanced tabs.

257 Testing questionnaires

The All tab lists all of the initialization properties and you can edit the values by selecting a property and clicking Edit Value. For detailed information about the connection properties, see Connection Properties in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model section of the DDL.

Activating questionnaires

11

Chapter

To release a questionnaire online, you need to activate it. The Activation process uploads the questionnaire ﬁle to an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server and creates an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project for it. It also creates a set of web pages for the questionnaire and provides a URL link to the web site containing the pages. Respondents can then access the web site and take the questionnaire by following the link. Once you activate an interview, either in test mode or in live mode, any further changes that you make to the questionnaire ﬁle are saved in a separate version of the ﬁle. Interviewer Server updates the ﬁle and saves the changes with a new version number. The content of the ﬁle before the changes is always retained in an earlier version. This includes adding or deleting questions, and changing question types. It is therefore recommended that you test your interview using the Interview Preview option before activating the questionnaire, so that additions or deletions that you make in the course of designing your questionnaire are not permanently saved in the ﬁle. You can activate the questionnaire either as a test or live interview. A test interview works in the same way as creating a live interview, except that any data collected is ﬂagged as test data.
Activation user role implications

You cannot activate questionnaires (the Activate option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can activate in test mode activity role feature. You cannot activate questionnaires in Go live mode (the Go live option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can activate in active mode activity role feature. You cannot access advanced activation features (the More option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can view advanced activation settings activity role feature. You cannot modify advanced activation settings (the More option is enabled, but each setting is read-only and the Load local ﬁle... option is disabled) unless you are assigned to the Can edit advanced activation settings activity role feature. Refer to the Assigning users or roles to activity features topic in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for more information on user roles.
Activation permissions

Project does not exist in the Distributed Property Management (DPM) server: If the login user is assigned the canCreateProject activity feature, the user can activate the project (otherwise the user cannot activate the project). Project exists in the Distributed Property Management (DPM) server: If the login user is the owner of the project, the user can activate the project. Otherwise, the following rules apply: – If the project is not assigned to the login user, that user cannot activate the project.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 258

259 Activating questionnaires

– If the project is assigned to login user, a check is made to determine if the project is currently locked by login user. If yes, the user can activate the project, otherwise a check is made to determine if the user is assigned the canUnlockProject activity feature. If assigned the canUnlockProject activity feature, the user can activate the project (otherwise the user cannot activate the project). Refer to the Assigning users or roles to activity features topic in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for more information on user roles. The Activate button is disabled when unable to activate a project. Activation information is located in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Desktop log ﬁle.
Activating a questionnaire
E If you have not done so, save the questionnaire ﬁle. E Select the routing that you want to activate. E From the menu, choose Tools > Activate

or press Alt+T, A.
E In the Data Collection Login dialog box, enter (or select from the drop-down list) the following:

Destination Server or Interviewer Server URL: Enter the name or URL of the

server where Interviewer Server Administration is located (for example, http://server_name/SPSSMR/DimensionNet/default.aspx). Use this to connect to a server using an internet or intranet link.
User name: Enter a valid Windows or Interviewer Server user name. Password: Enter a valid password for the deﬁned user name. Authentication: Select Interviewer Server Authentication or Windows Authentication (if

Interviewer Server Administration is conﬁgured for Active Directory).
Login using my Windows Account: When selected, the User name, Password, and Authentication

ﬁelds are disabled and your current Windows login credentials are used.
E Click Login. If the login credentials are valid, you are presented with the Open from Interviewer Server Administration dialog.

260 Chapter 11 Figure 11-1 Activate dialog

E You can activate projects using either Basic or Advanced mode.

Basic mode: Provides options for activating a project in either Test or Live mode, and allows

you to select an activation template from which to pull activation settings.
Advanced mode: Provides options for conﬁguring various activation and project settings. For

more information, see the topic Activate Current Project - Project settings on p. 266.
E Select Test mode, Go live, or Inactive from the Basic settings section.

Note: Inactive only displays when the Status after activation option is set to Inactive. For more information, see the topic Activate Current Project - Project settings on p. 266.
E Select Apply activation settings from activation template if you want to use activation settings from an existing template. When this option is selected, the Activation Template displays on right-hand side

of the dialog, allowing to select an existing activation template. Select an appropriate template and click Accept to use the selected template’s settings (click Preview to view the selected template’s settings). For more information, see the topic Activation templates on p. 261. Note: Refer to Activate Current Project - Project settings if you want to conﬁgure additional activation settings.
E Click Activate to activate the questionnaire to the Interviewer Server. The Activate dialog closes

and a message indicating that the activation request was sent to the server displays. You can monitor the activation status via the Activation Console. The console provides options for viewing pending and completed activations, and creating activation history ﬁlters. For more information, see the topic IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console in Chapter 12 on p. 341.
Notes
E In order for the activation process to function properly, the server software version must be the

same (or higher) as the client software version.

261 Activating questionnaires E When activating a new project from a desktop application (IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author,

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional), a warning message will display during activation when there is an existing ActivateDocument.xml ﬁle with unmatched information in the project’s local folder:

The latest activation settings in the project folder are for a different project. Do you want to update the activation settings based on the curre [Yes] [No]

If you select Yes, all unmatched information will be replaced with the current project information. If you select No, the unmatched information will be preserved.
E When you activate a questionnaire in Author or Base Professional, the .mdd ﬁle is copied into the

FileName_ﬁles folder beneath the questionnaire ﬁle. The activation process uploads all the ﬁles from this folder into the Interviewer Server Administration project.
E If you attempt to reactivate a project before receiving the successful activation message from the

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Activation Console, you may not retrieve the most up-to-date information from the server. The .NET Framework’s default encoding reads the registry’s ANSI codepage when encoding. As a result you may encounter errors when activating questionnaires that include characters such as umlauts (for example, when the project name contains the character Ä). You can resolve this issue by updating the server’s ANSI codepage: 1. Access the registry on the server (Start > Run >regedit). 2. Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Nls\CodePage\ACP 3. For servers running a German operating system, enter a value of 850; for Chinese, enter a value of 936; for Japanese, enter a value of 932. Refer to Encoding Class (http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx) on the Microsoft MSDN site for more information.

Activation templates
You can set up activation options for use in speciﬁc circumstances, and save the options as activation templates that you can later select when activating other projects.
Creating an activation template
E If you have not done so, save the questionnaire ﬁle. E Select the routing that you want to activate. E From the menu, choose Tools > Activate

or press Alt+T, A.

262 Chapter 11 E In the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Login dialog box, enter (or select from the drop-down list)

the following:
Destination Server or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server URL: Enter the name or

URL of the server where IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration is located (for example, http://server_name/SPSSMR/DimensionNet/default.aspx). Use this to connect to a server using an internet or intranet link.
User name: Enter a valid Windows or Interviewer Server user name. Password: Enter a valid password for the deﬁned user name. Authentication: Select Interviewer Server Authentication or Windows Authentication (if

Interviewer Server Administration is conﬁgured for Active Directory).
Login using my Windows Account: When selected, the User name, Password, and Authentication

ﬁelds are disabled and your current Windows login credentials are used.
E Click Login. If the login credentials are valid, you are presented with the Open from Interviewer Server Administration dialog. E By default, the Activate - Current Project dialog displays in the Basic settings mode. In order

to create a activation template, you will need to switch the dialog to Advanced mode. This is accomplished by clicking More >>.

263 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-2 Activate - Current Project dialog

Advanced mode provides options for conﬁguring various activation and project settings. For more information, see the topic Activate Current Project - Project settings on p. 266.
E After conﬁguring the appropriate activation settings, you can choose to save the activation

template to the local ﬁle system or to the Interviewer Server.

264 Chapter 11

Note: You can use the Page Up and Page Down keys to navigate through the Activate advanced mode options on the left.
Saving activation templates to the local file system
E From the Activate - Current Project dialog, select the following: File > Save as File...

The Save As dialog displays, allowing you to save the activation template to the local ﬁle system. Select a ﬁle system location and provide an appropriate template ﬁle name.
E Click Save to save the activation template to the local ﬁle system.

Saving activation templates to the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server
E From the Activate - Current Project dialog, select the following: File > Save as Template...

The Save Template dialog displays, allowing you to save the activation template to the Interviewer Server.
Figure 11-3 Save Template dialog

Activation templates: Lists existing activation templates on the Interviewer Server. Template name: Enter an appropriate template name in the ﬁeld, ensuring the name is not the same

as an existing activation template name (unless you want to overwrite an existing template).
E Click Save to save the activation template to the Interviewer Server.

Loading activation templates from the local file system
E From the Activate - Current Project dialog, select the following: File > Load Local File...

The Open dialog displays, allowing you to select the appropriate activation template from the local ﬁle system.

265 Activating questionnaires E Navigate to the appropriate ﬁle system directory, select the desired activation template, and click Open to load the template’s settings into the Activate - Current Project dialog.

The loaded activation settings will be used for each project activation during the active session, or until you load settings from another activation template.
Notes

The following properties will not overwrite the current property values after an activation template is loaded from the server or local ﬁle system: Project ID Project name Project database Project description Use reporting database Reporting database location Login information (user name, ticket, server name, web service URL) and queued activation information, which is stored in the activation XML, will not overwrite current settings after a document is loaded from the server or local ﬁle system.

266 Chapter 11

Activate Current Project - Project settings
The Project settings is where you enter general information that details where and how the project is to be activated:
Figure 11-4 Project details dialog

267 Activating questionnaires

The Project settings dialog provides details about the current project. You should not need to change these ﬁelds. You can choose a different project here, but it is easier to close the dialog and select a different project, as this will automatically update the other ﬁelds with the correct project information.

Project details ID: The ID is automatically generated from the name of your .mdd ﬁle. When the project is

activated in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration, this is used as the unique identiﬁer for the project. The drop-down list displays the IDs of any projects that have previously been activated. To change the settings for a project that does not relate to the ﬁle you currently have open, select the project name from the drop-down list.
Name: The name is automatically generated from the name of your .mdd ﬁle. When the project

is activated in Interviewer Server Administration, this is used as the project name. You can change the name if required.
Description: Enter a description for the project. Status after activation: The status that you want the project to have once it has been activated.

Choose one of the following:
Active. The project is available for live interviewing. Inactive. The project cannot be used for test or live interviewing. Test. The project is available for testing, and any data collected will be ﬂagged as test data. Project database: The name of the case data database. The default is to store each project’s data

in a separate database with the same name as the project. However, if your site is conﬁgured to allow it, several projects can write case data to the same database. You may also have authority to create a new database for the project (with a name of your choice). If so, the drop-down list will contain the Create New Custom Database option. Select this option and then enter a name for this database in the Custom box that appears next to the Project Database ﬁeld.
Activation notes: Background information about the project that you want to save in the project

database for reference by other users. You can leave this box blank.
Source files: The location of the source ﬁles for this project (that is, the name of the folder

containing the .mdd ﬁle). Select Include sub-folders if the project’s folder contains localization sub-folders that must be copied to the Shared and Master project folders along with the main project ﬁles.
Interview server project folder: Identiﬁes the Interviewer Server Administration folder into which the project will be activated. You can select one of the following options:

Select an existing Interviewer Server Administration folder (if any currently exist).

268 Chapter 11

Select the default setting. When selected, this option has no affect on where the project will be activated. Select the option and then enter an appropriate folder name. Upon activation, the speciﬁed folder name will be created on the interview server, and the project will be activated into this folder.
Latest Version Label: The version label to assign to the version of the questionnaire that will be

created during activation.
Project Expiry (UTC Time). Provides options for specifying a project expiration time. Date: The project expiration date. You can manually enter a date, in the format mm/dd/yyyy, or

you can click the down arrow to display a calendar and select a date.
Time: The project expiration time. This indicates the exact time of day, for the selected date,

that the project will expire. Enter an appropriate time in the 24-hour format hh:mm (for example 17:00 for 5:00 PM).
Options

The following options enable and disable speciﬁc project settings. When enabled, any user deﬁned settings are applied to the project during activation. When disabled, any user deﬁned settings are not applied to the project during activation.
Use disconnected interviewing: When selected, the Disconnected node displays under the Activate

tree. The Disconnected node provides options for deploying a survey to one of more IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer installations without requiring an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server. For more information, see the topic Activate Current Project - Disconnected settings on p. 271.
Use participants to specify who to interview: When selected, the Participants node displays under

the Activate tree. The Participants node provides options for specifying the project’s sample management parameters. This option is only available if you have permission to work with participants and the project has already been activated with sample management data. For more information, see the topic Activate Current Project - Participants settings on p. 276.
Use telephone interviewing: When selected, the Telephone node displays under the Activate

tree. The Telephone node provides options speciﬁc to projects used for telephone interviewing (autodialer settings, calling rules, and so on). This option is only available if you have permission to work with phone surveys and the project has already been activated with CATI sample data. For more information, see the topic Activate Current Project - Telephone settings on p. 297.
Use quota control: When selected, the Quota node displays under the Activate tree. The Quota node

provides options that allow you to create a new, or using an existing, quota database for the project. This option is only available if you have permission to work with quota and the server has a quota database. For more information, see the topic Activate Current Project - Quota settings on p. 331.

269 Activating questionnaires

Project - Interview
The Interview settings allows you specify the default questionnaire language, deﬁne which version of the questionnaire should be used for interviews run in test and active mode, and decide whether to restart stopped interviews using the latest version of the questionnaire. This is particularly useful when you need to make changes to a questionnaire that is already being used for live interviewing.
Figure 11-5 Interview settings

Default Questionnaire Language. The default (base) language for the questionnaire.

With multilingual questionnaires, the language in which you write the questionnaire automatically becomes the default language for that script. If the questionnaire does not specify the language in which it is to run, and the information cannot be obtained from the participant record, the interview will run in this language. Once you start translating a script, other languages are added to the questionnaire deﬁnition ﬁle and you may want to select one of those languages as the default language for the questionnaire. The language list contains only languages that are present in the questionnaire deﬁnition ﬁle. If the computer’s default language does not appear in the questionnaire deﬁnition ﬁle, the language list defaults to US English. For more information, see the topic Changing the Default Language or Context in Chapter 8 on p. 212.
Test version. Choose Latest Version to use the latest activated version of the questionnaire for test

interviews. Choose Current Version to use the version of the questionnaire that is being used now, before activation generates a new version.

270 Chapter 11

Active version. Choose Latest Version to use the latest activated version of the questionnaire for

live interviews. Choose Current Version to use the version of the questionnaire that is being used now, before activation generates a new version.
Restart interviews using new version. Deselect this box if you want to restart interviews using the version of the questionnaire with which the interviews were originally started, rather than the latest version. Default Routing Context. If you have more than one routing context deﬁned, select the one you

want to use as the default. The activation process activates all routing contexts it ﬁnds, but only sets one as the default.

Project - Roles
The Roles settings allow you view the roles to which you currently belong and provide project access to the listed roles. If you are a member of the DPMAdmin role, or you are assigned the Can assign project feature, all roles are displayed in the roles list. Otherwise, only the roles to which you belong are displayed. Note: The DPMAdmin role never displays.
Figure 11-6 Project Roles settings

271 Activating questionnaires

After activation, the selected roles are provided access to the project.

Activate Current Project - Disconnected settings
The Disconnected settings provide options for deploying a survey to one or more IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer installations, without the need for an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server. The settings are applied when the questionnaire is opened in Interviewer. Refer to the Interviewer User’s Guide for more information. Note: The Disconnected node displays under the Activate tree when the Use disconnected interviewing option is selected from the Project settings dialog.
Figure 11-7 Disconnected settings

You can conﬁgure settings for: Routing Display Fields Data Entry Deployment

272 Chapter 11

Disconnected - Routing
The Routing settings allow you to select each routing’s activity and the player that will be used in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer.
Figure 11-8 Routing settings

Routing. Allows you to select from the available questionnaire routings Activity. Allows you to select an activity for the selected routing. Activities include:
Local Interview – when selected, the associated routing is ﬂagged for live interviewing, and Web and Phone are the only options available in the Player column. Initial Data Entry – when selected, the associated routing is ﬂagged as an initial data entry

project, which means that Interviewer cases are keyed in Initial Entry mode. When this option is selected, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Entry is the only option available in the Player column.
Full Validation – when selected, the associated routing is ﬂagged as a full validation project,

which means that all question responses require full validation. When this option is selected, Data Entry is the only option available in the Player column.

273 Activating questionnaires

Player. This column allows you to select which Interviewer player will be used for the associated routing. The available options are dependant on what was selected in the Activity column. Options include:
Data Entry – when selected, cases will be entered via the Data Entry Player when the

questionnaire is opened in Interviewer.
Web – when selected, cases will be entered in live interviewing mode when the questionnaire

is opened in Interviewer.
Phone – when selected, cases will be entered in live interviewing mode when the questionnaire

is opened in Interviewer.

Disconnected - Display Fields
The Display Fields settings allow you to select which ﬁelds will be visible when the questionnaire is opened in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer, and identify the ﬁeld that will be used to uniquely identify each case. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the ﬁeld order.
Figure 11-9 Display Fields settings

274 Chapter 11

Disconnected - Data Entry
The Data Entry settings allow you to conﬁgure data entry veriﬁcation related options. The settings are applied when the questionnaire is opened in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer.
Figure 11-10 IBM SPSS Data Collection Data Entry settings

Identify unique surveys with this variable: Allows you to select which ﬁeld will be used to uniquely

identify the questionnaire. The RespondentID ﬁeld is the default.
Require two user verification: When selected, two user veriﬁcation is required when validating

question responses. This means that the user who validates question responses must be different than the user who performs initial data entry.

Disconnected - Deployment
The Deployment settings provides options for deploying the questionnaire to a deployment package, or directly to the local IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer installation.

275 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-11 Deployment settings

Data file File type: Allows you to select the ﬁle format for the activated or locally deployed questionnaire.

Options include:
Data Collection Data File (.ddf) Statistics File (.sav)

Upon activation Use a deployment package for disconnected machines: When selected, this option allows you

to create a deployment package for use with Interviewer. Deployment packages are typically employed for Interviewer machines that are not connected to an IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server. Click Browse... to select a location to save the deployment package.
Add to Interviewer on this machine: When selected, the questionnaire is automatically added to the

Interviewer project list on the current machine. This option is only available when Interviewer is installed on the same machine.

276 Chapter 11

Activate Current Project - Participants settings
The Participants settings provide options for specifying the project’s sample management parameters. Note: The Participants node displays under the Activate tree when the Use participants to specify who to interview option is selected from the Project settings dialog.
Figure 11-12 Participants settings

You can conﬁgure settings for: Upload Database Fields Script E-mail

Participants - Upload
The Upload settings allow you to specify the name and location of the ﬁle that contains the participant records.

277 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-13 Upload settings

Use existing participants. When selected, the project uses sample management and participant

records that have already been uploaded.
Upload participants. When selected, the project uses sample management and you are provided the

option of uploading the participant records. Click Browse... to select a participant ﬁle location. Note: You can only upload participant records if your IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration user proﬁle is assigned the Can upload participants activity feature in Interviewer Server Administration. Refer to the topic Assigning Users or Roles to Activity Features in the Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for more information.
With phone interviewing support. When selected, the project allows outbound telephone

interviewing.

278 Chapter 11

The table names the ﬁelds that are (or will be) present in the sample table and displays how they will be used.
Setting Available Description Fields to make available to the sample management script. Cancel any that are not used by the sample management script (you cannot cancel required ﬁelds). Fields whose contents are used only by the interview script become available during interviews and need not be selected here. Fields to use for authenticating inbound callers taking Web interviews. Choose the ﬁelds you want to use and cancel any you do not. If you need to be able to select speciﬁc participant records, you should select the Id ﬁeld because this is a key to the database and is guaranteed to contain a unique value for each record. If you authenticate on a ﬁeld that may contain non-unique values, the sample management system will select the ﬁrst record whose value in that column matches the values speciﬁed in the sample management script. Field names. You cannot modify these settings. Default values to be inserted into empty ﬁelds. Fields with no default values will have a null value. You may specify your own defaults as long as the values are consistent with the ﬁelds’ data types and lengths. The type of data in the ﬁeld. You cannot change the data type of required ﬁelds. The number of characters that can be held in a text ﬁeld. You cannot change the length of required ﬁelds.

Authentication

Field Default

Type Length

Refer to Uploading participant records for information about the ﬁeld parameters you can change.

Participants - Database
The Database settings allow you to specify the server to which the participant records will be uploaded and the database and table in which the records will be stored.

279 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-14 Database settings

Server name: The name of the server on which the participant database is located. The

drop-down list contains only those servers that are present in your current domain. If you want to use a server in another domain, you must manually enter the domain name (for example, \).
Database name: The name of the participant database. The drop-down list displays the names of

databases that you have permission to use and that exist on the chosen server. If you are uploading participant records, and you have permission to create databases, the New button is visible and allows you to create a new database. Enter the database name when prompted.
Table name: The name of the table that contains the participant records for this project. The

drop-down list displays the names of tables in the chosen database. If you are uploading participant records you can click New to create a new table. Enter the table name when prompted.

Participants - Fields
The Fields settings allow you to specify which ﬁelds will be present in the sample table and provides various ﬁeld conﬁguration options.

280 Chapter 11 Figure 11-15 Fields settings

With phone interviewing support. When selected, the project allows outbound telephone

interviewing. The ﬁelds table names the ﬁelds that are (or will be) present in the sample table and displays how they will be used.
Setting Available Description Fields to make available to the sample management script. Cancel any that are not used by the sample management script (you cannot cancel required ﬁelds). Fields whose contents are used only by the interview script become available during interviews and need not be selected here.

281 Activating questionnaires

Setting Authentication

Field Default

Type Length

Description Fields to use for authenticating inbound callers taking Web interviews. Choose the ﬁelds you want to use and cancel any you do not. If you need to be able to select speciﬁc participant records, you should select the Id ﬁeld because this is a key to the database and is guaranteed to contain a unique value for each record. If you authenticate on a ﬁeld that may contain non-unique values, the sample management system will select the ﬁrst record whose value in that column matches the values speciﬁed in the sample management script. Field names. You cannot modify these settings. Default values to be inserted into empty ﬁelds. Fields with no default values will have a null value. You may specify your own defaults as long as the values are consistent with the ﬁelds’ data types and lengths. The type of data in the ﬁeld. You cannot change the data type of required ﬁelds. The number of characters that can be held in a text ﬁeld. You cannot change the length of required ﬁelds.

Refer to Uploading participant records for information about the ﬁeld parameters you can change.

Participants - Script
The Script settings displays the sample management script that the project will use for managing participant records. In the selection box, choose the name of the script you want to download. The standard choices are Basic (for Web interviewing) and Multimode (for Web and telephone interviewing).

282 Chapter 11 Figure 11-16 Script settings

Depending on your user permissions, and the sample management system conﬁguration, you may also be able to click Browse... to load a ﬁle other than those in the drop-down list.

Participants - E-mail
The E-mail settings provide options for setting up e-mail for participants in the sample ﬁle. For example, at the start of a project you might send a message to everyone inviting them to participate in the survey. Later, you might setup a second job that sends reminders to those respondents who have not yet taken the survey.

283 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-17 E-mail settings

E-mail provides the following options:
Respondent selection. You can send e-mail to all respondents in a queue or set of queues.

Alternatively, send to a ﬁxed number of respondents chosen either from the start of the queue or at random.
Customized and personalized message texts. If you want to include information from a

respondent’s sample record, or the value of a project property, insert a placeholder in the message text and the appropriate values will be substituted for the placeholders when the messages are sent. This allows you to address respondents by name, and to include the URL for starting the interview as part of the message.
Test messages. Check how the message will appear to respondents by sending a test message. Project status. You can specify that the job should only be run if the project has a particular

status.

284 Chapter 11

Activity recording. You can record which respondents received which e-mail by updating a

ﬁeld in the sample record with a note of the time and date at which the e-mail was sent.
No repeat e-mail. If you rerun an e-mail job, a message is normally to everyone who is

selected to receive it. You may choose not to target people who received this message during a previous run.
Delayed sending of e-mails. There is no direct link between setting up an e-mail job and

running it. All job speciﬁcations are saved and are run only when selected from a list of e-mail jobs for the current project.
Maintenance facilities. Job speciﬁcations can be edited and deleted as required. Dealing with e-mail problems. You can specify the e-mail address of a user who is to be

contacted if there are problems. This user is also the person who receives test e-mails. Note: E-mail does not support SMTP servers that are set up to require authentication.
E-mail jobs

The e-mail jobs table allows you to deﬁne the following parameters:
Setting Name From Reply Address Priority Project Status Description Enter a name for the e-mail job. Enter the e-mail address that will display as the sender. Enter your name (or e-mail address) or the name (or e-mail address) of the person on whose behalf you are sending the message. Whatever you type here will appear as the sender’s name in the recipient’s message box. Select the e-mail priority from the drop-down list. You can choose either a High, Medium, or Low priority. Select the status that the project must have in order for the e-mail to be sent. You can select more than one status.

E-mail text tab

The E-mail text tab allows you to conﬁgure the following settings:
Subject: Enter a subject for the e-mail message. Send as: Select either HTML or Plain text. HTML provides formatting options (bold text, italics,

and so on), while Plain text does not.
Body: Displays suggested message text, complete with substitution markers for inserting respondent or project speciﬁc information. You can accept this text as it is, modify it, or replace it with different text. Preview... Click to preview how the e-mail will display. Substitutions... If you want to insert the value of a Sample Management ﬁeld or project property

into the message text, click in the text at the point you want to make the insertion, then click
Substitutions... and select the ﬁeld or property you want to insert from the dialog box that is

285 Activating questionnaires

displayed. The property name appears in the message text enclosed in curly brackets and will be replaced by the appropriate value when the e-mail message is sent.
E-mail address field from sample: Select the Sample Management ﬁeld that contains recipient

e-mail addresses.
Write date and time that e-mail was sent to sample: When selected, the date and time when the

message was sent, as part of each recipient’s sample record, is recorded.
Sample field in write to write: Select the name of the sample ﬁeld from the drop-down list.

Note: Use the above two options if you want to prevent the same message from being sent to respondents more than once. If a respondent is sent the same message more than once, the date and time ﬁeld information is overwritten each time a new message is sent.
Send e-mails to this address when test e-mails are sent or when there are problems: Enter an e-mail address that will be sent messages when test e-mails are sent or when problems are encountered. Participants tab Choose queues: Select the queues from which recipients can be selected.

Note: The list only shows queues that contained sample records at the time the mrDPMServer3 service was started. This may mean that the list may contain out-of-date information, for example, because records have been moved into a queue that was previously empty or because a queue that contained records is now empty. You may need to ask your IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server administrator to stop and restart the mrDPMServer3 service in order to view an up-to-date queue list. To restrict your selections even further do the following:
Choose a field to filter participants: Select a ﬁeld to be used for ﬁltering participants. The list shows all ﬁelds in the sample table except Queue. Choose filter value(s): Select the values that the ﬁeld must contain in order for respondents to be

selected. The list shows all values present in the selected ﬁeld.
Send e-mail to: All participants meeting the criteria specified above: When selected, e-mail is sent to all

participants that meet the previously speciﬁed criteria.
A maximum number of participants: When selected, e-mail is only sent to the number of

participants you specify.
First x: When selected, e-mail is sent to select respondents from the top of the list (of those

matching the selection criteria).
Randomly selected: When selected, e-mail is sent to random respondents (of those matching

the selection criteria).

286 Chapter 11

This e-mail can be sent to the same participant more than once: When selected, e-mail is allowed to be sent to the same participant more than once. This option is only available if you enabled the Write date and time that e-mail was sent to sample ﬁeld on the E-mail text tab.

Uploading participant records
This topic explains how to upload participant records using the Activate dialog box. Note: You can only upload participant records if your IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration user proﬁle is assigned the Can upload participants activity feature in Interviewer Server Administration. Refer to the topic Assigning Users or Roles to Activity Features in the Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for more information. Using this method to load records is generally the same as loading records using the Participants activity in Interviewer Server Administration, but there are some restrictions that apply to the participants text ﬁle. Whereas the Participants activity accepts any ﬁeld names in the participants text ﬁle, and provides facilities for mapping ﬁelds in the ﬁle to the ﬁeld names that the sample management system requires in the database, the Activate component does not. This means that all ﬁelds that are present in the text ﬁle, and that are required sample management ﬁelds, must have the correct names in the text ﬁle. For example, the record Id must be stored in a ﬁeld called Id. If the ﬁeld name is RecNum, you must change this in the header line of the text ﬁle before you upload records. The names of the required ﬁelds for Web interviews are as follows:
Column Active Data type and length Long Null permitted Yes Primary key Default value No 0 Notes Set to 1 while the sample management functions are running; that is, while the record is in the ACTIVE queue. The sample record ID which uniquely identiﬁes each sample record. Names the queue in which the record is currently held.

Id

Text(64)

No

Yes

Queue

Text(255)

Yes

No

FRESH

287 Activating questionnaires

Column Serial

Data type and length Long

Null permitted Yes

Primary key Default value No 0

Notes The unique serial number that IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server assigns to each respondent’s case data. Generally, this serial number is not the same as the sample record ID. When a respondent restarts an interview, Interviewer Server uses the serial number to retrieve the respondent’s case data record and to display the responses (stored in the case data record) that the respondent has already given. Set to 1 if the record is test data, or 0 if it is real data (also known as live data). This column is used by the Phone activity to restrict the type of data that appears in phone reports. If the value is Null, the Phone activity will treat the record as if

Test

Long

Yes

No

Null

288 Chapter 11

Column

Data type and length

Null permitted

Primary key Default value

Notes it is both real and test data.

The required ﬁelds for telephone interviews are:
Column Active Data type and length Long Null Primary Default permitted key value Yes No 0 Notes Set to 1 while the sample management functions are running; that is, while the record is in the ACTIVE queue.. The StartTime of latest record in the history table for a speciﬁc sample. The time in UTC at which the respondent asked to be called. The number of calls made to this record after an appointment was set. When sample records are uploaded into the sample table, a non-null default value should be speciﬁed otherwise errors will occur during the upload. Records changes made to other ﬁelds (except Comments) in the record. This ﬁeld was new in Interviewer Server 4.0. In earlier versions, these changes were stored in the Comments ﬁeld. If you reuse a pre-v4.0 sample table that contains a Comments ﬁeld of SQL type ntext, the Audit ﬁeld is created as nvarchar(2000) instead. This is due to an issue in the Microsoft OLE DB consumer templates that prevents a table containing two ntext columns. The call outcome (return) code for the previous call to this record.

ActivityStartTime DateTime Date AppointmentTime Long AppointmentTryCount

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

Null

0

Audit

Yes Text(2000) but see Notes for more information

No

CallOutcome Text(64)

Yes

No

289 Activating questionnaires

Data type and length Long CallRecordingsCount Column

Null Primary Default permitted key value Yes No 0 for telephone projects, otherwise Null No

Notes The number of call recordings for this record. Records loaded with this ﬁeld empty have this ﬁeld set to Null in the sample table. Additional information about the participant. Interviewers may update this ﬁeld when they call the participant. In pre-v4.0 sample tables, the Comments ﬁeld is created as ntext(16). If you reuse a pre-v4.0 sample table that contains a Comments ﬁeld of type ntext, its data type remains unchanged and the Audit ﬁeld is created as nvarchar(2000) instead. This is due to an issue in the Microsoft OLE DB consumer templates that prevents a table containing two ntext columns. The standard multimode sample management scripts display records with comments before dialing so that the interviewer can read the comments before talking to the participant. The number of times that the number has been connected. This ﬁeld is updated when a sample is dialed and connected. Records the call count for each speciﬁc day part. For example, assume there are two day parts named aa, ab. The value for this ﬁeld will be aa1|ab2 (or aa1). This means the sample was used to call one time in aa time range and two times in ab time range. If the sample has not yet been used, the value of this ﬁeld is null.

Comments

Yes Text(2000) but see Notes for more information.

ConnectCount Long

Yes

No

0

DayPart

Text(128)

Yes

No

Null

290 Chapter 11

Data type and length ExpirationTimeDateTime Column

Id

Text(64)

InternalDialerFlags Text(64)

InterviewModeText(64)

Null Primary Default Notes permitted key value Yes No 2099–12–31 Deﬁnes the participant 23:59:000 record expiration date and time. For example, a project may dictate that participant records can only be called within a speciﬁc date range. Expired records are not available for dialing (except for retrieving appointments). No Yes The sample record ID that uniquely identiﬁes each sample record. Yes No NULL Used in conjunction with a 3rd party dialer. In full predictive mode, this ﬁeld should accompany all numbers dialed commands. It is set to an initial value by the CATI system for the ﬁrst dialer (for a different dialer, the initial value can be different). IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Dialer will return a new value for Internal Dialer Flag for the number. After dialing, this ﬁeld will be updated with the new value, and this value will be permanently set with the sample record and passed through for all subsequent dialing attempts. Yes No How the record may be used: set to Web for an inbound self-completion interview or Web CATI for outbound telephone interviewing. In projects that allow a mix of inbound and outbound calling, the sample management script should check the value of this ﬁeld and select records for telephone interviewing accordingly. The value in this ﬁeld can be changed in the questionnaire script, or by editing the record directly in SQL. You might want to do this towards

291 Activating questionnaires

Column

Data type and length

Null Primary Default permitted key value

Notes the end of a survey if there are a number of timed out or stopped Web interviews and you want your interviewers to contact those people to try to complete the interviews. How many times this sample has been called and received NoAnswer. This ﬁeld is updated when a sample is dialed and returned with a call outcome of NoAnswer Must contain a phone number if the record is to be used for telephone interviewing. If the project uses an autodialer, phone numbers that start with a + sign will have that character replaced by the InternationalAccessCode deﬁned in DPM. + signs preceded by white space or other characters are not replaced. If the project allows inbound calling, you can add a question to the script that asks respondents to enter contact numbers, and then update the sample records with this information. The name of the interviewer who made the previous call to this participant. This allows appointments to be returned to the previous interviewer if the current time is before the AppointmentMarginAfter interval has passed. Appointments that are not kept within this period may be passed to any interviewer. When interviews are reviewed, this ﬁeld is updated with the name of the reviewer.

Long NoAnswerCount

Yes

No

0

PhoneNumber Text(64)

Yes

No

PreviousInterviewerID Text(64)

Yes

No

292 Chapter 11

Data type and length PreviousQueue Text(64) Column

Null Primary Default permitted key value Yes No

Notes The name of the queue in which the record was previously held. When records are displayed for interviewers, the record’s current queue is always shown as ACTIVE because the record has been selected for interviewing. Displaying the value of PreviousQueue can be useful to interviewers as it may provide additional information about the record’s calling history. For example, if PreviousQueue is FRESH, the interviewer knows the record has not been called before, whereas if PreviousQueue is APPOINTMENT, he/she knows that the respondent has already been contacted and has asked to be called back to be interviewed. Names the queue in which the record is currently held. When replicate identiﬁers are deﬁned in the queue ﬁeld for speciﬁc records, those records can then be used to create sample/participant record subsets. The time in UTC that was set as the callback time for appointments that are set automatically by the sample management script. Indicates that the record must be manually dialed. The sample management script will set AutoDial=0 for these records. The feature will not work if RequiresManualDial is not deﬁned in the participants table

Queue

Text(64)

Yes

No

FRESH

RecallTime

Date

Yes

No

Long RequiresManualDial

Yes

No

293 Activating questionnaires

Column ReturnTime

Data type and length Date

Null Primary Default permitted key value Yes No

Notes The time at which the record was returned to sample management. This allows you to specify the amount of time that must elapse between repeat calls to records whose interviews timed out or were stopped. The unique serial number that Interviewer Server assigns to each respondent’s case data. Generally, this serial number is not the same as the sample record ID. When a respondent restarts an interview, Interviewer Server uses the serial number to retrieve the respondent’s case data record and to display the responses (stored in the case data record) that the respondent has already given. Identiﬁes which respondents are the suitable candidates for the current survey. Screener questions are designed to ﬁlter respondents. If a respondent answers do not meet the Screener criteria, the respondent is not allowed to continue the survey, and the Screener ﬁeld is recorded as Failed. If respondent answers meet the Screener criteria, they are allowed to continue the survey, and the Screener ﬁeld is recorded as Passed. This ﬁeld can be set using the following IOM script in routing (it is the data source for the Incidence report).
Passed Screener: IOM.SampleRecord.Item["Screener"].Value = "Passed" Failed Screener: IOM.SampleRecord.Item["Screener"].Value = "Failed" IOM.Terminate(Signals.sigFailedScreener, True)

Serial

Long

Yes

No

0

Screener

Text(64)

Yes

No

Null

294 Chapter 11

Column

Data type and length

Null Primary Default permitted key value

Notes

In order to accurately calculate the project incidence, the Screener ﬁeld is added to the sample table. The ﬁeld is updated during the survey with three values – Null, Passed, and Failed. The sum of Passed is the incidence numerator; the sum of Passed and Failed is the incidence denominator. The incidence report is generated using TOM based on the data source, sample table, and sample history table. SortId Text(64) Yes No Null A random value that can be used for sorting records prior to selection. (Appointments and recalls are not affected by this property as they are always sorted in ascending date/time order.) The Participants activity can initialize this ﬁeld with a random value when uploading records. If records are uploaded in batches, each record in the sample table receives a new random number, not just those being uploaded in the current batch. See “Naming the Database Server, Sample Database, and Sample Table” in the Interviewer Server User’s Guide for details. Set to 1 if the record is test data, or 0 if it is real data (also known as live data). This column is used by the Phone activity to restrict the type of data that appears in phone reports. If the value is Null, the Phone activity will treat the record as if it is both real and test data.

Test

Long

Yes

No

Null

295 Activating questionnaires

Column TimeZone

Data type and length Long

Null Primary Default permitted key value Yes No

Notes The respondent’s timezone. This is used in the setting of appointments to ensure that any time differences between the respondent’s and interviewer’s locations are taken into account when the record is presented for recalling. If sample records are used in telephone interviewing projects, you can use the TrunkGroup ﬁeld to specify which trunk group of the dialer will be used for dialing the sample record. If you want the dialer to automatically select the trunk group, the ﬁeld should be set to NULL or empty. The number of calls made to this record. When sample records are uploaded into the sample table, a non-null default value should be speciﬁed otherwise errors will occur during the upload. The UserId of latest record in the history table for a speciﬁc sample.

TrunkGroup

Long or Text(64)

Yes

No

NULL

TryCount

Long

Yes

No

0

UserId

Text(64)

Yes

No

NULL

The data types shown above are those that the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model uses. When the table is created in the sample database, the Activate component converts these data types into the corresponding data types in the database application you are using. (For further details about the mapping process, open the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library documentation and use the Search facility to locate the topic entitled “Data Type Mapping for Columns in Sample Tables”.) You can check the column data types by opening the table in your database application and can change the data types if they are not exactly what you want. Refer to your database application’s documentation for information on changing data types. Your participants text ﬁle does not need to contain information for all the required columns, as many of the columns are used only internally by the sample management system and will only contain information once a participant has been called. As a minimum, you must supply a value in your text ﬁle for the Id column. For telephone interviewing projects, you should provide a value for the PhoneNumber column, and if you have participants in more than one time zone you might want to provide a value for the TimeZone column.

296 Chapter 11

Once you have told Activate which text ﬁle to use, it scans the ﬁle and decides how it will load the data into the sample table. It does this by comparing the ﬁeld names in the participants text ﬁle with the columns names that need to exist in the sample table. If there are additional ﬁelds in the text ﬁle, new columns will be created in the sample table to hold this data. The ﬁelds table displays a summary of what it will do and lets you change it if this is necessary. Typically, you might change the ﬁelds that are used for authenticating inbound callers. The columns in this display are as follows.
Setting Available Description Fields to make available to the sample management script. Cancel any that are not used by the sample management script (you cannot cancel required ﬁelds). Fields whose contents are used only by the interview script become available during interviews and need not be selected here. Fields to use for authenticating inbound callers taking Web interviews. Choose the ﬁelds you want to use and cancel any you do not. If you need to be able to select speciﬁc participant records, you should select the Id ﬁeld because this is a key to the database and is guaranteed to contain a unique value for each record. If you authenticate on a ﬁeld that may contain non-unique values, the sample management system will select the ﬁrst record whose value in that column matches the values speciﬁed in the sample management script. Field names. You cannot modify these settings. Default values to be inserted into empty ﬁelds. Fields with no default values will have a null value. You may specify your own defaults as long as the values are consistent with the ﬁelds’ data types and lengths. The type of data in the ﬁeld. You cannot change the data type of required ﬁelds. The number of characters that can be held in a text ﬁeld. You cannot change the length of required ﬁelds.

Authentication

Field Default

Type Length

Uploading participant records
E Select Upload (located under the Participants node). E Select Upload participants and click Browse....

This opens the Specify Participants dialog box.

297 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-18 Specify Participants dialog box

E In Delimiter, select the character that separates the ﬁelds in each record. The default is a comma. If

you pick a different character, this becomes the default the next time you activate a project.
E Click Browse... and select the .txt or .csv ﬁle you want to upload. E The upload process automatically randomizes records as it loads them. Click Re-randomize all participant records during import if you want to cancel the randomization process. E Click OK to close the dialog box.

Activate checks the participants text ﬁle and displays the ﬁelds in the ﬁelds table.
E Make whatever changes are appropriate in this table. E Use the Fields and Script settings to select the sample database and table you want to use, and the

sample management script that will control access to the participant records.

Activate Current Project - Telephone settings
The Telephone settings provides options speciﬁc to projects used for telephone interviewing (autodialer settings, calling rules, and so on). Note: The Telephone node displays under the Activate tree when the Use telephone interviewing option is selected from the Project settings dialog.

298 Chapter 11 Figure 11-19 Telephone settings

You can conﬁgure settings for: Interviewing Calling Rules Dialing Note: The Dialing options are only available when a dialer is installed on the server.

Telephone - Interviewing settings
The Interviewing settings allow you to conﬁgure options for a telephone interviewing project.

299 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-20 Interviewing settings

You can conﬁgure settings for: Display Fields Call Outcomes Introduction Interviewer Review

Interviewing - Display Fields
The Display Fields settings allow you to specify which sample management ﬁelds are required in the participant records, which ﬁelds should be displayed on the interview screen, and which of the displayed ﬁelds interviewers can edit. When an autodialer connects a telephone interviewer to a participant (or, for projects that do not use an autodialer, when the interviewer requests a number to call) the interviewing program displays a page showing information about the participant and a list of possible call outcomes. Some items of information are always displayed whereas other items are displayed only if selected by the supervisor. The supervisor can change the selection of optional ﬁelds during the course of the project. Supervisors can also specify for each displayed ﬁeld whether or not interviewers can change the ﬁeld’s contents. For example, if the Comments ﬁeld is displayed you might want interviewers to be able to update this ﬁeld with information that might be useful to other interviewers who are about to speak to this participant.

300 Chapter 11 Figure 11-21 Display Fields settings

Setting
Label Required

Description Shows the ﬁeld name that will be displayed on the interviewing screen. Shows which ﬁelds must be present in each participant record. You cannot change the settings in this column for any of the standard ﬁelds that must be present in all telephone databases, but you can change the settings for other ﬁelds.

301 Activating questionnaires

Setting
Show

Can Edit During Survey

Can Tabulate

Description Determines which ﬁelds will be displayed on the interviewing screen. Of the standard ﬁelds, the ID, Queue, Name, Phone Number, Comments, and Previous Queue ﬁelds are always displayed, so you cannot clear the Show check box for these ﬁelds. The settings in this column also deﬁne the ﬁelds that interviewers can search when searching for a speciﬁc contact. To allow interviewers to search for speciﬁc contacts, you must select the Show Speciﬁc Contact option on the Interviewing - Interviewer dialog . Determines which of the displayed ﬁelds interviewers can edit. For the standard ﬁelds, you can only change the settings for Return Time, Interview Mode, and Call Outcome. Speciﬁes which ﬁelds should be available to the Phone activity. The only standard ﬁeld whose setting you can change is Try Count. If your sample data includes a Segment ﬁeld and you want to run the reports in the Phone activity that can display data about segments, make sure that you select Can Tabulate for your Segment ﬁeld. For more information about segments, search the Phone activity online help for the topic “About Segments”.

Interviewing - Call Outcome
The Call Outcome settings allow you to set the call outcome options. Interviewers working on a telephone interviewing project are provided with a list of call outcome codes from which they must select the outcome of each call that they make. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server comes with a default list of call outcome codes that cover most requirements, so you should never need to build a call outcome list from scratch. Note: For projects that use an autodialer, Interviewer Server automatically maps the status codes returned by the autodialer to one of the call outcomes.

302 Chapter 11 Figure 11-22 Call Outcome settings

Setting Code Name Text Show During Interview Show Appointment Page

Cancel Code

Always Hidden

Description The call outcome code number. The call outcome name. The call outcome description. This is the text that the interviewer sees. Specify which codes must be available while interviews are in progress; for example, an Abandoned Interview code can be selected if a participant starts an interview but then refuses to complete it. Specify which codes should prompt the interviewer to arrange a callback appointment with the participant. When interviewers select one of these outcomes they will prompted to enter a callback date and time. Specify which code should be used for canceled calls. Canceled calls occur when an interviewer is presented with a number to call manually, but clicks Cancel Contact rather than making the call. This returns the participant record to the Sample Management system with the appropriate code so that the record can be returned to the queue from which it was selected. Select which codes are always hidden from interviewers. Typically, these are call outcomes that are chosen automatically by Interviewer Server.

303 Activating questionnaires

Interviewing - Introduction
The Introduction settings allow you to deﬁne the introductory script that interviewers should read to each participant. When an autodialer connects a telephone interviewer to a participant (or, for projects that do not use an autodialer, when the interviewer requests a number to call), interviewers are provided with an introductory text that they can read to the participant to explain the reason for the call. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server comes with a default text that is suitable for all surveys, but you can deﬁne your own text that is more speciﬁc to the current project.
Figure 11-23 Introduction settings

Introduction to survey: Displays the default introductory text. You can manually replace the default

text that Interviewer Server provides with your organization’s default text.
Substitution fields: Lists ﬁelds available for insertion into the introductory text. The available ﬁelds typically reference to a sample ﬁeld or the interviewer’s name. Show valid substitution fields: When selected, only valid substitution ﬁelds display in the
Substitution ﬁelds list.

Inserting a field into the introductory text
E Click in the introductory text at the point you want to make the insertion. E Select a ﬁeld from the Substitution ﬁelds list.

304 Chapter 11 E Click Insert.

The ﬁeld name appears in the introductory text enclosed in curly brackets and will be replaced by the appropriate value when the introductory message displays for the interviewers.

Interviewing - Interviewer
The Interviewer settings allow you to specify interviewer dialing parameters.
Figure 11-24 Interviewer settings

Dialing option: Select whether an autodialer is used to dial phone numbers, whether interviewers

must dial numbers manually, or whether interviewers can use modems to dial numbers.
IBM SPSS Dialer (Extension) – Power dial for the interviewer screen. In extension dialing, the

autodialer dials participants only when interviewers click the Start Dialing button in the Phone Participants activity. This mode can result in longer wait times for interviewers, but is unlikely to result in silent calls.
IBM SPSS Dialer (Group) – Dial for the interview in a group (with optional predictive dialing). In

group/predictive dialing, the autodialer dials participants before interviewers are available to answer the connected calls. That is, the software predicts when interviewers will click the Start Dialing button. This mode can deliver the highest interviewer productivity, but might result in silent calls.
Modem – Show Dial Contact button on the Interviewer screen. Allow interviewers to use modems

to dial phone numbers. The Dial Contact button on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity will then be usable. When interviewers click that button, the phone number displayed

305 Activating questionnaires

in the main screen will be dialed automatically by the modem. Note that the modem option will work only for phone numbers that are formatted as follows: +Country/RegionCode (Area/CityCode) SubscriberNumber For example, 44 12 3456 7890 for a subscriber in the United Kingdom. In addition, a separate software installation is required on each telephone interviewer station that will use the modem option. For more information, search the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Installation Instructions for the topic “Things You Must Do on Local Machines”. If a station has access to more than one modem, you can specify which one to use—for more information, use the search function in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text “Settings for the Phone Participants Activity” and in the search results open the topic with that title. If you select the option to use modems, the project cannot use an autodialer. Interviewers will still be able to dial numbers manually if they have access to a telephone keypad. The modem option works only on Microsoft Windows computers.
Manual – Interviewer dials numbers manually. Interviewers must manually dial the phone

number displayed on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity. Note: If you select the option to dial phone numbers manually, the project cannot use an autodialer or modems.
Interviewer to select qualifications: When selected, interviewers will be prompted to select their

qualiﬁcations at the start of each session. Interviewer qualiﬁcations control which sample records are allocated to each interviewer and are a good way of making the best use of your interviewers’ skills. There are two ways of assigning qualiﬁcations to interviewers, which can be used together or separately. Administrators can set an interviewer’s qualiﬁcations when they create IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration accounts, or interviewers may select their own qualiﬁcations at the start of each interviewing session or during a session. Depending on how your company uses qualiﬁcations, it may be appropriate for administrators to set some qualiﬁcations and for interviewers to be allowed to select others. For example, language or refusal-conversion qualiﬁcations could be set by administrators, while location qualiﬁcations that specify which region an interviewer should call could be set and changed by interviewers themselves. Select the qualiﬁcations that interviewers may select themselves. Selecting the option but no qualiﬁcations is the same as not selecting the option at all. Note: Take care when choosing which qualiﬁcations interviewers may select, as it is possible to allow interviewers to select qualiﬁcations they do not have. For example, suppose the administrator has created Sam’s account with a French language qualiﬁcation. If you allow interviewers to set the language qualiﬁcation, Sam will be presented with the full list of languages and will be able to choose any combination of languages from that list.

306 Chapter 11

Show Specific Contact button on the Interviewer screen: When selected, interviewers can retrieve

speciﬁc participants from the sample database and the Speciﬁc Contact button on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity is enabled. When interviewers click the button, they are presented with a dialog box from which they can select whether to retrieve their last contact or search for a contact. If they choose to search for a contact, they can select the ﬁeld to search and specify the value to search for. The choice of ﬁelds to search is determined by the settings in the Show column in Interviewing - Display Fields.
Automatically select next contact: When selected, the interviewing program will automatically

select an interviewer’s next contact; when not selected, interviewers must click a button to request their next contact. Interviewers working on projects with this option set will see a check box labeled “Auto contact selection” just above the list of call outcomes, so it is still possible for some interviewers to work in fully manual mode if you wish. Some projects may use a combination of automated and modem or manual dialing. You can still select the “automatically select next contact” option for these projects, but interviewers who are using the dialer will need to cancel the “Auto contact selection” check box on the interviewing screen otherwise they will not be able to stop the dialer making calls when they reach the end of their shift or need to take a break.
Enable monitoring/recording: When selected, supervisors can monitor and record interviewers

while they are in progress.
Interviewer must get approval for monitoring/recording: When selected, interviewers must obtain

consent for monitoring and recording from each participant. Depending on your local laws or your organization’s policy, you can conﬁgure monitoring for three different scenarios:
Scenario Monitoring and recording are not allowed for this project Monitoring and recording are always allowed for this project Monitoring and recording are allowed only if the participant gives his or her consent To Specify This Clear the Enable monitoring/recording check box. Select the Enable monitoring/recording check box and clear the The interviewer must get approval for monitoring/recording check box. Select the Enable monitoring/recording and The interviewer must get approval for monitoring/recording

check boxes.

If you have selected The interviewer must get approval for monitoring/recording, Yes and No options will appear on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity whenever interviewers retrieve a contact. As part of their introductory script, interviewers must ask each participant if they give their consent for monitoring and recording, and record the participant’s answer by selecting either Yes or No. The three options underneath The interviewer must get approval for monitoring/recording determine the default settings of the Yes and No options as described below:
Option
Interviewer must manually select an option

Description The interviewer must always select either Yes or No.

307 Activating questionnaires

Option
Default setting is ‘monitoring/recording prohibited’ Default setting is ‘monitoring/recording allowed’

Description The No option is selected by default. The interviewer can change the selection. The Yes option is selected by default. The interviewer can change the selection.

Allow Interviewer to start an interview without a dialer connection to a respondent: When selected,

interviewers are allowed to start interviews without a dialer connection to a respondent.

Interviewing - Review
The Review settings allow you to specify whether interviewers can review the participant’s responses after the interview has completed.
Figure 11-25 Review settings

Review interview options: The drop-down list provides the following options:
Option
No Review Review Interview Review Open-ends

Description The interviewer cannot review interviews. The interviewer can review the whole interview. The interviewer can review open-ended (text) responses only.

If you have selected either Review Interview or Review Open-ends, you can then choose between the following two settings.

308 Chapter 11

Show the review button on the Interviewer screen: When selected, the interviewer must click the
Review Completed Interview button in the Phone Participants activity in order to start the review.

Interviewer must review: When selected, the review starts automatically when the interview

ﬁnishes.

Telephone - Calling Rules settings
The Calling Rules settings allow you to deﬁne speciﬁc calling rules for a telephone interviewing project.
Figure 11-26 Calling Rules settings

You can conﬁgure settings for: Parameters Ordering Call Times Appointments Overrides

Calling Rules - Parameters
The Parameters settings allow you to specify the amount of time to wait before re-dialing numbers that are busy, unanswered, or answered by an answering machine.

309 Activating questionnaires

You set these parameters at the start of the project, and can change them throughout the interviewing period to match the current requirements of the survey. For example, if it is the last day of the survey and you are running low on new participants, you might want to increase the maximum number of times that numbers may be called. You might also wish to reduce the elapse times for automatically set appointments so that numbers with callbacks become available for recall more quickly.
Figure 11-27 Calling Rules settings

Time parameters: The table allows you to deﬁne the amount of time to wait before attempting to

re-dial samples that meet a speciﬁc criteria (no answer, busy, and so on). Enter appropriate values (in minutes) for each call category.
Give preference to the interviewer who arranged the appointment: When selected, the interviewer

who arranged the appointment is given preference over other available interviewers (as it applies to scheduling when samples can be retried). If the project uses group/predictive autodialing,

310 Chapter 11

the interviewer will not be connected automatically to the participant who has an appointment. Instead, the participant’s details are displayed on the interviewer’s screen, and the interviewer must then click the Start Dialing button to dial the participant’s phone number.
Before an appointment, by the arranger only: The number of minutes before a scheduled

appointment that the interviewer, who arranged the appointment, may attempt to retry the sample.
After an appointment, by any interviewer: The number of minutes after a scheduled appointment

that any available interviewer may attempt to retry the sample.
No preference for appointments: When selected, any available interviewer is allowed to retry the sample, regardless of who arranged the appointment. This is the default setting. Before an appointment, by any interviewer: The number of minutes before a scheduled

appointment that any available interviewer may attempt to retry the sample.
Before a recall: The number of minutes before the recall time that a number with an automatic

appointment can be called. The default is ten minutes.
Time zones: The time zones in which participants are located. The values that you enter in this ﬁeld must be the indexes of the time zones in the list of time zones stored in the registry. If more than one time zone is speciﬁed, the numbers must be separated by semicolons. If this property is blank, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server will ignore time zone and calling times when selecting records for interviewers to call.
Time Zone Name Greenwich Standard Time GMT Standard Time Morocco Standard Time W. Europe Standard Time Central Europe Standard Time Romance Standard Time Central European Standard Time W. Central Africa Standard Time GTB Standard Time E. Europe Standard Time Egypt Standard Time South Africa Standard Time FLE Standard Time Israel Standard Time Displayed As (GMT) Casablanca, Monrovia (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London (GMT) Casablanca (GMT+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna (GMT+01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague (GMT+01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris (GMT+01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb (GMT+01:00) West Central Africa (GMT+02:00) Athens, Istanbul, Minsk (GMT+02:00) Bucharest (GMT+02:00) Cairo (GMT+02:00) Harare, Pretoria (GMT+02:00) Helsinki, Kyiv, Riga, Soﬁa, Tallinn, Vilnius (GMT+02:00) Jerusalem Index Value 90 85 -2147483571 110 95 105 100 113 130 115 120 140 125 135

311 Activating questionnaires

Time Zone Name Jordan Standard Time Middle East Standard Time Namibia Standard Time Arabic Standard Time Arab Standard Time Russian Standard Time E. Africa Standard Time Georgian Standard Time Iran Standard Time Arabian Standard Time Caucasus Standard Time Azerbaijan Standard Time Mauritius Standard Time Armenian Standard Time Afghanistan Standard Time Ekaterinburg Standard Time West Asia Standard Time Pakistan Standard Time India Standard Time Nepal Standard Time N. Central Asia Standard Time Central Asia Standard Time Sri Lanka Standard Time Myanmar Standard Time SE Asia Standard Time North Asia Standard Time China Standard Time North Asia East Standard Time Singapore Standard Time W. Australia Standard Time Taipei Standard Time Tokyo Standard Time Korea Standard Time Yakutsk Standard Time Cen. Australia Standard Time

Displayed As (GMT+02:00) Amman (GMT+02:00) Beirut (GMT+02:00) Windhoek (GMT+03:00) Baghdad (GMT+03:00) Kuwait, Riyadh (GMT+03:00) Moscow, St. Petersburg, Volgograd (GMT+03:00) Nairobi (GMT+03:00) Tbilisi (GMT+03:30) Tehran (GMT+04:00) Abu Dhabi, Muscat (GMT+04:00) Baku, Tbilisi, Yerevan (GMT+04:00) Baku (GMT+04:00) Port Louis (GMT+04:00) Yerevan (GMT+04:30) Kabul (GMT+05:00) Ekaterinburg (GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent GMT+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi (GMT+05:30) Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi (GMT+05:45) Kathmandu (GMT+06:00) Almaty, Novosibirsk (GMT+06:00) Astana, Dhaka (GMT+06:00) Sri Jayawardenepura (GMT+06:30) Rangoon (GMT+07:00) Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta (GMT+07:00) Krasnoyarsk (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi (GMT+08:00) Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar (GMT+08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Singapore (GMT+08:00) Perth (GMT+08:00) Taipei (GMT+09:00) Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo (GMT+09:00) Seoul (GMT+09:00) Yakutsk (GMT+09:30) Adelaide

Index Value -2147483582 -2147483583 -2147483578 158 150 145 155 -2147483577 160 165 170 -2147483584 -2147483569 -2147483574 175 180 185 -2147483570 190 193 201 195 200 203 205 207 210 227 215 225 220 235 230 240 250

312 Chapter 11

Time Zone Name AUS Central Standard Time E. Australia Standard Time AUS Eastern Standard Time West Paciﬁc Standard Time Tasmania Standard Time Vladivostok Standard Time Central Paciﬁc Standard Time New Zealand Standard Time Fiji Standard Time Tonga Standard Time Azores Standard Time Cape Verde Standard Time Mid-Atlantic Standard Time Argentina Standard Time E. South America Standard Time SA Eastern Standard Time Greenland Standard Time Montevideo Standard Time Newfoundland Standard Time Atlantic Standard Time Central Brazilian Standard Time SA Western Standard Time Paciﬁc SA Standard Time Venezuela Standard Time SA Paciﬁc Standard Time Eastern Standard Time US Eastern Standard Time Central America Standard Time Central Standard Time Central Standard Time (Mexico) Mexico Standard Time Canada Central Standard Time US Mountain Standard Time Mexico Standard Time 2

Displayed As (GMT+09:30) Darwin (GMT+10:00) Brisbane (GMT+10:00) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney (GMT+10:00) Guam, Port Moresby (GMT+10:00) Hobart (GMT+10:00) Vladivostok (GMT+11:00) Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia (GMT+12:00) Auckland, Wellington (GMT+12:00) Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is. (GMT+13:00) Nuku’alofa (GMT-01:00) Azores (GMT-01:00) Cape Verde Is. (GMT-02:00) Mid-Atlantic (GMT-03:00) Buenos Aires (GMT-03:00) Brasilia (GMT-03:00) Buenos Aires, Georgetown (GMT-03:00) Greenland (GMT-03:00) Montevideo (GMT-03:30) Newfoundland (GMT-04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada) (GMT-04:00) Manaus (GMT-04:00) Caracas, La Paz (GMT-04:00) Santiago (GMT-04:30) Caracas (GMT-05:00) Bogota, Lima, Quito (GMT-05:00) Eastern Time (US and Canada) (GMT-05:00) Indiana (East) (GMT-06:00) Central America (GMT-06:00) Central Time (US, Canada) (GMT-06:00) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey (GMT-06:00) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey - Old (GMT-06:00) Saskatchewan (GMT-07:00) Arizona (GMT-07:00) Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan - Old

Index Value 245 260 255 275 265 270 280 290 285 300 80 83 75 -2147483572 65 70 73 -2147483575 60 50 -2147483576 55 56 -2147483573 45 35 40 33 20 -2147483581 30 25 15 13

313 Activating questionnaires

Time Zone Name Mountain Standard Time Mountain Standard Time (Mexico) Paciﬁc Standard Time Paciﬁc Standard Time (Mexico) Alaskan Standard Time Hawaiian Standard Time Samoa Standard Time Dateline Standard Time

Displayed As (GMT-07:00) Mountain Time (US, Canada) (GMT-07:00) Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan (GMT-08:00) Paciﬁc Time (US, Canada), Tijuana (GMT-08:00) Tijuana, Baja California (GMT-09:00) Alaska (GMT-10:00) Hawaii (GMT-11:00) Midway Island, Samoa (GMT-12:00) International Date Line West

Index Value 10 -2147483580 4 -2147483579 3 2 1 0

Filter interviewers based on their qualifications: When selected, calls are assigned to interviewers

based on interviewer qualiﬁcations. For example, if the participant’s native language is Spanish, then assign the call to a Spanish speaking interviewer.

Calling Rules - Ordering
The Ordering settings allow you to specify the order in which records are retrieved from each individual queue. For example, you may want to ﬁrst dial records with a higher number of attempts when scanning the Recall queue.

314 Chapter 11 Figure 11-28 Ordering settings

Ordering records: The table deﬁnes the ordering of records, by ﬁeld, in each queue. Select the

ﬁeld order from the Field drop-down menus.
Prioritize recalls over fresh. Allows you to specify the frequency in which recalls to busy and

other unanswered calls take priority over calls to new numbers. Specify a percentage to check the RECALL queue before the FRESH queue. For example, specifying a value of 25% would result in the RECALL queue being checked before the FRESH queue for one-in-four calls. The default value is 90%.
Order records within each queue: The table displays the current ﬁeld order for each queue and

allows you to deﬁne which sample ﬁelds will be used for ordering the queue records.
Setting Queue Description The queue name. The names are not modiﬁable.

315 Activating questionnaires

Setting Direction Sort By

Description The drop-down list provides all sample ﬁelds available to its relative queue. Select an appropriate ﬁeld from the list. The order in which the selected sample ﬁeld will be sorted. The drop-down list provides options for Ascending and Descending.

Notes

When queue ordering and ﬁeld/weight ordering are both speciﬁed, queue ordering is used to resolve parallel ordering. Records with values for which no order or weight are speciﬁed are retrieved last from the Appointment queue (records are not retrieved from any of the other queues).

Calling Rules - Call Times
The Call Times settings allow you to specify the project’s valid participant call times and day parts. Day parts allow you to ensure that records are called at speciﬁc times of the day in order to increase the chance of success in reaching participants. Note: If you have an existing project that uses pre-version 5.6 sample management scripts, you can setup day parts but they will not be recognized. The use of day parts requires version 5.6 or higher sample management scripts.

316 Chapter 11 Figure 11-29 Call Times settings

Weekday: Allows you to specify valid weekday participant call times: Start (hh:mm). The earliest time at which participants may be called on weekdays. Enter

an appropriate start time.
End (hh:mm). The latest time at which participants may be called on weekdays. Enter an

appropriate end time.
Weekend: Allows you to specify valid weekend participant call times: Start (hh:mm). The earliest time at which participants may be called on weekends. Enter

an appropriate start time.
End (hh:mm). The latest time at which participants may be called on weekends. Enter an

appropriate start time. By default, a weekend runs from 00:01 on Saturday to midnight on Sunday. The Sample Management script will handle situations where the project has participants in time zones with different deﬁnitions of weekdays and weekends.
Single day part: When selected, the time parameters deﬁned in the Valid participant call times

section are used.

317 Activating questionnaires

Maximum tries. The maximum number of times that a record may be called. The default is 3. If an Appointment is made, then an additional “Maximum Tries” tries can be made to connect the appointment. Using day parts. When selected, you can utilize an existing day parts template that deﬁnes valid

participant call times.
Day parts: The table lists all day parts that are currently deﬁned for the project and allows you

to add new day parts.
Setting Day Part Tries Start Time End Time Value Description The day part name. Enter an appropriate name. The maximum number of times that a record may be called. Enter an appropriate value. The earliest time at which participants may be called. Enter the earliest call time. The latest time at which participants may be called. Enter the latest call time. Enter the appropriate days of the week to contact participants.

Clear Daypart(s). Click to clear any currently deﬁned day part settings in the Day Parts table. Load Template... Click to load an existing day parts template. Templates are stored in the Distributed Property Management (DPM). See the “Distributed Property Management (DPM)” topic in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for more information. Save As... Click to save the current settings, listed in the Day Parts table, as a template in DPM. The

Save As... dialog displays, allowing you to specify a template name. Enter an appropriate template name and click Save. Otherwise click Cancel to return to the Call Times dialog without saving.

Calling Rules - Appointments
The Appointments settings allow you to specify a project expiry date and create appointment schedules. An appointment schedule can be used to specify the interviewer shifts and holidays, ensuring that appointments can be made when interviewers are working. There can be multiple appointment schedules for a distributed site. Appointment schedules may differ between projects and are therefore project speciﬁc. For example, interviewers may be scheduled to call business projects during the day and consumer projects in the evening.

318 Chapter 11 Figure 11-30 Appointments settings

Project Expiry (UTC Time). Provides options for specifying a project expiration time. Date: The project expiration date. You can manually enter a date, in the format mm/dd/yyyy, or

you can click the down arrow to display a calendar and select a date.
Time: The project expiration time. This indicates the exact time of day, for the selected date,

that the project will expire. Enter an appropriate time in the 24-hour format hh:mm (for example 17:00 for 5:00 PM).
Appointment Schedule. Provides options for clearing the existing sub-schedules, loading schedule

templates, and saving schedule templates.

319 Activating questionnaires

Selected template: Displays the name of the currently loaded appointment schedule template. When a template is not loaded, not using template displays. Sub-schedules: Lists available sub-schedules. Creating a new sub-schedule
E Enter an appropriate name in the Sub-schedule ﬁeld.

Removing an existing sub-schedule
E Right-click the cell to the left of the appropriate sub-schedule name and select Remove.

Regular shifts in sub-schedule: The table lists all shifts currently deﬁned for the selected

sub-schedule.
Creating new shifts for a sub-schedule
E Select a sub-schedule from the Sub-schedule list. If no sub-schedules exist, you must either create

a new sub-schedule or load an appointment schedule template.
E Enter the appropriate shift information in the table.

Setting Days Start Time End Time

Description Select the appropriate days of the week to contact participants. The earliest time at which participants may be called. Enter the earliest call time. The latest time at which participants may be called. Enter the latest call time.

Date overrides: The table lists all date override shifts currently deﬁned for the selected sub-schedule. Date overrides allow you to specify speciﬁc dates and/or times where appointments are not allowed, as well as deﬁne speciﬁc dates and times that will override the shifts deﬁned in the Regular Shifts table. Creating new date overrides for a sub-schedule
E Select a sub-schedule from the Sub-schedule list. If no sub-schedules exist, you must either create

a new sub-schedule or load an appointment schedule template.
E Enter the appropriate date override information in the table.

Setting Type

Date

Description The drop-down menu provides the following options: No appointment. Select this option when you want to deﬁne speciﬁc dates and times where no appointments are allowed Date override. Select this option when you want to deﬁne speciﬁc dates and times that override the shifts deﬁned in the Regular Shifts table. The drop-down menu allows you to select speciﬁc no appointment or date override dates. Select the appropriate date(s).

320 Chapter 11

Setting Start Time End Time

Description When No appointment is selected, the starting time at which participants may not be called. Enter the starting time. When Date override is selected, the earliest time at which participants may be called. Enter the earliest call time. When No appointment is selected, the end time at which participants may not be called. Enter the end time. When Date override is selected, the latest time at which participants may be called. Enter the latest call time.

Clear Schedule. Click to clear any currently deﬁned sub-schedules. Load Template... Click to load an existing appointment schedule template. Templates are stored

in the Distributed Property Management (DPM). See the “Distributed Property Management (DPM)” topic in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for more information.
Save As. Click to save the current schedule settings as a template in DPM. The Save As... dialog

displays, allowing you to specify a schedule template name. Enter an appropriate schedule template name and click Save. Otherwise click Cancel to return to the Appointments dialog without saving.

Calling Rules - Overrides
The Overrides settings allow you to specify the parameters that control dialing for a subset of records. All records, except those in the speciﬁed subset, continue to follow the base dialing rules. Parameters that can be overridden are: The maximum number of attempts for a record. The call back delay for numbers that are not answered, busy, answered by an answering machine, or started on the web. In addition, you can specify that a subset of records be identiﬁed as having a high priority. High priority records are generally called before other records. This feature could be used, for example, if you discover that the completion percentage for a particular subset of records (region for example) is particularly low. You could indicate that the subset has priority until the completion percentage reaches the average, at which point you could disable the override.

321 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-31 Overrides settings

Prioritize. Select this option when you want the specify that the Selection criteria value be identiﬁed

as having priority over other records. High priority records are generally called before other records
Selection criteria. Identiﬁes the subset of records upon which the override parameters are based.

Enter an appropriate criteria.
Time parameters: The table allows you to specify an override value (in minutes) for speciﬁc

delay types:
Delay Type No answer delay Busy delay Answering machine delay Web callback delay Description The callback delay (in minutes) for numbers that are not answered. Enter an appropriate value in the corresponding Override (minutes) cell. The callback delay (in minutes) for numbers that are busy. Enter an appropriate value in the corresponding Override (minutes) cell. The callback delay (in minutes) for numbers that are answered by an answering machine. Enter an appropriate value in the corresponding Override (minutes) cell. The callback delay (in minutes) for surveys that are started on the Web. Enter an appropriate value in the corresponding Override (minutes) cell.

Maximum tries (for any day parts). Speciﬁes the maximum number of callback attempts for each

participant. Enter an appropriate value.

322 Chapter 11

Telephone - Dialing settings
The Dialing settings allow you to conﬁgure autodialer related parameters.
Figure 11-32 Dialing settings

You can conﬁgure settings for: Autodialer Predictive Answering Machine Detection

Dialing - Autodialer
The Autodialer settings allow you to deﬁne settings that relate to the use of an autodialer. The autodialer settings are only valid when IBM SPSS Dialer (Extension) – Power dial for the interviewer screen or IBM SPSS Dialer (Group) – Dial for the interview in a group (with optional predictive dialing) is selected as a Dialing option in the Interviewer settings.

323 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-33 Autodialer settings

Send caller identification: When selected, the caller’s telephone number is transmitted when

the autodialer makes a call.
Phone number to send (leave blank to use dialer’s settings): Enter a valid phone number. The phone number must contain only the digits 0 to 9, * and # (optionally preceded by a plus (+) to present the international access code). In addition, the phone number can contain the visual separators SPACE, (, ), . and -. Visual separators are not allowed before the ﬁrst digit. Error if login position is not in configuration: When selected, the Phone Participants activity will not

open on a station with an unrecognized position and an error message will be displayed instead. When not selected, stations with unrecognized positions can be used to conduct interviews (the Phone Participants activity will still open), and manual dialing must be used on those stations.
Ring time: Enter the minimum length of time (in seconds) that an unanswered phone call must ring before the autodialer terminates the call. Make sure that you set a value that allows participants plenty of time to pick up the phone. In addition, local laws might specify the minimum value that you must use. The default value is 15 seconds. Name of silent call announcement file (leave blank to use dialer’s settings): Enter the name of a

wave-sound (.wav) ﬁle that contains a message that will be played to the participant when a silent call occurs (for example, SilentCall.wav). Silent calls can occur when an autodialer generates more calls than there are interviewers available to handle the calls. The .wav ﬁle must be located in the autodialer’s “audio” folder, the location of which is deﬁned in the autodialer’s dialer.ini ﬁle.

324 Chapter 11

You can also specify a .wav ﬁle that is located in a sub folder of the audio folder by including a relative path (for example, Projects\MyProject\SilentCall.wav).
Time to try connecting to interviewer: Enter the numbers of minutes that interviewers must wait

to be connected to a participant before the autodialer cancels the connection attempt, allowing interviewers to leave their stations if they need to. The default value is 10 minutes.
Percentage of calls to record: Enter the percentage of calls that the autodialer will record. Both

individual questions and entire calls are recorded, and the recordings are saved as sound ﬁles in the autodialer’s ﬁle system. To record calls, enter a whole number from 0 to 100. To record no calls or all calls, enter 0 or 100 respectively. The default value is 0. If you enter any other value, that percentage of calls will be selected at random for recording, with the following exceptions: All subsequent calls to a participant whose previous call was recorded will also be recorded. This includes calls to keep an appointment or calls to complete an interview that was interrupted by a disconnection. Calls to participants retrieved by the Speciﬁc Contact button are recorded only if that participant was called previously and that previous call was recorded. Note that when you change this setting, there might be a delay of up to a minute before the new value takes effect. For more information, use the search function in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text “Recording Calls and Interviews” and in the search results open the topic with that title.

Dialing - Predictive
The Predictive settings allow you to conﬁgure the predictive autodialing parameters. When using predictive dialing, the autodialer dials participants before interviewers are available to answer the connected calls. That is, the software predicts when interviewers will become available. This mode can deliver the highest interviewer productivity, but may result in silent calls. The predictive settings are only valid when the Dialer (Group/Predictive) – Show Start Dialing button on the Interviewer screen option is selected as the Dialing option in the Interviewer settings.

325 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-34 Predictive settings

Initial dialing aggressiveness: The initial “aggressiveness” of the autodialing system when it

calculates the number of predictive calls to make. A higher aggressiveness setting can lead to less wait time for interviewers, but might result in more silent calls. Enter a whole number between 0 and 100. The default value is 0. To stop the autodialing system from dialing predictively, set Initial dialing aggressiveness to 0. In this mode, the autodialer dials participants only when interviewers click the Start Dialing button in the Phone Participants activity, which is unlikely to result in silent calls.
Maximum percentage of silent calls: The maximum percentage of silent calls that are allowed to

occur in the 24 hour period (since midnight). If the actual rate of silent calls approaches this value, the autodialing system reduces the current rate of predictive calls to ensure that the maximum percentage of silent calls is not exceeded. Enter a decimal value between 0 and 100. The default value is 0.
Target percentage of silent calls: The target percentage of silent calls that should occur at any time. The autodialing system attempts to keep the actual rate of silent calls at this value by continually adjusting the current rate of predictive calls. Enter a decimal value between 0 and 100. The value must be less than the value of Maximum percentage of silent calls. The default value is 0.

326 Chapter 11

Dialing - Answering Machine Detection
The Answering Machine Detection settings allow you to conﬁgure parameters relating to answering machine detection. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Dialer supports a simple answering machine detection (AMD) that can be useful when dialing residential numbers. It is based on the observation that human greetings are usually short, whereas answering machine messages are long. When an auto-dialed participant record is dialed, and Dialer detects that an answering machine picked up the call, the call is automatically ended with the Answering Machine call outcome when the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server is properly conﬁgured to support the feature. Answering machine detection is currently conﬁgured through the DPM Explorer tool.
Figure 11-35 Answering Machine Detection settings

Mode: The answering machine detection mode. Possible values include: Disabled, Filtering, and
Calibration.

Parameters: The table lists the current answering machine detection parameters. All of the

optional parameters (off, max, on, db, and so on) are encapsulated in this property. For example, max:4.5,on:11 (using commas as the delimiter).

327 Activating questionnaires

Announcement file: The name of the sound ﬁle to play for an answering machine, including the pathname (relative to AudioDir on the Dialer). You are not required to provide a value for this setting. False Positives

False positives are humans that were misinterpreted as answering machines, in which case the dialer hangs up the call, or plays the amfile. The main causes of false positives are: The human speaks a long greeting (> max). This typically happens when reaching a business number. If an amfile ﬁle is speciﬁed, the respondent will hear it. The human has loud background noise (permanently above the db threshold). This typically occurs with car phones. The playback of amfile starts when the AMD algorithm has waited for end-of-greeting for off seconds. However, this timer needs to be longer than the longest AM greeting (~30 seconds), so it is unlikely that the respondent will wait long enough to hear amfile. Humans can also be misinterpreted as “No audio”. This occurs when: There is no audio connection (for example, because the battery in the respondent’s phone is running low). After on seconds without start-of-voice, the dialer hangs up (call outcome: No audio). The human picks up the phone but does not start speaking immediately (for example, the respondent is busy, or due to a disability). After on seconds, the dialer hangs up. The greeting was spoken very softly (below the db threshold). Usually the respondent speaks up louder, but if the voice is not raised the dialer hangs up after on seconds. The dialer plays the amfile to “No audio” numbers unless the setting is disabled by option cp:-S (hangup immediately if silence).
Qualification Timers

Spoken words contains short gaps in the audio due to articulation. The dialer ignores gaps that are shorter than a qualiﬁcation timer qoff; that is, the end-of-voice is asserted when qoff expires. The dialer utilizes two qualiﬁcation timers: qoff, for humans, determines when a call is connected to an interviewer. The settings should be short (2 seconds), otherwise the playback might start before the answering machine is ready to record it.
Calibration Mode

Calibration mode is a means to determine the optimum AMD parameters. In calibration mode, all calls are connected to interviewers (just as when AMD is disabled). The AMD measures the duration of the respondent’s initial greeting. During this phase, the interviewer can hear

328 Chapter 11

the respondent, but cannot talk. When the AMD measurement is ﬁnished (end-of-voice), the interviewer hears a short beep (WBeep) and audio is connected in both directions. In cases of long initial silence (longer than coff seconds) or persistent voice (longer than con seconds), the AMD measurement is aborted and audio is connected in both directions. This makes it possible to try out different values of db and qoff without losing the contacts. The greet time measured by AMD is sent to the application and recorded in call.log. To determine the reliability of a given max setting for the AMD call dispositions, make a frequency distribution of the call outcomes according to the following table:
Interviewer’s Disposition AMD ReportedgreetValue

Human (proceed, appointment, refusal, and so on) Answering machine

greet = 0 False positive? [1] Semi-correct (AM) [2]

greet ≤ max Correct (human) False negative

greet > max False positive Correct (AM)

[1]greet=0 can be an artifact from using a too small coff value, such that the AMD measurement

was abandoned before the greeting started.
[2]greet=0 starts playback of amfile, but possibly too early, before the answering machine is

ready to record it.
Summary of AMD Modes and Parameters

Syntax: mode , param1 : value , param2 : value2... Example: amd = 1,qoff:0.40,log:1
Mode 0 1 2 Meaning Disabled Filtering Calibration Description No AMD analysis (but the Call Progress parameter cp is used). Only “live” calls are through-connected to an interviewer; otherwise the amfile is played. Calls are connected in listen-only mode during AMD analysis; the result is reported in greet. Description Max silence at start of call Max silence at start of call Max greeting from human [1] Max greeting from AM Max greeting measured Action if exceeded Hangup QSAMP_NO_AUDIO Connect two-way audio Hangup QSAMP_ANSMC Play amfile to AM Connect two-way audio Applies to Filtering Calibration Filtering Filtering Calibration

Name off coff max on con

Default 6.0 4.5 1.15 60.0 3.0

Unit seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds

329 Activating questionnaires

Name qoff qam db log

Default 0.35 2.9 -34.0 0

Unit seconds seconds dBm 0 or 1

Description Qualiﬁcation timer for end of voice [2] Qualiﬁcation timer for starting playback Silence threshold (range -46 to -34 dBm) [3] If =1, report greet and silence times (milliseconds) in call.log[4] Override dialer.ini call progress analysis completion criteria CpComplete[5]

Action if exceeded Connect QSAMP_CONNECTED Play amfile Start max timer

Applies to Both Filtering Both Both

cp

All

[1]max recommended range from 0.9 seconds (aggressive, many false positives) to 2.1 seconds

(conservative, many false negatives). [2]qoff recommended range from 0.3 seconds (many false negatives) to 1.1 (detects most AM, but connects humans very slowly to an interviewer). [3]db should be high (insensitive) to avoid detecting people in noisy environments as answering machines (false positives). [4]log times are measured on the dialer PC and can differ slightly from the greet times measured by the DSP. [4]log times are measured on the dialer PC and can differ slightly from the greet times measured by the DSP. [5]cp should normally not be applied for AMD; the only relevant parameter is cp:-S. If persistent silence is detected, hangup call without playing amfile.
AMD Parameter for Call Progress Analysis

The cp parameter speciﬁes the actions to take when detecting call progress tones, overriding the default call progress analysis completion criteria CpComplete in the dialer.ini ﬁle. Application areas: Calling countries with non-standard ringback or “number unobtainable” tones. Calling networks that announce tariff information at the start of the call. Calling subscribers with personalized ringback tones (music or announcements). In order to achieve special effects, such as recording of in-band announcements. The table below lists the different call progress events. Each event is identiﬁed by a letter; pre-CONNECT events in lower case, post-CONNECT in upper case. Each letter or group of letters is preceded by an action identiﬁer (see the legend below the table). The post-CONNECT events are only detected in AMD ﬁltering or calibration mode (amd=1 or amd=2). Syntax: cp:actionID event... [ actionID event... ] ... Default: cp:-b-c-d-f!r:t:v-B-C+D-F-T

330 Chapter 11

Example: cp:=vea Ignore pre-CONNECT voice events (for instance, personalized ringback tones). Example: cp:*t*v Record recfile when detecting tritone or start-of-voice (until stopped by noansw timeout). Example: cp:+v Connect to extension when detecting start-of-voice.
Call Progress Event Def ault pre post con nect Call Outcome if Action is ‘-’ or ‘:’ Dialer Interviewer Phone IBM® SPSS® Quancept™

d Dial tone (steady tone for >3 s) r Ringback pulse (duration 1.5 - 3 s) q End of ringback (no pulse for >8 s) b Busy tone (cadence or “precise” tone [8]) c Congested / reorder tone (cadence) t Tritone (Special Information Tone) f Fax/modem tone v Start of voice (diffuse energy above db dBm) e End of voice (for qoff seconds) a Voice for more than max seconds s Silence; no voice for off seconds [9] w Call waiting, ignore voice events [10]

-d !r =q -b -c :t -f :v =e =a n/a =w

+D =R =Q -B -C -T -F =V =E =A =S =W

QSAMP_BADNUMBER QSAMP_RINGING QSAMP_NOANSW QSAMP_BUSY QSAMP_FASTBUSY QSAMP_TRITONE QSAMP_MODEM QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT QSAMP_BUSY

QSAMP_BUSY n/a [6] coNoAnswer coBusy coFastBusy coTriTone coFaxModem coAnnouncement coAnnouncement coAnnouncement coNoAudio coBusy

d_badsyn d_error [7] d_na d_busy d_sitout d_sitout d_modem d_sitout d_sitout d_sitout d_error [7] d_busy

: + *

Action identiﬁers: Hangup immediately. Hangup if no CONNECT is received within two seconds. Connect to extension even if no CONNECT was received. Start recording (for use with recfile option beg:3).

! Start noansw timer. ^ Stop CP analysis (ends AMD, connecting the extension). = No action (can be used to override default actions).

[6] Call outcome QSAMP_RINGING does not map to a supported CallOutcome in Interviewer

Phone 5.6. [7] Call outcomes can be mapped to other tipcode values in section [qsamp map] in the qts-sms.ini ﬁle. [8] “Precise” tone meaning the 480 + 620 Hz busy tone of the North American Precise Audible Tones Plan.

331 Activating questionnaires [9] Condition S (silence) is only generated in AMD ﬁltering or calibration mode (amd=1 or amd=2). [10] Condition W (waiting) is generated by signaling events with the action announcemt in

causes.cfg.

Activate Current Project - Quota settings
The Quota settings provide options for specifying the project’s Quota Control parameters. Note: The Quota node displays under the Activate tree when the Use quota control option is selected from the Project settings dialog.
Figure 11-36 Quota settings

Create new quota database: Select this option if you are activating the project for the ﬁrst time, or

if you are reactivating but this is the ﬁrst time that you have had quota information available. The exception is when your new project shares quotas with another project. In this case, if the shared quota database already exists, select the quota database from the list instead. When a project uses quota control and you activate it for the ﬁrst time, the activation process creates a new quota database for the project using the information in the project’s quota deﬁnition (.mqd) ﬁle. The quota database is a set of tables whose names start with QUOTA and which the activation process creates inside the project database. They contain deﬁnitions of the quota groups and their targets and, once interviewing starts, counts of completed, pending, and rolled back interviews for each group. The quota deﬁnition (.mqd) ﬁle is the ﬁle that the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection

332 Chapter 11

Quota Setup program creates when you save the quota deﬁnitions and targets. The activation process uses the ﬁle to determine the structure and content of the quota database it is to create. The .mqd ﬁle is not used during interviewing.
Use existing quota database: If the project has been previously activated with quota, or it shares an

existing quota database with another project, select this option and then select the appropriate quota database from the drop-down list.
Do not update the quota definitions on the server: When selected, quota deﬁnitions on the server

will not be updated.
Publish new quota definitions, but do not update existing quotas: When selected, any new deﬁnitions are updated to the server, but existing deﬁnitions on the server remain unchanged. Update quota with changes made in the project’s mqd file Once a quota database exists, this check box is always available for selection but is unchecked. If you have made changes to the .mqd ﬁle, select this check box if you want these changes to be implemented in the quota database.

Note: If you have changed quotas using the Quotas activity in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration these changes will have been written to the quota database but will not appear in the project’s .mqd ﬁle. If you choose to activate using the .mqd ﬁle, the changes you made with the Quotas activity will be lost. If you want to keep these changes, you will need to make them in the .mqd ﬁle using Quota Setup before reactivating.
IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup

To set up a quota control ﬁle for the project, use the Quota Setup program. This is available from the Start menu by choosing:
All Programs > IBM Corp. > IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 > Accessories > Quota

Follow the instructions in the Quota Setup program’s online help (see the Deﬁning Table Quotas and Deﬁning Expression Quotas topics). However, when you save a quota deﬁnition (.mqd) ﬁle you must save it in a subfolder beneath the questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁle (not in the same folder as the questionnaire ﬁle).

Activate Current Project - Advanced settings
The Advanced settings allow you to conﬁgure parameters that provide a more detailed level of control over the activation process.

333 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-37 Dialing settings

You can conﬁgure settings for: Page Templates Files Tasks Others

Advanced - Page Templates
The Page Templates settings provides options for deﬁning custom templates in place of some or all of the default templates.

334 Chapter 11 Figure 11-38 Page Templates settings

Use Custom Interview Templates. Select this check box if you want to use your own templates

for any of the listed events.
Custom templates: The table lists the default templates and allows you to deﬁne a custom template or URL for each default template.
Setting Name Type Description The default template name. Refer to the ‘Default templates’ section below for more information. Indicates whether the custom template information is generated from a template ﬁle, or a URL. The drop-down list provides the options None, Template, and URL. None - when selected, the default template is used. Template - when selected, a custom template ﬁle is used, and the template name must be speciﬁed in the associated Filename/URL cell. URL - when selected, a custom template URL is used, and the template URL must be speciﬁed in the associated Filename/URL cell. Identiﬁes the custom template ﬁlename or URL. Custom template ﬁles must be present in the project’s source directory, in [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Interviewer Server\Projects, or in a shared location on your web server. In all cases, you specify the ﬁle using a simple ﬁlename (not a path name). When the project is activated, templates that exist in the project’s source directory will be copied to the project’s directory in [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Interviewer Server\Projects. When interviews take place, the interviewing program will look for the templates ﬁrst in the project-speciﬁc directory and then in the main Projects directory.

Filename / URL

335 Activating questionnaires

Default templates

Note: You can specify all pages except Authenticate and Authenticate Retry as templates or URLs. For these two pages we strongly recommend using only templates, as URLs can result in an interview having two connection IDs.
Template Name Interview stopped Description The page to display when the participant stops an interview or the interview is stopped by a statement in the interview script. There is no default template but IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server displays ‘End of interview. Thank you for your participation.’ The page to display at the end of the interview (that is, when the participant has answered all relevant questions in the questionnaire). There is no default page, but Interviewer Server displays ‘End of interview. Thank you for your participation’. Note that if the interview ends with a display statement, this text is displayed as the last page of the interview instead. The page to display when a participant fails authentication and no retry prompt is required, for example, when the participant fails quota control. The default is a template named rejected.htm that displays the message ‘Thank you for your interest in participating in this survey.’ The page to display when an inbound project uses Sample Management, and you need to verify that the person taking the interview is a member of the participant group. The default is a template named authenticate.htm that displays the message ‘Please enter your authentication information’. The page to display when authentication fails. The default is a template named authfailed.htm that displays the message ‘Your authentication information is incorrect’. The page to display when authentication of a prospective participant against the participant database fails, and you want the participant to reenter the authentication details. The default page is a template named authretry.htm that displays the message ‘The authentication information you have entered is incorrect. Please try again’. The page to display when the participant attempts to start an interview for an inactive project. The default is a template named projinactive.htm that displays the message ‘Please come back later’. The page to display when the participant belongs in a quota cell whose target has already been met. There is no default page.

Interview completed

Interview rejected

Authenticate

Authenticate failed Authenticate retry

Project inactive Quota full

Click Reset if you want to return to the default settings.
Disabling button double-clicks in the default templates

Survey respondents are often presented the option of logging in to complete surveys. After a respondent enters a user ID and clicks OK, it can sometimes takes a few seconds for the server to authenticate the user credentials. If a respondent clicks OK a second time, the server may generate a message similar to the following:
Thank you for your interest in participating in this survey. A survey is active for your ID. Please continue the original survey or return in 10 minutes to restart.

336 Chapter 11

You can avoid this by adding the following script to the header tags for all default templates: function addEvent(target, eventName, handlerName) { if (target.addEventListener) // W3C { target.addEventListener(eventName, handlerName, false); return true; } else if (target.attachEvent) // IE { return target.attachEvent("on" + eventName, handlerName); } else { target["on" + eventName] = handlerName; } } var ctrlNext; ctrlNext = document.getElementsByName("_NNext")[0]; function NextClicked() { if(ctrlNext != null) { setTimeout('ctrlNext.disabled = true;', 1); } } addEvent(ctrlNext, 'click', NextClicked);

The script prevents additional clicks from registering with the server.

Advanced - Files
The Files settings provides options for excluding speciﬁc folders when activating a project. Excluding speciﬁc folders effectively limits the number of ﬁles that are uploaded during the activation process.

337 Activating questionnaires Figure 11-39 Files settings

Source files. This non-modiﬁable ﬁeld displays the source ﬁles location speciﬁed in the Project

Settings.
Include sub-folders. When selected, the sub-folders selected in the Sub-folders to include section are

copied to the Shared and Master project folders along with the main project ﬁles.
Sub-folders to include: Displays all sub-folders in the current Source ﬁles location. Select which

sub-folders will be activated with the project. Note: This option is only available when the Include sub-folders option is selected.

338 Chapter 11

Data Collection files to include. Displays all ﬁle types that can be copied when a IBM® SPSS®

Data Collection project is activated. File types not listed will not be activated with the project. Select which ﬁle types will be activated with the project. Note: You can add ﬁles to a project through activation, but you cannot remove ﬁles. Deselecting sub-folders, or Data Collection ﬁles to include, will not remove any folders/ﬁles from the server.

Advanced - Tasks
The Tasks settings allow you to specify which tasks the activation process will perform. Once a project has been activated for the ﬁrst time, this is an ideal way of reducing the time required for subsequent activations when only certain parts of the activation process need to be run. For example, if the project does not use Sample Management or Quota Control you can skip these tasks.
Figure 11-40 Tasks settings

Activate tasks: Specify which tasks the activation process should perform. Tasks are displayed in

a hierarchical structure that can be expanded by clicking the + symbols at the start of each line. Select the check boxes of the tasks you want the activation process to perform.

339 Activating questionnaires

Activate project. Run the complete activation process. This is the default and only option

the ﬁrst time you activate a project (even if that project does not use Sample Management or Quota Control).
Update project. Run all aspects of the Update Project part of the activation process. Update project database. Update the information held for this project in the project database. Update project files. Update the project ﬁles (project_name.xxx) for this project. Update FMRoot. Copy ﬁles from FMRoot\Shared into FMRoot\Master. Update interview server files. Copy ﬁles from FMRoot\Master to the Projects folder on all

IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Servers.
Update master MDM document. Update the master base language for this project to be the one

speciﬁed in Questionnaire Base Language on the Project Settings tab.
Update project in DPM. Update the basic project information held for this project in DPM. If

you are activating the project just to change its status, selecting this task and no others makes the change in the shortest possible time.
Update sample management. Run all aspects of the Sample Management part of the activation

process.
Update sample management in DPM. Update the Sample Management information held for

this project in DPM.
Update sample management database. Update the CATI Sample Management information held

for this project in DPM.
Update quota. Run all aspects of the Quota Control part of the activation process. Update quota database. Update the project’s quota database with information about the

project’s Quota Control requirements.
Update quota in DPM. Update the Quota Control information held for this project in DPM. Update phone interviewing. Run all aspects of the ‘Update Telephone’ part of the activation

process.
Update e-mail jobs. Update the project’s e-mail setup information.

Advanced - Others
The Others settings provides options for deﬁning a destination cluster, reporting setting, and dialog settings.

340 Chapter 11 Figure 11-41 Others settings

Destination cluster: The cluster on which to activate the project. If you are activating a project that

has already been activated — for example, if you have changed and recompiled the questionnaire — you must activate it on the same cluster that you previously used.
Use a reporting database: When selected, you can identify a reporting database. Reporting database connection: When Use a reporting database option is selected, this ﬁeld

displays the connection string to a reporting database. You can manually enter a connection string or click Edit... to launch the Data Link Properties dialog and construct a connection string.
Suppress interview template warnings: Select this option if you do not want the activation process

to display warnings if the project’s template ﬁles do not contain well-formed HTML.

IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console

12

Chapter

The IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Activation Console allows you to monitor questionnaire activation status. The console provides options for viewing pending and completed activations, and creating activation history ﬁlters. The console is composed of the following tabs: Activation History tab – allows you to view the status of both pending and completed activations. Filters tab – provides options for ﬁltering questionnaire activation history. Settings tab – provides options for conﬁguring the Activation Console. When the Activation Console is launched, an icon displays in the Windows taskbar. Whenever a questionnaire is submitted for activation, or completes activation, the icon provides relevant status notiﬁcation messages. The notiﬁcation messages include the survey URL link for each completed activation. For more information, see the topic Settings tab on p. 344.

Activation History tab
The Activation History tab allows you to view the status of both pending and completed activations. Note: In general, you are limited to viewing only your activations.
Pending Activations

The following information is provided:
ProjectIcon – Provides a visual cue for the activation status.
Icon Description Indicates that project ﬁles are currently uploading to the server. Indicates that the project is pending activation. Indicates that project activation is currently in progress.

Project – The project name as it appears in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server

Administration.
Status – The project activation status (pending, processing, success, or failed). Server – The name of the server to which the questionnaire is being activated.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 341

342 Chapter 12

User – The name of the user who initiated the activation. Submitted – The time at which the questionnaire was submitted for activation. This is the time

as reported by the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server.
Select all. Click to select all projects in the Pending Activations list. Cancel selected. Click to cancel activation for all selected projects. Completed activations

The following information is provided:
ProjectIcon – Provides a visual cue for the activation status.
Icon Description Indicates that project activation was successful. You can select the appropriate table row and click View Message... to view all activation messages. Indicates that project activation failed. You can select the appropriate table row and click View Message... to view related activation error information.

Project – The project name as it appears in Interviewer Server Administration. Status – The project activation status (pending, processing, success, or failed). Server – The name of the server to which the questionnaire is being activated. User – The name of the user who initiated the activation. ProcessingServer – The server that performs the activation. In a cluster environment, the server

to which an activation is submitted is not necessarily the server that performs the activation.
StartTime – The time at which the questionnaire was submitted for activation. This is the

time as reported by the Interviewer Server.
EndTime – The time at which the questionnaire completed activation. This is the time as

reported by the Interviewer Server.
Link – The URL for the activated, live questionnaire. Test Link – The URL for the activated, test questionnaire. ProjectId – The activated questionnaire project’s unique ID. The ID is generated by the

Interviewer Server.
Refresh. Click to refresh the activation status. View Messages. Select a completed activation and click to view any messages generated during

activation.
Removing pending activations
E Select the appropriate project(s) from the Pending Activation section. Alternatively you can select all project by clicking Select all. E Click Cancel selected or right-click and select Cancel.

343 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console

Note: You cannot remove activations initiated by other users. You can only remove your own activations.

Filters tab
The Filters tab provides options for deﬁning how activations are displayed on the Activation History tab.
Activation type. Displays the status for the current activation. When applicable, the drop-down list

allows you to select which activation types display on the Activation History tab. Options include:
All Activate – the activation history for activations submitted via the IBM® SPSS® Data

Collection Activation Console.
Launch – the activation history for activations submitted via the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection

Interviewer Server’s Launch activity.
Promote – the activation history for activations submitted via the Interviewer Server’s

Promote Project activity.
Activation history. The drop-down list allows you to select which activations display in the

Activation History tab. Options include:
All Successful activation Failed activation

Activation status. The check boxes allows you to select the activation status to display in the

Activation History tab. Options include:
Active Inactive Test

Project. Allows you to deﬁne speciﬁc projects to display in the Activation History tab.
E Click Find to locate questionnaire projects on the Interviewer Server. E Use the Add>> and and Manage Project Files

Or press Alt+T, F.

Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011

351

352 Chapter 14 Figure 14-1 Manage Project Files dialog

Menu options
Menu File Submenu Check Out Check In Undo Check Out New Folder Delete Rename Download... Upload... Exit Cut Copy Paste Select All Up One Level Refresh Keyboard Shortcut Alt+F, C Alt+F, I Alt+F, U Alt+F, N Delete F2 Alt+F, D Alt+F, U Alt+F, X Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V Ctrl+A Alt+V, U F5

Edit

View

Toolbar options
Button Description Checks out the selected ﬁles or folders.

353 Managing project files

Button

Description Checks in the selected ﬁles or folders. Negates the selected ﬁles’ or folders’ checked out status. These ﬁles are not saved and are returned to their state prior to being checked out. Creates a new folder inside of the selected folder. Deletes the selected ﬁles or folders. Uploads a ﬁle into the selected folder. Downloads the selected ﬁle or folder. Cuts the selected ﬁle or folder. Copies the selected ﬁle or folder. Pastes the selected ﬁle or folder. Navigates up one directory level. Refreshes the connection to the server and updates the ﬁle and folder status if any changes were made since you last refreshed.

Customizing IBM SPSS Data Collection Author

15

Chapter

You can customize IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author by setting options to be used throughout the application, using the Options dialog box. You can also change settings for individual questionnaire ﬁles using the File Properties dialog box.

Options dialog box
You can display and edit a number of default settings using the Options dialog box. Changes that you make in this dialog box apply to the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author user interface or to all ﬁles in Author. To open the Options dialog box, choose
Tools > Options

from the menu, or press Alt+T, O.

Options dialog box - General tab
Use the General tab of the Options dialog box to set defaults for options that control the way that questionnaires are displayed in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author.
Fields on the General tab Remember login details for activation. By default, Author prompts you to log into IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration the ﬁrst time you activate a project, but the next time you activate a project in the same session of Author, it logs in automatically using the same details. Deselect this box if you want to prompt for the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server server login details every time you activate. For example, if you are activating projects to more than one Interviewer Server Administration server or URL, deselect this option so that you can enter the correct details each time you activate. For more information, see the topic Activating questionnaires in Chapter 11 on p. 258.

Note: This option is hidden when the questionnaire ﬁle is loaded from an Interviewer Server (activation uses the authentication information you enter when logging into the Interviewer Server).
Set Response Required to true for new questions. Select this option if you usually want to prevent respondents from skipping questions, or deselect it if you usually want respondents to be able to skip questions. Whenever you create a new question, it will automatically have the default set here (you can change this for individual questions after you create them).
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 354

355 Customizing IBM SPSS Data Collection Author

Language dictionary location. Displays the current language dictionary location. Click Browse to

select a different location. Note: For IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition, this option is read-only and the language dictionaries are loaded from the Interviewer Server.
Custom dictionary location. Displays the current custom language dictionary location. Click
Browse to select a different location.

Associate Languages. Click this button to associate language dictionaries with MDM languages. Check spelling as you type Select this option if you want to check spelling of words as you type

text in Author. This option is enabled by default. To check the spelling if the entire questionnaire at once, go to:
Tools > Spelling

or press F7, or click the Spelling icon on the toolbar. Note: Additional dictionaries could be purchased from the Keyoti website (http://keyoti.com/products/rapidspell/dotNet/dictionaries.html). You can drop additional dictionaries into the [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\\Author\6.0.1\SpellChecking\Dictionaries folder and Author will automatically recognize the languages.
Reset Dialogs. Click to restore all dialogs that are hidden as a result of the Do not show this dialog in the future option.

Allow docking and undocking of window panes. Select this option if you want the panes in the

Author window, for example, the Routings pane or the Shared Lists pane, to be unlocked so that they can be moved around the window. Deselect the option once you have arranged the panes to your satisfaction, to prevent accidental changes. For more information, see the topic Changing the layout of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window in Chapter 4 on p. 50.
Automatically fill keycodes. Select this option to automatically assign keycodes to responses. For more information, see the topic Keycodes on p. 359.

Associate languages
Use the Associate Languages dialog box to associate language dictionaries with MDM languages.
Choose a dictionary. The drop-down ﬁeld lists all available language dictionaries. Select an

appropriate dictionary.
Define languages to be used with this dictionary. Allows you to select which MDM languages are

associated with the selected language dictionary.
E Select the appropriate MDM languages from the Available list and click Add->. The selected languages now display in the Selected list.

356 Chapter 15 E To remove languages from the Selected list, select the appropriate languages in the Selected list and click Properties

from the menu, or press Alt+F, I.

359 Customizing IBM SPSS Data Collection Author

File Properties dialog box - Settings tab
Use the Settings Tab of the File Properties dialog box to display and edit information about the languages and contexts in the ﬁle.
Fields on the Settings tab Default language. This is the language in which question and response text will be displayed when

you preview the interview, or when you open the interview in other applications, for example, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server or IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper. When you use IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility, this is the base language. The drop-down list shows all of the languages that are available in the current questionnaire ﬁle. To add new languages to the list, use the Manage Languages and Contexts button. For more information, see the topic Adding and Removing Languages in Chapter 8 on p. 205.
Default question context. This is the context in which question and response text will be displayed

when you preview the interview, or when you open the interview in other applications, for example, Interviewer Server or Paper. The drop-down list shows all of the contexts that are available in the current questionnaire ﬁle. To add new contexts to the list, use the Add/Remove button. For more information, see the topic Adding and Removing Contexts in Chapter 8 on p. 207.
Default routing context. If you have more than one routing context, for example, Web and CATI (Telephone interviewing), this is the context that will be used by default when you open the interview in other applications. Manage Languages and Contexts. Displays the Manage Languages and Contexts Dialog Box,

where you can edit languages and contexts or add new ones.

File Properties dialog box - Versions tab
Use the Versions Tab of the File Properties dialog box to display version information for the ﬁle.
Fields on the Versions tab Versions. This ﬁeld displays information on all versions that have been saved for the ﬁle. The

number of versions is incremented each time you upload the ﬁle to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server by activating it. All changes that you make to a ﬁle once it has been activated are saved as a new version of the ﬁle. If a ﬁle has not been activated, no version information exists.

Keycodes
IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author allows you to deﬁne custom keycodes for question responses. You can manually assign custom keycodes, or allow Author to auto-ﬁll response keycodes.

360 Chapter 15

Manually assigning keycodes
E Select a question from the Routings pane. E Enter keycodes for the question responses in the Design pane’s Keycode ﬁeld. If the Keycode ﬁeld is not displayed, click the Field Chooser icon and select Keycode from the dialog. E Repeat the previous steps for all applicable questions.

Note: Avoid using keycodes that start with the same characters. You should not deﬁne ambiguous keycodes, especially when one keycode is a part of another keycode. For example:
Q1 "What activities do you like?" {Basketball keycode(1), Football keycode(11)};

For this question, the interviewer’s intention cannot be determined when the 1 key is pressed. Changing the keycodes to the following would result in better results:
Q1 "What activities do you like?" {Basketball keycode(01), Football keycode(11)};

For this question, the interviewer’s intention can be determined because although both keycodes contain 1, the interviewer must press a unique ﬁrst character.
Auto-filling keycodes
E Navigate to the General tab in the Options dialog: Tools > Options > General E Select the Automatically ﬁll keycodes checkbox.

Refer to Keycodes – Auto-Fill for information on deﬁning auto-ﬁll settings.

Keycodes – Auto-Fill
The Auto-Fill dialog provides options for deﬁning how IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author assigns keycodes to responses.
Begin keycodes at. Deﬁnes where the auto-ﬁll keycodes begin. For example, if you specify 5, the

auto-ﬁll keycodes will begin at 5.
Increment. Indicates the increment size between auto-ﬁll keycode numbers. For example, if you

specify an increment value of 3, and the Begin keycodes at ﬁeld is set at 1, the auto-ﬁll keycodes numbers will be generated as follows: 1, 4, 7, 10, and so on.
Automatically prefix single-digit items with 0(s). When selected, auto-ﬁll single-digit keycodes are

preﬁxed with a zero.
Override existing keycodes. When selected, auto-ﬁll keycodes override any existing keycodes.

361 Customizing IBM SPSS Data Collection Author

Notes

You must enter a category name and conﬁrm, by moving to the next category line using Enter, the down arrow, or tabbing through the remainder of the category grid, in order for the system to add/display a keycode. To enable the Auto-ﬁll option in the context menu for a category, you must ﬁrst highlight the appropriate category rows: – For an individual row, this is done by ﬁrst left-clicking the row button at the far-left of the grid to highlight the entire row, then right-clicking anywhere in the highlighted row – For multiple rows, this is done by clicking the top row, holding down the shift key, and clicking to the end row of the desired set. You can also click the top row and drag the mouse downward until the last row of the desired set is highlighted, or click on a row, hold down the Ctrl key, and select additional rows to include in the set. Auto-ﬁll conﬁgurations are only applied to the rows that you select; selection must be made for the entire grid row for the applicable category or categories. If you conﬁgure auto-ﬁll for a category set, there must be 10 or more selected categories in order for the system to enforce a leading zero to single-digit keycodes (when the option is selected). Leading zeros are not automatically added to multiple-digit codes using auto-ﬁll. If you have applied auto-ﬁll conﬁgurations for a set of category keycodes, and then later add more categories, the system will: – Add keycodes that do not duplicate existing keycodes within the question. For example if you have a category set with keycodes {1-5}, the next category keycode will be numbered as 6. – Fill gaps in existing keycodes. For example if you have a category set with keycodes {2-5, 7}, subsequent categories will have default keycodes of 1, 6, 8, 9, and so on. – Not automatically add leading zeroes. For example if you have a category set conﬁgured with keycodes of {05-10}, and the conﬁgured starting value for the existing set is 5, subsequent categories will have default keycodes of 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, and so on. – Not automatically increment. For example if you have a category set conﬁgured with keycodes of {1-28} (10 categories, start value = 1, increment = 3), subsequent categories will have default keycodes of 2, 3, 5, 6, 11, 12…29, 30, 31, and so on.

IBM SPSS Data Collection Publish Assets Utility
The IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Publish Assets Utility and the command-line Publish Assets Utility allows you to manage your customized ﬁles for web-deployed IBM® SPSS® Data Collection products (for example, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author Server Edition, IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Reporter Server Edition.
Running the IBM SPSS Data Collection Publish Assets Utility
E Backup the appropriate web-deployed applications that are installed on your workstation

(for example, if you have installed Author Server Edition, backup the directory C:\InetPub\wwwroot\SPSSMR\Author).

362 Chapter 15 E Prepare your custom ﬁles in the web-deployed application’s sub-directory

Custom Files (for example, for Author Server Edition, the sub-directory is C:\InetPub\wwwroot\SPSSMR\Author\Custom Files).
E Run the Publish Assets Utility (PublishAssetsUI.exe). The utility is installed with Author Server

Edition at: C:\InetPub\wwwroot\SPSSMR\Author.
Figure 15-1 Publish Assets Utility

E Click Browse... next to the Application Name ﬁeld and select the appropriate *.application ﬁle

(for example, Author.application for Author Server Edition or Reporter.application for Survey Reporter Server Edition).
E If necessary, increase the Revision number (the number automatically increments by one). E Click Browse... next to the Path ﬁeld and select your Personal Information Exchange (.pfx) ﬁle.

The ﬁle is used to sign the manifest.
E If necessary, enter an appropriate password in the Password ﬁeld. E Click Browse... next to the Custom Files Path ﬁeld and select the Custom Files directory for the

appropriate web-deployed application. The directory contains the custom ﬁles that you want to deploy.

363 Customizing IBM SPSS Data Collection Author E Click Save to deploy your custom ﬁles.

The command-line IBM SPSS Data Collection Publish Assets Utility

The command-line Publish Assets Utility (PublishAssets.exe) provides command-line options that serve the same function as the Publish Assets Utility.
Table 15-1 Switched and arguments

Parameter -AppManifest -appm -CustomFolder -CertFile -Password -pwd -RevVersion -Help -? -h

Description Optional. The application’s manifest ﬁle. By default, the ﬁrst *.application ﬁle in current directory is searched. Optional. The custom ﬁles folder. The default location is the Custom Files folder in the current directory. Required. A Personal Information Exchange (.pfx) ﬁle contains a public key and a private key. The ﬁle is used to sign the manifest ﬁle. Optional. The password for the .pfx ﬁle (if required). Optional. The revision version to publish for the application. By default, the value is incremented by one. Help for the utility.

Running the Publish Assets Utility for Author Server Edition
E The Publish Assets Utility executable ﬁle PublishAssets.exe is located in the directory where

Author Server Edition is installed (the default directory is C:\InetPub\wwwroot\SPSSMR\Author).
Table 15-2 Supported custom files

File\Directory Name Author.exe.conﬁg CATIPlayer.css CATIPlayer.js StandardTexts.mdd SpellChecking\Dictionaries

Description The application’s conﬁgurations ﬁle. Style sheet ﬁle for the CATI Player. Java scripts ﬁle for the CATI Player. Contains the standard texts used for reporting errors in questionnaire scripts. Directory that contains spell-check dictionaries.

Obtaining a Personal Information Exchange (.pfx) file

You must provide a Personal Information Exchange (.pfx) ﬁle in the Publish Assets Utility in order to protect your deployed ﬁles. The following ﬁles are required to generate a .pfx ﬁle: A public key (.cer) ﬁle A private key (.pvk) ﬁle If you do not have these ﬁles, you can use the Microsoft Certiﬁcate Creation Tool makecert.exe (available in the Microsoft Windows SDK). The tool is intended for testing purposes. For example: makecert.exe -sv MyKey.pvk -n "CN=MyCompanyName" MyKey.cer

364 Chapter 15

You will be prompted to provide a password for the private key. When you have your public key (.cer) and private key (.pvk) ﬁles, you can then generate a Personal Information Exchange (.pfx) ﬁle by using the Microsoft PVK/SPC to PFX ﬁle converter pvk2pfx.exe. For example: pvk2pfx.exe -pvk MyKey.pvk -spc MyKey.cer -pfx MyPFX.pfx -po MyPassword

Note: You can obtain the makecert.exe and pvk2pfx.exe utilities from the Microsoft Windows SDK or Microsoft Windows Drive Kit.

Transferring Files Between IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and Other Applications

16

Chapter

You can transfer questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁles between IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author and other IBM® SPSS® Data Collection applications. In some cases, features that are supported in Author are not supported in other applications, and vice versa. This section provides information on how to transfer ﬁles between applications, and on differences between the supported features.

Opening Files from Other Products in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author
You can open questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁles created using these IBM® SPSS® Data Collection applications in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author: IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional The Build activity in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server IBM® SPSS® Data Collection WordCapture (included as an accessory with the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Data Model) You can also open save ﬁles (.sav) created using the IBM® SPSS® Statistics application in Author. Note: When you open a ﬁle (created in another application) in Author that includes script that the application is unable to parse, a new script routing item is created that includes a sampling of the unsupported script. You can provide this new routing item a name and, if necessary, rewrite the script in the Design pane’s Script tab.
IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional

You can open (.mdd) ﬁles created in Base Professional in Author. The following restrictions apply: The templates and script ﬁles supplied with the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Developer Library for use with Base Professional and Interviewer Server are not compatible with Author. Instead, use the ﬁles supplied in the library ﬁle location in Author. For further information, see Options dialog box - Library tab. In Author, loops that use a numeric question as the loop driver require that you specify an upper limit to the number of loop iterations, by adding a maximum value to the numeric question. In Base Professional, however, it is possible to create loops that use a numeric question as the loop driver without attaching a maximum to the numeric question, resulting in loops that use the default maximum size of 100000 iterations. This can slow the questionnaire down considerably. It is recommended that you attach a maximum value to numeric questions in ﬁles created using Base Professional, if they are used as loop drivers.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 365

366 Chapter 16

Build

You can open a ﬁle created using the Build activity in Interviewer Server in Author by downloading the ﬁle to your desktop. See the topic “Downloading Files onto your Computer” in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User’s Guide for further information. If you are transferring ﬁles between Build and Author, be aware that any changes that you make to a ﬁle in Build after activation result in a new version of the ﬁle being created, whereas changes to the ﬁle in Author are saved in the same version of the ﬁle.
IBM SPSS Data Collection WordCapture

You can use WordCapture to create questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁles using the text in a Microsoft Word document. You can then open the questionnaire ﬁle in Author to edit, format, test, and activate it. This method is useful if you usually design your questionnaires using Microsoft Word and have large numbers of questions saved in Word documents. Note: Another method of creating questionnaire ﬁles from Word documents is by creating questions in Author and then copying and pasting the question and response text from the Word document. For more information, see the topic Copying question and response text from other applications in Chapter 6 on p. 143. You can open WordCapture from the Windows Start menu:
Programs > IBM Corp. > IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 > Accessories > WordCapture

For further information, see the How to Use WordCapture document (WordCapture.doc) that is displayed when you open WordCapture. Note: In release 4.5, notes that you attach to questions in WordCapture are not displayed in Author.
IBM SPSS Statistics

You can open and import the data contained within SPSS Statistics ﬁles. SPSS Statistics ﬁles are imported into new, untitled .mdd documents with a .sav routing. The routing is populated with all of the question metadata, in the order that the questions appear in the .sav ﬁle metadata.

Opening IBM SPSS Data Collection Author Files in Other Products
You can open questionnaire (.mdd) ﬁles that you create in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author with the following IBM® SPSS® Data Collection applications: IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server IBM® SPSS® Translation Utility IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper

367 Transferring Files Between IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and Other Applications

IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional

You can open (.mdd) ﬁles created using Author in Base Professional.
IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer

You can open (.mdd) ﬁles created using Author in Interviewer.
IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server

You can open ﬁles created in Author using Interviewer Server activities including Build, View Survey Link, and Launch. For information on how to upload ﬁles to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration and activate them, see Activating questionnaires. Note: Although you can create ﬁle names containing spaces when you create .mdd ﬁles using Author, Interviewer Server does not support ﬁle names containing spaces. Therefore, when saving ﬁles that you create in Author for use in Interviewer Server, use the underscore character instead of spaces. If you are transferring ﬁles between Build and Author, be aware that any changes that you make to a ﬁle in Build after activation result in a new version of the ﬁle being created, whereas changes to the ﬁle in Author are saved in the same version of the ﬁle.
Unsupported Question Types in Build

Build does not support the following question types and routing items: Yes/No (boolean) questions Date/Time questions Blocks Loops Sections Compounds If you open a questionnaire ﬁle from Author that contains any of these items in Build, the unsupported items are ﬂagged with a “no entry” sign and you cannot edit them.
IBM SPSS Translation Utility

You can open questionnaires ﬁle from Author in SPSS Translation Utility to add translations of the question and response text, and to add text for additional contexts. You can set up the new languages or contexts from within Author by using the Manage Languages and Contexts Dialog Box, or you can use the MDM Label Manager tool available with SPSS Translation Utility.
IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper

You can open ﬁles created using Author in Paper. For more information, see the topic Opening Questionnaires in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper on p. 368.

368 Chapter 16

When you create ﬁles in Author for use in Paper, questions of different types are displayed with the appropriate instruction text in Paper. In addition, the limits that you set are displayed as interviewer instructions. For example, if you set a range for a numeric question of 0-99 in Author, the question appears with the instruction text “WRITE IN ANSWER WITHIN THE RANGE 0-99” in Paper: Single response questions display the instruction SELECT ONE ANSWER ONLY. Multiple response questions display the instruction SELECT ALL ANSWERS THAT APPLY. Single response grids display the instruction SELECT ONE ANSWER ON EACH LINE ACROSS. Multiple response grids display the instruction SELECT ONE ANSWER ON EACH LINE ACROSS. Numeric grids display the instruction WRITE IN ANSWER [WITHIN THE RANGE n-n]. Numeric questions display the instruction WRITE IN ANSWER. [WITHIN THE RANGE n-n]. Text questions display the instruction WRITE IN ANSWER. [MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CHARACTERS: n]. Yes/No (boolean) questions display the instruction TICK IF YES/TRUE. Pages display the instruction QUESTIONS GROUPED IN A PAGE. Blocks display the instruction QUESTIONS GROUPED IN A BLOCK. Loops display an instruction indicating the variable that the loop is based on.

Opening Questionnaires in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper
If you have IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper installed, you can open your questionnaire ﬁle using Paper and add page breaks, apply Paper Looks or Microsoft Word templates, and, if you have IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Paper - Scan Add-on, deﬁne the questionnaire as a scanning project. For further information, see the Paper User’s Guide and the Paper - Scan Add-on User’s Guide. If you have the ﬁle open in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author, you cannot edit it in Paper, but you can display the contents.
To open a questionnaire in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper
E Save your questionnaire ﬁle in Author. E If you want to edit the ﬁle in Paper, either close Author, open another ﬁle, or choose Ctrl+N to

close the ﬁle by opening a new blank ﬁle. If you only want to preview the content of the ﬁle in Paper, you do not need to close it in Author.
E Open Paper from the Windows Start menu: Programs > IBM Corp. > IBM® SPSS® Data Collection 6.0.1 > Paper > Paper E From the Paper menu, choose Load Questionnaire. E In the Load dialog box, use the Look in: ﬁeld to browse to the location where you saved the

questionnaire ﬁle, and select the ﬁle.

369 Transferring Files Between IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and Other Applications E In the Look Group ﬁeld, select the Look Group that you want to use with the ﬁle. E In the Routings ﬁeld, select the name of the routing that you created for use with Paper. E Change any other options as required, and choose the Open button.

Paper loads the questionnaire ﬁle and displays it using the formatting in the selected Look Group. You can then use the features of Paper to apply Looks, set page breaks, and add any other formatting you require, before printing the questionnaire. For further information, see the Paper User’s Guide.

Troubleshooting, tips and hints

17

Chapter

This section contains answers to frequently asked questions and information that may help you resolve problems that you come across when using IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author.

Frequently asked questions
This topic provides answers to some frequently asked questions about working with IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author.
Q. Is there a limit to how long a question name can be? A. Question names in Author must be unique, cannot contain more than 80 characters, cannot be

empty, and can contain only letters, numbers, and the characters _ @ $ # . The ﬁrst character must be a letter or _.
Q. How can I tell which question type I should use? A. See Question type overview for a list of the available question types and links to further information. Q. Can I change a question’s type after I create it? A. The only question types that you can change are single and multiple response questions. Choose the Type option in the Properties tab and select One Choice only or Multiple Choice to change a multiple response question to a single response question or vice versa. For other question types, you need to delete the question and add it again using the correct question type. Q. Can I use the same responses in more than one question? A. Yes. One way to do this is to create a shared list of responses and attach the list to all the relevant questions. For more information, see the topic Creating shared lists of responses in Chapter 6 on p. 151. Another method is to use the responses given by a respondent to one question as the response list for another question, using the Display option in the Properties tab. Q. How can I check that a question will work as I intend it to, without activating the interview? A. You can choose one of the preview options to see how a selected question or the entire questionnaire will appear. For more information, see the topic Previewing questions in Chapter 10 on p. 234. Q. Why is there a folder called MyQuestionnaireFile_files in the folder where I saved my questionnaire file?
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 370

371 Troubleshooting, tips and hints

A. When you save a questionnaire ﬁle, Author adds this folder to store template ﬁles and image

ﬁles that you attach to the questionnaire. A copy of your .mdd ﬁle is also saved to this folder when you activate the ﬁle, so that the activation process can upload all the required ﬁles to IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration. For more information, see the topic Creating and saving questionnaire ﬁles in Chapter 4 on p. 30.
Q. When installed on Windows Vista or 7, the Author layout files and IOM logs are not located in the C:\Users\\AppData\Local directory. Why is this? A. When Author is installed in a Windows Vista or 7 environment, the associated layout ﬁles and

IOM logs are stored in the C:\Users\\AppData\Roaming directory.

IBM SPSS Data Collection Author in other languages
You can display the application in a language other than English. You can change the language at any time by following the appropriate instructions below for your computer’s operating system. Close the application before making these changes. You can change the language back to English at any time or even switch back and forward between various languages.
To Display the application in a Different Language On a Windows XP Professional or Windows Server computer:

1. Refer to the Microsoft article Set up Windows XP for multiple languages (http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/setup/winxp/yourlanguage.mspx). 2. Delete all ﬁles (for example, Default_DockingLayout.xml and Options.xml) from the following folders: For IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author: C:\Documents and Settings\\Application Data\SPSSInc\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Author\ For IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Survey Reporter: C:\Documents and Settings\\Application DataSPSSInc\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Survey Reporter\ 3. Modify the appropriate application conﬁguration ﬁle to include the desired culture value. For example, add the following to change the language to French:

Language Chinese English French German Italian Japanese Spanish

Culture Value ZH-cn en-US, or blank fr-FR de-DE it-IT ja-JP es-ES

372 Chapter 17

For Author: [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\\Author\Author.exe.conﬁg For Survey Reporter: [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\\Survey Reporter\Reporter.exe.conﬁg For IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Base Professional: [INSTALL_FOLDER]\IBM\SPSS\DataCollection\6\Base Professional\mrstudio.exe.conﬁg
On a Windows Vista Ultimate Edition computer:

1. In the Windows Control Panel, open Regional and Language Options. 2. Click the Keyboard and Languages tab. In Display languages, click Install/uninstall languages… 3. Click How can I install additional languages? for information on installing additional languages (for example Japanese or Simpliﬁed Chinese) in Windows Vista. 4. Follow the instructions for installing other display languages. 5. Follow the above steps 2 and 3 in On a Windows XP Professional or Windows Server computer.

Troubleshooting
Q. A security alert, stating that a firewall has blocked some features of the program, is displayed when I try to preview or print a question or interview. What should I do? A. This message occurs because IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author creates a web site on your

machine to display the preview, and your ﬁrewall has blocked the attempt to access this web site. Choose the Unblock option to allow access and display the preview. If you are in doubt about whether changing security settings is permitted by your organization, please contact your system administrator.
Q. I have made a change to a style template, but the change is not showing up in my questionnaire file. Why is this? A. When you attach a style template or an image ﬁle to a questionnaire ﬁle, Author automatically

saves a copy of the template ﬁle and any subsidiary ﬁles or folders that it uses to a subfolder beneath the one where you saved the questionnaire ﬁle. The questionnaire uses the ﬁles in this subfolder, and not the original ﬁles. Therefore, if you update a template ﬁle after attaching it to a questionnaire ﬁle, you need to copy the update into the subfolder. For more information, see the topic Using style templates in Chapter 9 on p. 229.
Q. Why do I receive a message that says required variables are missing and reactivation is required when I attempt to open an MDD in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer 6.0.1? A. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer supports new system variables in the 6.0.1 release.

If an MDD ﬁle does not include these system variables, reactivation to Interviewer 6.0.1 is required. For more information, see the topic Activating questionnaires in Chapter 11 on p. 258.
Q. Why do I receive an error message when previewing an interview in Data Entry mode?

373 Troubleshooting, tips and hints

A. The Data Entry mode only supports surveys where the questions are all contained within the

survey routing. In cases where scripts contain questions that are not found in the routing, an error is presented and the interview preview ends.
Q. Why are question names in an MDD file, created with the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Interviewer Server Build activity, not the same between the Routings pane and the Questions pane? A. The Interviewer Server Build activity does not synchronize the metadata information with the

routing item information when creating MDD ﬁles. When MDD ﬁles created with the Build activity are opened in Author, the Questions pane displays the questions names as they were deﬁned in the Build activity and the Routings pane displays the routing item names for each question (instead of the question names). In order to make the question names identical between the Routings and Questions panes you must manually change the question names on the Routing pane to match the question names on the Questions pane.
Q. Why is HTML code automatically stripped on response texts within the Advanced Text Editor? A. This is the result of a limitation in the internal 3rd party text editor. The text editor supports a

limited subset of HTML editing functions and does not retain any attributes that it does not support.
Q. Why are the keyboard shortcuts not working in when the application is run in a Citrix environment? A. When running the application in a Citrix environment, the keyboard shortcuts/hot keys that are

deﬁned for the application may conﬂict with the default Citrix keyboard shortcuts. You can resolve the conﬂict by changing the conﬂicting Citrix keyboard shortcuts/hot keys. Refer to the following Citrix Knowledge Center article for more information: How to Enable or Disable Hotkeys within an ICA ﬁle (including Template.ica) (http://support.citrix.com/article/CTX140219).

Accessibility Guide
Keyboard navigation of the software Special issues for visually impaired users Special issues for blind users Special considerations

18

Chapter

This section provides an overview of alternative methods for accessing the functionality of the product. More speciﬁcally, the following topics are covered:

Important: If using a screen reader, use the F6 key to switch between this help system’s Navigation pane and Contents pane.

Keyboard Navigation
Much of the product’s functionality is accessible via the keyboard. At its most basic level, you can press the Alt key to activate window menus or press the Tab key to scroll through dialog box controls. For complete details about keyboard shortcuts in the IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author user interface, see the following topics: The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author menu The IBM SPSS Data Collection Author toolbar buttons

Accessibility for the Visually Impaired
You can specify a number of options to enhance your ability to use the software: Use the General tab of the Options dialog box to enable the ability to reposition and resize various window panes. For more information, see the topic Changing the layout of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window in Chapter 4 on p. 50. Use the View tab of the Options dialog box to set defaults for options that control the way questionnaires are displayed in IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author. For more information, see the topic Options dialog box - View tab in Chapter 15 on p. 356. For more information, see the topic Special Considerations on p. 375.

Accessibility for Blind Users
Support for blind users is predominately dependent on the use of a screen reader. IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author has been tested with JAWS® for Windows® (copyright Freedom Scientiﬁc™, http://www.freedomscientiﬁc.com)
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 374

375 Accessibility Guide

For more information, see the topic Special Considerations: Interference with Other Software on p. 375. During testing with JAWS, it was found that listening to the table results is easier while in full screen view. To enter full screen view, press the F11 key. To exit full screen view, press the Esc key. Important: If using a screen reader, use the F6 key to switch between this help system’s Navigation pane and Contents pane.

Special Considerations
There are issues that deserve special attention, as outlined in the following topics. Note: Although we are working to make IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author accessible to all assistive technologies, Author has been tested only with the JAWS for Windows screen reader software version 8.0.

Special Considerations: Dialog Boxes
The initial focus in a dialog box is generally placed on the control in the upper left area. From there, you can access other controls in the dialog box by pressing the Tab key. Alternatively, you can use the dialog box keyboard shortcuts listed below. The placement of a control in the tabbing order is determined by the section it belongs to, the type of control it is, and its placement in the dialog box. Note that some dialog boxes may not have all types of controls or the same number of controls. For dialog boxes containing more than one user interface tab (the Options dialog box, for example), the initial focus is generally placed on the ﬁrst tab itself. Use the key combination Ctrl+Tab to navigate to other tabs. Press the Tab key to navigate through the controls on each tab.

Special Considerations: Interference with Other Software
When testing IBM® SPSS® Data Collection Author with screen readers such as JAWS, other software may interfere. For example, our development team discovered that the use of a Systems Management Server (SMS) within your organization may interfere with JAWS’ ability to read some products. Disabling SMS will rectify this situation. Visit the Microsoft web site for more information about SMS.

Appendix

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered worldwide.

A

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY 10504-1785, U.S.A. For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to: Intellectual Property Licensing, Legal and Intellectual Property Law, IBM Japan Ltd., 1623-14, Shimotsuruma, Yamato-shi, Kanagawa 242-8502 Japan.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES

PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact: IBM Software Group, Attention: Licensing, 233 S. Wacker Dr., Chicago, IL 60606, USA.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 376

377 Notices

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee. The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may vary signiﬁcantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their speciﬁc environment. Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot conﬁrm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. All statements regarding IBM’s future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only. This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are ﬁctitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

Trademarks

IBM, the IBM logo, ibm.com, and SPSS are trademarks of IBM Corporation, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml. Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries. Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino logo, Celeron, Intel Xeon, Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both.

378 Appendix A

Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

Glossary
Boolean variable. A special type of integer variable that can contain values of True or False. Also called a Yes/No variable. Context. Deﬁnes the environment in which a text is to be used. You can keep several variations

of each text in the metadata for use in different circumstances, as deﬁned by the context–for example, analysis, interviewing, and publishing.

Data Collection Developer Library (DDL). A free, downloadable resource that provides information

for scriptwriters developing automated survey and market research processes, software developers wanting to leverage products and technology, and those who simply want to understand more about the technology. The can also be installed from every product installation CD.

Date variable. A variable that stores date and time information. Factor. A constant numerical value that can be assigned to an element for use in statistical calculations. Grid. A special type of loop in which all of the iterations are presented simultaneously to the respondent in a grid format. Grid questions often ask respondents to choose a rating on a predeﬁned scale for a number of products in a list. Label type. Enable different types of labels to be created for different types of information. For example, the default label type of Label is used for question and category texts and variable descriptions, and the Instruction label type is used for interviewer instructions. Loop. A loop deﬁnes a set of questions that are to be asked more than once. In a categorical

loop, the number of times the loop is to be iterated (and therefore the number of times that the set of questions in the loop are to be asked) is controlled by the categories in a category list. For example, the set of questions can be asked for each product in a product list. In a numeric loop, the number of times the loop is to be iterated is controlled by a numeric expression.

Metadata. Describes case data and typically includes such things as question texts, category names, translations, versions, and contexts. In the end-user documentation, the metadata is sometimes referred to as the questionnaire deﬁnition. Multiple response variable. A categorical variable that can have more than one value for each case—for example, a variable based on a question to which the respondent can choose several answers from a predeﬁned set of answers. A typical example is the question "What do you remember seeing in the museum today?" in response to which the respondent can select any number of items in a list. Also known as multiple categorical. Numeric variable. A variable that stores a numeric value for each case. A numeric variable can

store an integer or a real value.

Open-ended question. A question that asks a respondent to reply in their own words. For example,

questions that ask a respondent to enter his or her name, address, or opinion.

Other Specify category. A category that allows the respondent to enter an answer that is not on the category list. For example, in a question that asks which other museums the respondent has visited, there are categories specifying six major museums, and one category with the text "Other". When respondents select this category, they are asked to specify the name of another museum they have visited. Single response variable. A categorical variable that can have only one value for each case, such as a variable based on a question that requires the respondent to choose one answer from a predeﬁned set of answers. An example is the question "Have you visited this museum before?" to which the respondent must answer "Yes" or "No". Also known as single categorical.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corporation 2000, 2011 379

380 Glossary

Text variable. A variable that contains data that is text, such as names and addresses or responses to open-ended questions. Well-formed HTML. Well-formed HTML (sometimes called XHTML) is HTML that conforms to the rules of XML. The same HTML tags are available, but stricter rules apply–most notably, all tags must be closed and the same case must be used for opening and closing tags.

Index
Accessibility, 374 blind users, 374 JAWS, 375 keyboard navigation, 374 screen reader, 375 special considerations, 375 visually impaired users, 374 Activate live questionnaire, 258 questionnaire, 26, 258 test questionnaire, 258 activation templates, 261 Activation advanced settings, 332 answering machine detection settings, 326 appointments settings, 317 autodialer settings, 322 call outcome settings, 301 call times settings, 315 calling rules settings, 308 changing just the project’s status, 339 Data Entry settings, 274 database settings, 278 deployment settings, 274 dialing settings, 322 disconnected settings, 271 display ﬁelds settings, 273, 299 e-mail settings, 282 ﬁelds settings, 279 ﬁles settings, 336 interviewer settings, 304 interviewing settings, 298 introduction settings, 303 no network access to FMRoot, 348 ordering settings, 313 others settings, 339 overrides settings, 320 page template settings, 333 parameters settings, 308 participants settings, 276 predictive settings, 324 Project Interview settings, 269 project roles settings, 270 Project settings, 266 Quota settings, 331 registry settings, 348 review settings, 307 routing settings, 272 script settings, 281 tasks settings, 338 telephone settings, 297 upload settings, 276 using .sam scripts for IBM SPSS Data Collection projects, 348 using File Management component, 348 Activation History tab, 341 activity feature migration, 38 Add alternative text for languages and contexts, 210 analysis value, 164 block, 120 bookmark, 199 compound, 111 condition block, 188 conditional jump to another question, 184, 191 context, 207 database question loops, 140 Else item, 191 ElseIf item, 190 exit instruction, 198 factor, 163 If item, 189 jump to another question, 183 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205, 214 loop, 113 missing value, 164 multiple response database questions, 134 note, 159 page, 20, 181 question, 10, 16, 83–84, 87, 90, 92, 102–103, 105, 107, 109 question template, 168 questions from library, 165, 167 questions to library, 167 response, 14, 143 routing, 18, 171, 173 script, 200 script from library, 201 section, 180 set response, 202 shared list, 151–153, 157 single response database questions, 128 text for languages and contexts, 209 total awareness question, 159 adding script ﬁlters, 196 Advanced category editor, 226 Advanced Properties pane, 43 Advanced response editor, 227 Advanced settings, 332 Advanced text editor, 226 Alphabetic order placing responses in, 87, 90 placing subjects in, 92 Alternative text adding, 210 Analysis column, 149 Analysis Value, 151 Analysis values, 164

381

382 Index

answering machine detection settings, 326 Apply analysis value, 164 custom template, 232 factor, 163 missing value, 164 shared list, 152 template, 229–232 appointments settings, 317 Ascending order placing responses in, 87, 90 placing subjects in, 92 Assets Publish utility, 364 associate languages, 355 Attach analysis value, 164 custom template, 232 factor, 163 missing value, 164 shared list, 152–153 template, 229–232 Auto Answer, 243–246 Auto Answer dialog box, 245–246 auto-ﬁll keycodes, 360 AutoAnswer, 243–246 autodialer settings, 322 Base language, 212 Blocks creating, 120, 177 removing, 182 Bold, 223 Bookmarks adding and deleting, 199 Boolean questions, 84, 102 Build, 365–366 Buttons adding to interviews using script, 201 in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window, 48 call outcome settings, 301 call times settings, 315 calling rules settings, 308 Cancel, 54 Categorical questions, 84, 87, 90, 92 category editor, 226 Category Selection dialog box, 196 CATI interviews previewing, 234–235 CDSCs connecting to, 247–248, 255 Change alternative text for languages and contexts, 210 conditional jump to another question, 184, 191 context, 213 default language or context, 212

jump to another question, 183 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205, 214 question, 22 read/write status for a language, 214 response, 143, 146 shared list, 155 template, 232 text for languages and contexts, 209 Check spelling, 25 Check box, 216 Citrix hot keys, 373 keyboard shortcuts, 373 Clean mode selecting, 255 Close IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 29 code samples, 204 Codes tab, 44 Columns, 216 Compounds, 111 creating, 177 removing, 182 Condition block creating, 188 Else item, 191 ElseIf item, 190 If item, 189 removing, 197 conﬁguration ﬁle attributes, 74 IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository, 72 properties, 73 Connection properties setting in Data Link Properties dialog box, 247 Contexts adding and removing, 205, 207, 214 changing the context, 213 changing the default language, 212 deﬁning alternative texts for, 210 entering text for multiple contexts, 209 selecting, 252 Contexts tab, 214 convert to grid, 101 convert to loop, 120 Copy question, 175 questions from library, 165, 167 response, 143, 146 routing, 171, 173 Create alternative text for languages and contexts, 210 analysis value, 164 block, 120 bookmark, 199

383 Index

compound, 111 condition block, 188 conditional jump to another question, 184, 191 context, 207 database question loops, 140 Else item, 191 ElseIf item, 190 exit instruction, 198 factor, 163 If item, 189 jump to another question, 183 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205, 214 loop, 113 missing value, 164 multiple response database questions, 134 note, 159 page, 20, 181 project template, 40 question, 10, 83–84, 87, 90, 92, 102–103, 105, 107, 109 questionnaire, 6 questionnaire ﬁle, 30 response, 14 routing, 18, 171, 173 script, 200 script from library, 201 section, 180 set response, 202 shared list, 151, 157 single response database questions, 128 text for languages and contexts, 209 total awareness question, 159 Custom Properties, 45 Custom Properties tab, 44, 165 Customize IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 354 Cut response, 146 Data Entry settings, 274 Data link properties Advanced tab, 255 All tab, 256 Connection tab, 247–248 metadata properties, 252 metadata versions, 253 Provider tab, 247 database questions, 123, 128, 134, 140 database question loops creating, 140 database questions creating, 123 creating loops, 140 creating multiple response, 134 creating single response, 123, 128 Excel spreadsheets, 141

ﬁlter dialog, 143 table preview dialog, 142 Database questions, 84 database settings, 278 Date questions, 84, 107 DB Settings tab, 44 default roles, 35 Defaults changing the default language or context, 212 changing the default settings, 354 changing the default template, 232 Delete context, 207 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205 note, 159 question, 176 response, 146, 155 routing, 174 shared list, 158 deployment options, 347 deployment settings, 274 Descending order placing responses in, 87, 90 placing subjects in, 92 Description ﬁeld, 149 Design pane, 42, 45 dialing settings, 322 Dialog boxes, 42, 53, 167, 196, 214, 235, 237–238, 243, 245–246, 354 Dictionary ﬁle, 374 Dirty mode selecting, 255 disconnected settings, 271 Display note, 159 toolbars and panes, 50 display ﬁelds settings, 273, 299 display options, 347 Display text, 84, 109 Document Validation dialog box, 237 Documentation about, 56 Documents creating and saving, 30, 40 opening, 31–32 validating, 237 Dropdown list, 216 Duplicate question, 175 response, 143 e-mail settings, 282 Edit alternative text for languages and contexts, 210 conditional jump to another question, 184, 191 default language or context, 212

384 Index

jump to another question, 183 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205, 214 question, 22 read/write status for a language, 214 response, 143, 146 shared list, 155 text for languages and contexts, 209 Else item, 191 ElseIf item, 190 Excel, 143 Excel spreadsheets database questions, 141 Exclusive, 151 Exclusive column, 149 Exit IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 29 Exit instructions adding and deleting, 198 expiry date and time options, 348 Explorer view, 42 Export values, 164 expression editor, 204 F2, 146, 155, 175 Factor, 151 Factor column, 149 Factors, 163 FAQs, 370 ﬁelds settings, 279 File, 150 File column, 149 File Properties dialog box, 358 Files creating and saving, 30, 40 opening, 31–32 validating, 237 ﬁles settings, 336 ﬁlter dialog, 143 Filters deﬁning conditions, 191–194 Filters tab, 343 Find, 53 Firewall, 372 Fixed, 151 Fixed column, 149 Fonts changing, 223 Format question, 216, 231–232 question and response text, 223 questionnaire, 24, 216, 229–230, 232 response, 228 Formatting toolbar, 223 Frequently asked questions, 370

General tab, 354 associate languages, 355 Getting started, 6 Go to different question, 183 different question based on response, 87, 90, 103, 105, 107, 184 Go To, 150 Go To column, 149 Go To routing item, 183 GoTo different question, 183 different question based on response, 87, 90, 103, 105, 107, 184 Graphics, 228 Grid orientation, 216 Grid questions, 84, 92 Grouping questions, 20, 113, 120, 177, 180–181 routing items, 177, 180 Groups, 111 creating, 113, 120, 177, 180–181 inserting, 20 removing, 182, 197 Height, 216 Hide question, 87, 90, 92, 102–103, 105, 107 toolbars and panes, 50 Highlighting, 223 Hints, 244, 246 hot keys Citrix, 373 HTML formatting for question and response text, 223 HTML tidy, 243 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console Activation History tab, 341 Filters tab, 343 questionnaire, 341 Settings tab, 344 IBM SPSS Data Collection Author displaying a different language, 371 installing, 1 localization, 371 starting and exiting, 29 what’s new, 3 IBM SPSS Data Collection Author roles , 35 IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional, 365–366 IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library, 56 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer, 366 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server, 366 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration activate questionnaire to, 26, 258, 341 download questionnaire ﬁle from, 365

385 Index

open IBM SPSS Data Collection Author ﬁle in, 366 opening ﬁles, 32 IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper, 237 open questionnaire in, 26, 366, 368 IBM SPSS Data Collection Question Repository conﬁguration ﬁle, 72 introduction, 58 IBM SPSS Data Collection WordCapture, 365 IBM SPSS Statistics, 365 IBM SPSS Translation Utility, 366 Icons in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author window, 48 If go to adding and deleting, 183–184 If Go To routing item, 184 If item, 189 Images, 228 InitializeRoleBase.mrs, 38 InitializeRoleBase.xls, 38 Insert alternative text for languages and contexts, 210 analysis value, 164 block, 120 bookmark, 199 compound, 111 condition block, 188 conditional jump to another question, 184, 191 context, 207 database question loops, 140 Else item, 191 ElseIf item, 190 exit instruction, 198 factor, 163 If item, 189 jump to another question, 183 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205, 214 loop, 113 missing value, 164 multiple response database questions, 134 note, 159 page, 20, 181 question, 10, 16, 83–84, 87, 90, 92, 102–103, 105, 107, 109 question template from library, 168 questions from library, 165, 167 questions in library, 167 response, 14, 143 routing, 18, 171, 173 script, 200 script from library, 201 section, 180 set response, 202 shared list, 151–153, 157 single response database questions, 128 text for languages and contexts, 209 total awareness question, 159

Insert Library Item dialog box, 167 Interview mode, 10, 84 Interview Preview dialog box, 235 Interview scripting language, 238 interviewer settings, 304 interviewing modes, 9 interviewing settings, 298 introduction settings, 303 IsProtected, 165 Italic, 223 Iterator tab, 45, 138 IVFilesToBeCopied, 349 JAWS, 374 Jump to another question adding and deleting, 183–184 based on response, 87, 90, 103, 105, 107 key code, 150 Key Code column, 149 Keyboard navigation, 374 keyboard shortcuts Citrix, 373 Keyboard shortcuts, 45 in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 48 keycodes, 359 auto-ﬁll, 360 LabelTypes selecting, 252 language changing, 371 Languages adding and removing, 205, 214 changing the default language, 212 deﬁning alternative texts for, 210 entering text for multiple languages, 209 selecting, 252 setting the read/write status, 214 Languages tab, 214 Layout, 216 changing the window layout, 50 legal notices, 376 Library adding script items from, 201 inserting questions from, 16, 165, 167 saving questions in, 167 Library pane, 42–43 Library tab, 356 Line break, 223 List box, 216 Local, 9 local deployment, 349 Local Deployment Wizard deployment options, 347

386 Index

display options, 347 expiry date and time options, 348 overview, 345 summary options, 348 usage options, 345 validation options, 346 Localization IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 371 Logic tab, 45 loop iterators, 101 Loops creating, 113, 177 removing, 182 Main window, 42 manage project ﬁles, 351 Manage Languages and Contexts dialog box, 214 mdd ﬁles connecting to, 248 creating and saving, 30 opening, 31–32 validating, 237 members, 45 Members tab, 45 Menu options, 45 Menus, 45 Microsoft Excel, 143 Microsoft Word, 143, 365 migration activity features, 38 Missing, 150, 164 Missing column, 149 Move question, 21, 176 response, 146 toolbars and panes, 50 Multiasks, 181 multiple response database questions creating, 134 Multiple response grid questions, 92 Multiple response questions, 84, 90 Name, 149 Name column, 149 New alternative text for languages and contexts, 210 block, 120 bookmark, 199 compound, 111 condition block, 188 conditional jump to another question, 184, 191 context, 207 database question loops, 140 Else item, 191 ElseIf item, 190 exit instruction, 198

If item, 189 jump to another question, 183 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205, 214 loop, 113 multiple response database questions, 134 note, 159 page, 20, 181 project template, 40 question, 10, 83–84, 87, 90, 92, 102–103, 105, 107, 109 questionnaire, 6 questionnaire ﬁle, 30 questions from library, 165, 167 questions from template, 168 response, 14 routing, 18, 171, 173 script, 200 script from library, 201 section, 180 set response, 202 shared list, 151, 157 single response database questions, 128 text for languages and contexts, 209 total awareness question, 159 Notes adding, displaying and deleting, 159 Number of columns, 216 Numeric grid questions, 92 Numeric questions, 84, 103 Online Help about, 56 Open IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 29 questionnaire ﬁle, 31–32 Options dialog box, 354 ordering settings, 313 Orientation, 216 Other column, 149 other specify, 150 others settings, 339 overrides settings, 320 page template settings, 333 Pages creating, 20, 177, 181 removing, 182 Panes moving and resizing, 50 Paper - Manual Entry, 9 Paper - Scanning, 9 Paper - Scanning mode, 10 Paper interview mode, 10 Paper mode, 84 Paper questionnaires, 368 parameters settings, 308 participants settings, 276

387 Index

Paste question, 175 response, 146 Phone, 9 Phone interview mode, 10 Pictures, 228 predictive settings, 324 Presentation, 216 Presets, 261 Preview individual question, 234 questionnaire, 22, 55, 235, 237 questionnaire in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper, 55 Preview tab, 357 Print questionnaire, 55 questionnaire in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper, 55 questionnaire using IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper, 368 project ﬁles manage, 351 Project Interview settings, 269 project roles settings, 270 Project Settings, 266 Project Template tab, 357 project templates, 40 Project templates creating and saving, 40 creating Questionnaire, 6 Project Templates working with unzipped , 41 Prompted awareness questions, 159 Properties, 358 Properties pane, 42 protect question, 165 ptz ﬁles creating and saving, 40 Question Template, 168 Question types, 84 Questionnaire ﬁles creating and saving, 30 opening, 31–32 validating, 237 Questionnaire library adding script items from, 201 inserting questions from, 16, 165, 167 saving questions in, 167 Questionnaire order, 21 Questionnaires activating, 26, 258 Activation History tab, 341 activation templates, 261 adding and removing contexts, 207 adding and removing languages, 205 adding languages and contexts, 205, 214

changing the context, 213 changing the default language or context, 212 check spelling, 25 creating, 6 deﬁning texts for alternative languages and contexts, 210 editing languages and contexts, 209 Filters tab, 343 formatting, 24, 216, 223, 228–230, 232 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console, 341 previewing, 22, 235, 237 printing, 55, 368 printing in IBM SPSS Data Collection Paper, 55 setting the read/write status for a language, 214 Settings tab, 344 testing, 234–235, 237–238, 243–246, 258 text substitution, 219 Questions copying, 143 copying and pasting, 175 creating, 6, 83–84, 87, 90, 92, 102–103, 105, 107, 109 database question loops, 140 deleting, 176 formatting, 231–232 grouping, 20, 111, 113, 120, 177, 180–181 inserting from library, 16 moving, 21, 176 multiple database question loops, 123 multiple response database questions, 123, 134 previewing, 234 protect, 165 single response database questions, 123, 128 testing, 234 ungrouping, 182, 197 Questions pane, 42 adding questions using, 171 Quota control setting up, 331 Quota settings, 331 Random order placing responses in, 87, 90 placing subjects in, 92 Read only question, 102 Redo, 54 Registry settings activation, 348 Remove context, 207 language, 205 languages and contexts, 205 note, 159 question, 176 response, 146 routing, 174 shared list, 158

388 Index

Rename response, 146 responses, 155 routing, 175 Replace, 53 Repository pane, 42–43 repository.dql, 72 Resize toolbars and panes, 50 Respondent Instructions, 45 Respondent Instructions tab, 45 response editor, 227 Response required question, 102 Responses, 45, 150 adding, 14 adding shared lists of, 151–153 copying, 143 deleting, 146, 155 editing, 146 Responses tab, 45 Reverse order placing responses in, 87, 90 placing subjects in, 92 review settings, 307 roles IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 35 Rotated order placing responses in, 87, 90 placing subjects in, 92 routing items, 183–184 Routing items adding, 183–184 adding and deleting, 183, 198–202 grouping, 177, 180 skip and ﬁll, 185 routing options data entry, 346 live interviewing, 346 routing settings, 272 Routings adding, 173 copying, 171, 173 creating, 18, 171 deleting, 174 renaming, 175 Routings pane, 42 adding questions using, 171 Sample management using .sam ﬁles for IBM SPSS Data Collection projects, 348 samples, 204 .sav, 365 Save project template, 40 questionnaire ﬁle, 30

Screen readers, 374 Script, 45 script ﬁlters, 196 script settings, 281 Script tab, 45 Scripts adding and deleting, 200–201 viewing, 238 Search, 53 Sections creating, 177, 180 removing, 182 Security alert, 372 Select Project Template dialog, 358 Set Response adding and deleting, 185, 202 Set tab, 45 Settings tab, 344, 359 Shared lists attaching to a question, 152–153 creating, 151, 157 deleting, 158 editing, 155 using multiple, 153 Shared Lists pane, 42 short name, 45 Shortcuts pane, 42 single response database questions creating, 128 Single response grid questions, 92 Single response questions, 84, 87 skip and ﬁll adding and deleting, 185 Spelling, 25 Spontaneous awareness questions, 159 Start IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 6, 29 store survey asset, 60, 67 Subheadings add using shared lists, 153 Substituting text, 219 summary options, 348 Superversions selecting in Data Link Properties dialog box, 252 survey asset store into repository, 60 storing, 60, 67 wizard, 60 table preview dialog, 142 tasks settings, 338 Telephone interviews previewing, 234–235 telephone settings, 297 Template calendar question, 168

389 Index

change language, 168 change text size question on every page, 168 click image to proceed, 168 constant sum, 168 format grid, 168 page header, 168 question template, 168 ranking, 168 slider question, 168 split a large grid, 168 substitute from participant record, 168 write to participant record, 168 templates activation, 261 Templates attaching to questionnaires, 229–230, 232 attaching to questions, 231 creating custom, 232 validating, 243 Test individual question, 234 questionnaire, 234–235, 237, 243–246, 258 questionnaire ﬁle, 237 template, 243 Text box, 216 Text editor, 226 Text formatting toolbar, 223 Text questions, 84, 105 Text response grid questions, 92 Text substitution, 219 Time questions, 84, 107 Tips and hints, 370 Toolbars in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 48 moving and resizing, 50 Total awareness questions, 159 trademarks, 377 Translation Notes, 45 Translation Notes tab, 45 Translations selecting, 252 Troubleshooting, 372 True/False questions, 84, 102 Type, 150 Type column, 149 unbounded loop, 120 Underlining, 223 Undo, 54 Ungrouping, 182, 197 Unplugged interview mode, 10 unzipped project templates, 41 upload settings, 276 usage options, 345 Validate questionnaire ﬁle, 237

template, 243 Validate Template dialog box, 243 Validating mode selecting, 255 validation options, 346 Versions selecting, 252–253 Versions tab, 359 View script, 238 View Script dialog box, 238 View tab, 356 Web, 9 Web interview mode, 10 What’s new IBM SPSS Data Collection Author, 3 Width, 216 Windows, 42 wizard store survey asset into repository, 60 Word, 143, 365 Yes/No questions, 84, 102

Similar Documents

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistics

Statistic

Statistics

Statistics

Popular Essays